Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924060183385 CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 924 060 183 385 HEBBEW SYNTAX tfntrotwctorg ffitbxtto Grammar HEBEEW SYNTAX EEV. A. B. DAVIDSON, LL.D, D.D. LATE PROFESSOR OF HEBREW AND OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS HEW COLLEGE, EDINBURGH THIRD EDITION EDINBURGH T. & T. CLARK, 38 GEORGE STREET PRINTED IK GREAT BRITAIN BY MORRISON AND GIBB LIMITED FOR & T. CLARK, EDINBURGH NEW YORK : CHARLES SCRIBNER's SONS First Edition 1894 Second Edition 1896 Third Edition xgoi Latest Impression .... 1958 PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION The need after a comparatively short time for a new Edition of this Syntax encourages the belief that the book is being found serviceable by students and teachers. In the present Edition a few changes have been introduced into the body of the book, and some errors in the Index of passages have been corrected. The main principles of Syntax are printed in larger type, and the less common, poetical or anom- alous, usages thrown into the form of notes. The illustrative examples, at least the earlier ones in each case, have been taken as much as possible from the classical prose, but references have been multiplied, partly in order that the principle illustrated may be seen in various connexions, and partly under the impression that the references might be useful in forming exercises for Prose Composition ; and the VI PREFACE purposes of composition have been had in view in the form given to a number of the sections. Several points in Syntax are still involved in some obscurity, such as the use of the Imperfect, and its interchange with other tenses, especially in poetry ; and the use of the Jussive, particularly in later writings. What has been said on these points, if it do nothing more, will make intelligible the state of the question regarding them. For fuller details Canon Driver's special work on the Tenses should be consulted. From the assumption, perhaps, that the Predicate is the principal element in the sentence, Arabic Grammars usually begin Syntax with the Verb, and this order has been followed in some recent Hebrew Grammars. It may be disputed which order is the more logical in analysing the sentence. The order here followed, Pronoun, Noun, Verb, and Sentence, was adopted partly for the sake of simplicity, and partly to make the book run somewhat parallel to the Introductory Grammar, in the hope that the two might occasionally be read simultaneously. In order to avoid repetition, treatment of Infinitive and Participle, which have both a nominal and verbal character was postponed till the sections PREFACE vii on the Government of the Verb had been com- pleted. I am under great obligations to Mr. Charles Hutchison, M.A., formerly Hebrew Tutor, New College, Edinburgh, who read over the proofs of the first edition, and to several students and reviewers who have made useful suggestions. Edinburgh, February 1896. TABLE OF CONTENTS t PAGB SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN i Personal Pronoun , Demonstrative Pronoun 3 Interrogative Pronoun 6 Relative Pronoun 8 Other Pronominal Expressions 12 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN . '5 Gender J 5 Number . . . '7 Case .... 20 Determination. The Article 22 The Genitive. Construct . 30 Nominal Apposition . 39 The Adjective 44 The Adjective. Comparison 47 The Numerals 5° SYNTAX OF THE VERB . 58 The Perfect . 58 The Imperfect 64 Imperfect with Strong Vav . 70 Perfect with Strong Vav 78 Perf. and Impf. with Light Vav 84 The Moods .... 86 The Moods with Light Vav . 90 Government of the Verb. The Accusative 95 Absolute Object ..... 96 Free Subordination of Words in Ace. 97 Accusative of Direct Object 102 Verbs with two Ace. of the Obj. 107 X CONTENTS PAGE Construction of the Passive . . . . . .112 Subordination of one Verb to another • "3 Infinitive Absolute 116 Infinitive Construct . 123 The Participle 130 Subordination by Prepositions 138 SYNTAX OF THE SENTENCE ' '44 The Sentence itself , 144 Nominal Sentence 145 Verbal Sentence 146 Compound Sentence . 148 Expression of Subject IS' Complement of Verbal Sentence '55 Agreement of Subj. and Pred. '56 Particular Kinds of Sentence 162 Interjectional Sentence 162 Affirmative Sentence . 164 Interrogative Sentence 166 Negative Sentence . . 171 Conditional Sentence . '75 Optative Sentence 182 Conjunctive Sentence . 184 Circumstantial Claus. '85 Relative Sentence 190 Temporal Sentence . '93 Subject and Object Sentence 196 Causal Sentence 198 Final Sentence '99 Consequential Sentence 200 Comparative Sentence 201 Disjunctive Sentence . 201 Restrictive, Exceptive, &c, Sentence 202 Index of Passages 205 Index of Subjects . 230 HEBREW SYNTAX SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN PERSONAL PRONOUNS * § I. In their full form the Personal pron. are employed only in the Nom. case. In the oblique cases (Gen., Ace.) they are attached in the form of suffixes to other words. On the Cases, cf. § 18, Gr. §17. When a pron. in the oblique case is repeated for the sake of emphasis, it is put in the absolute form. Gen. as suff. 1 K. 21. 19 nfiN Dil ^jpi thine own blood. 2 S. 17. 5 NliTDS VQ3.TTD what is in his mouth also. Nu. 14. 32, 2 S. 19. 1, Jer. 27. 7, Ez. 23. 43, Ps. 9. 7, Pr. 23. 15. Or gen. with prep. 1 S. 25. 24 fi^H ^Itf"^ on me be the guilt. 1 K. 1. 26, Ezr. 7. 21. In the ace. Gen. 27. 34 ^NrD} " , ?3^ bless me too. Pr. 22. 19. So when emphasis falls on noun in the oblique case. Gen. 4. 26 N*liTO;l fittj? to Seth also. Gen. 10. 21. — Cf. these exx. Gen. 30. 20; 41. 10, 1 Chr. 23. 13. Rem. 1. Occasionally oblique case has full form. 2 K. 9. 18 QH "$ if reading right, cf. v. 20. Neh. 4. 17 'JK FK the pron. being co-ordinated with the following nouns. Cases like Is. 18. 2 are different, Wfr|D being = Kin 1B»SD (rrn) since it was. Nah. 2. 9 tfn ip'D = KTI IB'K WO since the days she was, i.e. all her days, cf. 2 K. 7. 7. Such a sense is usually riW? (1 S. 25. 28, 1 K. 1. 6, Job 27. 6; 38. 12), and the text is doubtful. Jer. 46. 5 D'nn nen is a clause, D'nn pred. and non subj., though the consn. is more I 2 HEBREW SYNTAX §2-4. usual with finite form than with ptcp. Jud. g. 48, 2 S. 21. 4, Lam. 1. io, Neh. 13. 23. Ps. 89. 48 ^K stands for emphasis first: remember, /, what transitoriness! But cf. v. 51. In 1 Chr. 9. 22 nan seems really obj. to verb as in Aram. Ezr. 5. 12. So Moab. Stone, 1. 18. Rem. 2. When 3 p. pr. is used neuterly for it, it may be mas. or fern. In Pent., where Kin is common, the gend. is matter of pointing, Ex. 1. 16; and everywhere the pron. is apt by attraction to take the gend. of pred., Deu. 4. 6 ; 30. 20, Ez. 10. 15, Ps. 73. 16, Job 31. 11, Jer. 10. 3. The Jem., however, is usual when pron. refers back to some actioq or circumstance just spoken of, particularly if suff., Jos. 10. 13, Jud. 14. 4, Gen. 24. 14 JHK it31 and there- by (the circumstance) shall I know. Is. 47. 7 BnnnK W13J S? thou thoughtest not on the issue of it (the conduct described). Gen. 42. 36; 47. 26, Ex. 10. 11, Nu. 14. 41; 23. 19, 1 S. 11. 2, 1 K. 11. 12. So the verb, Jud. 11. 39 pft WN and it became a rule. Is. 7. 7 ; 14. 24. Rem. 3. By a common gramm. negligence the mas. pron., esp. as suff., is used of fern, subjects. Is. 3. 16 ruppyn. DtV?rni make a tinkling with their feet. Gen. 26. 15 ; 31. 9; 32. 16; 33. 13, Ex. 1. 21, Nu. 27. 7, 1 S. 6. 7, 10, ^m. 4. i, Ru. 1. 8, 22, Song 4. 2 ; 6. 8. § 2. The oblique cases of the Pers. pron. appear in the form of suffixes to nouns, verbs, and particles, (a) Suffixes to nouns are in gen., and are equivalent to our possessive pron. Gen. 4. 1 inttjN his wife, 4. 10 ?pnN thy brother. This gen. is usually gen. of subj., as above, but may be gen. of obj., Gen. 16. 5 ''ppri my wrong (that done me). 18. 21. Cf. § 23, R. 1. If several nouns be coupled by and, suff. must be repeated with each. Deu. 32. 19 Vni^l V3SL his sons and daughters. Gen. 38. 18 ^£1 ^flpl TjSfth thy seal and string and staff. Exceptions are very rare even in poetry. Ex. 15. 2, 2 S. 23. 5. The suff. of prep, and other particles, which are really PERSONAL PRONOUNS 3 nouns, must also be considered in gen. Gen. 3. 17 ^|"VQl£l for thy sake, 39. 10 il72St beside her (at her side). (b) The verbal suff. is in ace. of direct obj. Gen. 3. 13 "W^il ttJmri the serpent beguiled me. 4. 8 ^n2nn?3 and slew him. See § 73, R. 4. The suff. to J"IN is also ace. Gen. 40. 4 Onto J"ritt5?! he served them. 41. 10. § 3. The adj. being but feebly developed the relation of a noun to its material, quality, and the like is often expressed by the gen. V5"ip 1P[ hill of holiness, holy hill. In such cases the suff. is gen. to the whole expression. Ps. 2. 6 "'ttTTp in my holy-hill. Is. 2. 20 iirtt 'h'kto his idols-of- gold. 13. 3; 30. 22, 23; 53. 5. On constructions like Lev. 6. 3 "yy 'HE his linen garment, see Nomin. Appos. The noun with suff., forming a definite expression, the qualifying adj. has the Art. Gen. 43. 29 ]tOj?n MTTN ftXTJ is this your youngest brother. Rem. 1. The suff. to some particles which have a certain verbal force, as nan behold, t^, there is, t?N there is not, liy still, are partly verbal in form (Gr. § 49). But suff. of 1st pers. is '"rtjD i n the sense -while I have being, Ps. 104. 33 ; 146. 2, and niVO since I had being, Gen. 48. 15 (Nu. 22. 30). In ordinary sense Ps. 139. 18. Rem. 2. These uses of the suff. are to be noted. Ex. 2. 9 '^ptimK JFIS* I will give thy hire, i.e. give thee hire. Gen. 30. 18, Jud. 4. 9 in"!??n ^iin vb the glory shall not be thine. Gen. 39. 21 i3fl JJW gave AiVre favour. Ez. 27. 15 rendered thee tribute. Nu. 12. 6, text doubtful. Ps. 115. 7? Job 6. 10, Hos. 2. 8 (her wall = a wall against her). Rem. 3. 1 S. 30. 17 OIT\r(o? their following day, the use of suff. is unique in Heb., though something analogous is common in Ar. The text is dubious. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS § 4. The Demons, pron. nt and Nin are used as in Eng. Jud. 4. 14 O'iin nt this is the day. Gen. 41. 28 llin N*in 4 HEBREW SYNTAX § 5, 6. that is the thing. Deu. i. I D'HITH !"r?N these are the words. On their use as adj. § 32, and R. 3. In usage |"7J refers to a subject when first mentioned, or when about to be mentioned ( = the following), while Win refers back to a subj. already spoken of. Jud. 7. 4, of whom 1 shall say "5|jy» N*|pT ^^ ">& nt ^2J 0«* shall go with thee, that one shall go. Gen. 42. 14 "'iJl"^3. ,; T "1tt)M NIH *>&#* is what I said to you. 32. 3 ; 44. 17. So the common prophetic phrase Ninrt O^S. on t ^ lai ^y (ti me j ust spoken of), Is. 4. 2. The pron. rtt is used almost as a noun in all the three cases. Gen. 29. 27 rifr^T 3^10 the week of this one. 1 K. 21. 2. Gen. 2. 23 W)p] HNT? /Air shall be called. 1 S. 21. 12, 1 K. 22. 17. Is. 29. 11 nt fcW"N"lj? read this (writing). 2 S. 13. 17 JINTfiN fcWlrfptp send this person away; and mas. with same contemptuous sense, 1 K. 22. 27 (1 S. 21. 16). 2 K. 6. 20 n7N" 1 5' , i!"^^ npS open the eyes of these men. Gen. 29. 33. Pron. N1H is not used in this way, though cf. 1 K. 20. 40. Rem. 1. When this, that are used neuterly while &«n is perhaps more common than fern. (Gen. 42. 14, Am. 7. 6), flNf is much oftener used than mas. Gen. 42. 18 VrTj VPS nst do this and ye shall live. 42. 15 l"l&ft3 £e M« shall ye be proved. Is. 5. 25 nxri>33 for (amidst) all this. Is. 9. 11, 20; 10. 4, Hos. 7. 10, Am. 7. 3. The mas., however, is not unusual, esp. in the sense of such, Gen. 11. 6, 2 K. 4. 43. The distinction between this and that stated above is usually preserved, but this thing, these things seem exclusively used. Gen. 24. 9; 15. 1 ; 20. 8. § 5. When Ht is repeated it is equivalent to this . . . that, the one . . . the other. Is. 6. 3 TT\ m b& Ht N"li7l and the one called to the other. 1 K. 3. 23 mttfc n^Tl • • • mnfo MM this one says . . . and the other says. Jos. 8. 22 n-tft iT?H V • V » DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 5 PltJp nTNT some on this side and some on that side. Ex. 14. 20, 2 S. 2. 13, 1 K. 20. 29; 22. 20, Ps. 20. 8; 75. 8, Job I. 16, Dan. 12. 2. Comp. 1 K. 20. 40 thy servant n2Pl nfojy nStTl was busy wzV^ tfto ««^ Ato, where £■«». as Deu. 25. 16 § 6. As in other languages, the Demons, have come to be treated as adjectives. They necessarily make their noun definite, and then conform so much to the usage of adj. as themselves to take the Art. Is. 4. 2 N1PIPI 0^1 on that day. Occasionally, however, Art. is wanting, Gen. 19. 33 TlbyV'l Nin that night, 30. 16; 32. 23, 1 S. 19. 10, Ps. 12. 8. The Art. is always wanting when Demons, adj. qualifies a noun determined by a suff. Ex. 10. 1 TX7Vi "^PIN these my signs. With another adj. or several Demons, stands last. Gen. 41. 35. See § 32. The form Pit >>Pl yonder is generally used as adj. Gen. 24. 65 ; 37. 19, Jud. 6. 20, 1 S. 17. 26, 2 K. 4. 25 ; as pron. Dan. 8. 16. Rem. 1. In some cases the Demons., as a substantive definite of itself, seems to stand in appos. with the defined noun, Ps. 104. 25, Ezr. 3. 12, Song 7. 8. Text of 1 K. 14. 14 is obscure, and 2 K. 6. 33, 1 Chr. 21. 17 are doubtful. With proper names, Ex. 32. 1 nt^'D nt, Jud. 5. 5. With noun defined by suff., Josh 9. 12, 13, Hab. 1. 11. The noun is rarely undefined, Ps. 80. 15 nst |jpa this vine, Mic. 7. 12 (text uncertain). Phenic. says \ "np this grave, and r "13pH. Cf. Moab. St. 1. 3 riNt nD3H this high place. In Ar. Demons, being a noun, stands in appos., before the noun if defined by Art., and after if a proper name or defined by suff. Rem. 2. The Demons., particularly nt, is used with in- terrogatives to add emphasis or vividness to the question. Gen. 27. 21 ^3 nt njjNil art thou my son Esau? See § 7c. In the same way force is added to adverbial and particu- larly temporal expressions. 1 K. 19. 5 ?|SpO nrnsni and lo! an angel. 1 Kings 17. 24 WJHJ flf HBy now indeed I know I HEBREW SYNTAX § 7. 8. 2 K. 5. 22 have just come to me. Gen. 27. 36 D'OJJS fl? «0H> twice; 31. 38 13^ D*li?$f W twenty years now. 31. 41 ; 43. 10 ; 45. 6, Nu. 22. 28, Deu. 8. 2, Jud. 16. 15, 1 S. 29. 3, 2 S. 14. 2, Job 19. 3. Rem. 3. The form nt is often a relative in poetry (as in Aram., Eth.). Like "IK'S it suffers no change for gend. and number. Job 19. 19 *3T3BrO '•rontj nri and they-whom I loved are turned against me. Ps. 74. 2 ; 78. 54 ; 104, 8 ; Pr. 23. 22, Job 15. 17. The form V (Ps. 132. 12 ft) is still oftener used. Ex. 15. 13, Is. 42. 24; 43. 21, Ps. 9. 16; 10. 2; 17. 9; 31. 5 ; 32. 8; 68. 29; 143. 8. Rem. 4. The Demons, unites with prepp. to form ad- verbial expressions. See Lex. On its union with 3 to express such, cf. § n, R. le. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN § 7. The pron. "iQ who ? is used of persons, mas. and fem. ; and TTO what? of things. Both are invariable for gend. and number. (a) The pron. tQ may be used in the three cases. Gen. 3. n ^b "Pail ^p who told thee? 24. 65; 33. 5, Is. 6. 8. The gen., Gen. 24. 23 fiN ''PTGl whose daughter art thou ? 32. 18 ilflN ''pb to whom belongest thou? 1 S. 12. 3; 24. 15, Ps. 27. 1. And ace, Is. 6. 8 n^ttJN ''DTI** whom shall I send ? 1 S. 28. 11, 2 K. 19. 22. The ace. is always preceded by flN- Like other words iQ may be repeated to particularise or distribute. Ex. 10. 8 D" , 3 I ?i"Trr 'TOl "TO who all are they that are to go? (b) The neut. TM2 is also used in all the cases. Gen 31. 36 lyttiBTip what is my offence? 32. 28, 2 K. 9. 18. The gen. by prep., Gen. 15. 8 5HM npSl by what shall I know? Rarely after a noun, Jer. 8. 9 wisdom of what (what sort of w.) ? Nu. 23. 3. The ace, Gen. 4. 10 JTtoy P?D what hast thou done? 15. 2. The fiN is not used before INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN J what. In Jer. 23. 33 N&BTTOTIN rd- NtofeH OflM ye are the burden. With adj. and verbs !"TO has the sense of how. Gen. 28. 17 Kernel how terrible! 2 K. 4. 43 *gb HT |ri« HO CJ'W !"7Nft ^ozc j^«# / set such a thing before a hundred people? Ex. 10. 26, Job 9. 2, Ps. 133. 1. (c) The interrog. pron. strengthen themselves by HT &c. to add vividness to the question. 1 S. 17. 55 "!V|n rtpjp"12l whose son (I wonder) is the lad? 1 S. .10. 11 iTn iTtTTO UPD"^!? what in the world has come over the son of Kish ? Gen. 3. 13 ; 27. 20, Jud. 18. 24, 2 S. 12. 23, Ps. 24. 8. § 8. In the indirect sentence the interrog. remains without change. Gen. 21. 26 ntoy TO ^Vll &b I do not know who did it. 43. 22, Jud. 13. 6, 1 S. 17. 56. The interrog. are also used as indef. pron., whoever, whoso, whatever, aught. Jud. 7. 3 IttJ^ • • • N"V TO whoever is afraid let him return. Ex. 32. 26 "17N mrP? TO whoever is for Je., Unto me (let him come)! 2 S. 18. 12 TO 1"TOttJ have a care whoever ye be! Ex. 24. 14, Is. 54. 15.-1 S. 19. 3 ^h W3m rTO Wlj and if I observe aught I will tell thee. 2 S. 18. 23 rTO" >, rP , 1 YY1N be what may I will run ! Nu. 23. 3, Job 13. 13 ; 26. 7, Pr. 9. 13. In some sentences of this form, however, the strict interrog. sense is probably still to be retained. Deu. 20. 5, Jud. 10. 18; 21. 5, Is. 50. 8. The form "lttJN TO is also used, Ex. 32. 33, 2 S. 20. 11, cf. tiri~TO Ecc. 1. 9. Rem. 1. The neut. no may be used of persons if their circumstances or relations be inquired of, as 1 S. 29. 3 what are these Hebrews ? On the other hand, 'D is used of things when the idea of a person is involved, Jud. 13. 17 who is thy name ? (as usual in Syr.), but generally what in this case, Gen. 32. 28. Mic. 1. 5, cf. 1 S. 18. 18 (rd. *>n my clan), 2 S. 7. 18, Gen. 33. 8, Jud. 9. 28. Some cases are peculiar, and suggest a provincial or colloquial use of id for no ; e.g. Ru. 3. 16 ^3 RtfPD with Jud. 18. 18 DPIK no, Am. 7. 2, 5 8 HEBREW SYNTAX § 9- 3pJ>» Dip' '0 how shall J. stand? Is. 51. 19. The Mass. on Mic. 6. 5 states that the Orientals use 'D for no. Rem. 2. In phrases like WYTVO what profit? Gen. 37. 26, the original consn. was probably What is the profit? (appos. at least is not allowable in Ar.). Ps. 30 10, Is. 40. 18, Mai. 3. 14, Ps. 89. 48, Job 26. 14. In a number of cases the words are separated, Jer. 2. 5 S>1? '? 1KSQVI0 what evil? and second word might be adverb, ace. 1 S. 26. 18 ; 20. 10, 2 S. 19. 29; 24. 13, 1 K. 12. 16. The similar use of ns is against ace, Deu. 3. 24; 4. 7, Jud. 21. 8, 2 S. 7. 23, 1 Chr. 17. 21. — Song 5. 9 It 5 !!? HD what sort of beloved? is no evidence for gen., which cannot be the relation of the words. Rem. 3. These uses of nD are to be noted. Jud. 1. 14 S^VIO what hast thou? i.e. what ails thee ? what dost thou mean, want, &c? Gen. 21. 17, 1 S. 11. 5, Jon. 1. 6. — Jud. 11. 12 :|J} vTID what have I to do with thee? 2 S. 16. 10 ; 19. 23. 2 K. 9. 18, 19 Di^S If 1 """?- Cf. Jer. 2. 18, Ps. 50. 16. Without and with second word, Hos. 14. 9. Passages like 1 K. 12. 16, 2 Chr. 10. 16, Song 8. 4, show how no naturally passes over to be a negative, not. (Ar.). Rem. 4. The expression rif 'N is an interrog. adj. which? what? Jon. 1. 8 fWK DJ> fltt? 'N of what people art thou? 2 S. 15. 2 nnX "VJf fW 'N of what city? 1 K. 13. 12 ; 22. 24, 2 K. 3. 8, 2 Chr. 18. 23, Is. 66. 1, Jer. 6. 16, Job 38. 19, 24, Ecc. 11. 6. The /em., Jer. 5. 7 riNt? ^ for what? In many cases nj Kis usually separated from the pron. or adverb of the rel. clause by one or more words (see exx. above), but there are exceptions esp. in nominal sentences, Gen. 2. 11, Deu. 8. 9; 19. 17, 1 S. 9. 10. Sometimes ne>'R and pron. have an emphasis which must be brought out by expressing a pronom. antecedent. Jer. 32. 19 T^J? "^^ thou -whose eyes. Is. 42. 24 i? WKtpH \\ Is it not Je. ? he against whom, we have sinned. Hos. 14. 4, Ez. 11. 12, Neh. 2. 3 ; cf. Dan. 2. 37 ; 4. 6. Rem. 2. The expression of the separate pron. in nominal sent, occurs mostly when the pred. is an adj. or ptcp., e.g. Gen. 9. 3 ; it is less necessary when pred. is an adverb or a prep, with its gen. after the verb to be, as Gen. 3. 3. When the nominal sent, is positive the pron. usually precedes the pred., Gen. 9. 3, Lev. 11. 26, 39, Num. 9. 13; 14. 8, 27, Deu. 20. 20, 1 S. 10. 19, 2 K. 25. 19, Jer. 27. 9, Ez. 43. 19, Ru. 4. 15, Neh. 2. 18, Ecc. 7. 26, cf. Jer. 5. 15. When the sent, is neg. the pron. follows the pred. Gen. 7. 2 ; 17. 12, Nu. 17, 5, Deu. 17. 15 ; 20. 15, Jud. 19. 12, 1 K. 8. 41. Although the expression of pron. in nominal sent, is genuine Shemitic idiom, it is still mainly in later writings that it occurs. Rem. 3. It is rare that -lty's takes prep, or JIN when antecedent is expressed. Neither Is. 47. 1 2 nor 56. 4 is a case. Is. 56. 4 IB'Sja is under preceding verb choose, cf. 66. 3, 4. In 47. 12 the prep, is carried on from previous clause, in that which, &c, the complement of fljjji being unex- pressed. Zech. 12. 10 (text obscure). In other cases nty'K is distant from anteced. and ns resumptive, Lev. 22. 15 that THE RELATIVE PRONOUN II which they offer. Ez. 23. 40, Jer. 38. 9 might be, in that they have thrown. § 10. The word ""ittJN often includes a pronominal ante- cedent, i.e. it is equivalent to he-who, that-which, they-who, whom, or indefinitely one-who, &c. In this case it is sus- ceptible of government like a substantive, admitting prep, and n^ of ace. When used in this way "IfiJN has the case which, according to our mode of thought, the pronom. antecedent would have. Gen. 7. 23 iflN IttJWI Hi *»N$?1 fQJliL an d N. was left, and they-who were with him. 43. 16 'in , iT73? ^tt5N7 "V?^*! he said to him-who was over his house. 44. 1 irPl'bj? *lttJN"fiN 1^1 and he commanded him-who was, &c. 31. 1 I^IN? "^Nttl of that-which is our father's. 9. 24 to *h rrtMTlttfN JIM STM he knew what his son had done to him. 2 K. 6. 16 12JHM ""IttJN CSn DJTiM ""IttJNto more are they-who are with us than they-who are with them (later for OfiN). Jud. 16. 30 the dead whom he slew in death WT3, rPipPT "lttJNjD tt£\ were more than those-whom he slew in his life. Gen. 15. 4; 27. 8; 47. 24, Ex. 4. 12; 20. 7; 33. 19, Lev. 27. 24, Nu. 22. 6, Jos. 10. 11, 1 S. 15. 16, 2 K. 10. 22, Is. 47. 13; 52. 15, Ru. 2. 2, 9. Ez. 23. 28 ntWto "1$^ "Pi into the hand of those-whom thou hatest. Rem. 1. The consn. in this case is quite the same as in § 9. The so-called rel. clause is complete in itself apart from IK'S, which has no resemblance to the rel. pron. of classical languages. Cf. Lev. 27. 24, Ru. 2. 2, Nu. 5. 7. Cases like Gen. 31. 32 "IK'S DJJ wjVA -whomsoever, are unusual, cf. Gen. 44. 9. Rem. 2. In § 10 the retrospective pronoun is greatly omitted except when gen., cf. Lev. 5. 24; 27. 24, Ru. 2. 2, Is. 8. 23 ; and even prep, and gen. are sometimes omitted where they would naturally stand, Is. 8. 12; 31. 6— par- ticularly with verb to say, e.g. Hos. 2. 14 ; 13. 10. 12 HEBREW SYNTAX §11. Rem. 3. The adverbial complement there, thither, &c, is omitted after the compound -|B>K2, HCK f>33, "tWt i>K, fe> "IB>K, "ltJ>K», &c, in designations of place, Ex. 5. 11; 32. 34, Jos. 1. 16, Jud. 5. 27, 1 S. 14. 47 ; 23. 13, 2 S. 7. 9; 8. 6; 15. 20, 1 K. 18. 12, 2 K. 8. 1. In Gen. 21. 17 Mere is expressed in the nominal sent. (Ar. haithu hud). Rem. 4. On use of W, &c. as Rel. § 6, R. 3, and on Art. as Rel. § 22, R. 4. OTHER PRONOMINAL EXPRESSIONS § 11. The want of a reflexive pronoun is supplied in various ways, (a) By the use of reflexive forms of the verb (Niph., Hith.). Gen. 3. 10 NiriNI N"VN1 I was afraid, and hid myself. 45. 1 pSNtrirn by* fcO he was unable to control himself. 3. S ; 45. 1 ; 42. 7, 1 S. 18. 4; 28.. 8, 1 K. 14. 2; 20. 38 ; 22. 30. (J?) By the ordinary personal pron., simple or suff. Is. 7. 14 Nin "tflfc? ]Pf\ the Lord Himself will give. Ex. 32. 1 3 ^Sl Oilb fiya,U53 "ItiJN to whom thou didst swear by thyself. Jer. 7. 19 Qnb vbri Cpiypa On ^Pton do they provoke me? is it not themselves, &c. Gen. 3. 7; 33. 17, Ex. 5. 7, 11, Is. 3. 9; 49. 26; 63. 10, Hos. 4. 14, Pr. 1. 18, Job 1. 12. (c) By a separate word, esp. tifoi. Am. 6. 8 '1 J7S,ttJ3 ittjp55- J e> h as sworn 3y himself. 1 S. 18. I, 3. Plur., Jer. 37- 9- So l|?, a-Tjj tor*. Gen. 8. 21 'iaV^ '^ "IQ^'l and Je. thought with himself. 18. 12 PTll"^ fy pPKfn Sarah laughed within herself. Gen. 24. 45, 1 S. 1. 13; 27. 1, 1 K. 1 2. 26, Hos. 7. 2. Also D^S /««, presence, self, esp. in later style. 2 S. 17. II rnj?a D" 1 ?^ T^ thou thyself going into battle {rd. perh. D3,"lj?a, awo»^ */**;«). Ez. 6. 9 1EM1 BiT 1 ??! thev s h al l loathe themselves. Ex. 33. 14, Deu. 4. 37, Ez. 20. 43; 36. 31, Job 23. 17. In ref. to things, 02V bone, self-same, self. Ex. 24. 10; chiefly PC. and Ez. Gen. 7. 13, Ez. 24. 2. OTHER PRONOMINAL EXPRESSIONS 1 3 Rem. i. Some other quasi-pronominal expressions are these : (a) Some, several, may be expressed by plur. Gen. 24. 55 D^DJ some days (a time) ; 40. 4 (cf. 27. 44 ; 29. 20 Q^HK ffp* a few days). Ez. 38. 17. By prep. IP with noun. Gen. 30. 14 give me ^53 *SWB some of thy son's mandrakes. Jer. 19. 1 DV'T *3iW? some of the elders. Ex. 17. 5, Ps. 137. 3, and often in later style. (b) Any, every by ?3. Deu. 16. 21 an Ashera fT"''? a?y (kind of) otoo^. ^rey owe, owe, by k^k. Gen. 13. 16 DK jy'S 53V zfowe were able. Anything, ">rn Gen. 18. 14. No, none, by E^K • • ■ NP ; nothing, "IM • • ■ tO, the we^. placed before the verb. Gen. 45. 1 B^K 1DV K? «o«e stood. Hos. 2. 12 na^lP si» B*K rcowe shall deliver her. 2 K. 10. 25 B*K KS1"7N let no one go out. Ex. 16. 19. Deu. 2. 7 Fnpn fcO "O^ thou didst want nothing; 22. 26, 2 S. 17. 19, 1 K. 18. 21. Sometimes strengthened by io, 2 S. 18. 13. Cf. Gen. 3. 1, thou shalt eat of no tree. Ex. 12. 48. The phrase . . . xi' flDWD nothing, 1 S. 12. 4, cf. Gen. 22. 12. (c) 7%is . . . that, the one . . . the other, by HJ ... fit Is. 6. 3 (§ 5), or ins • ■ ■ IflN, Ex. 17. 12, 1 K. 3. 25. One another by WIN . . . B"N or IWlV. . e>"K, Gen. 13. n; n. 3, Ex. 16. 15 ; 32. 27, Is. 3. s ; fern. Ex. 26 3, 5, Ez. 1. 23, Is. 34. 16. (oJ) Each distributively by B»», Jud. 9. 55 tojjck B*K d»l Jud. 7. 7, 1 S. 8. 22 ; 10. 25, 2 S. 6. 19, the noun usually sing., but usually plur. with tents, Jud. 7. 8 vbni6 B*«'r£t!> the men of Israel he dismissed, every one to his tents. 1 Sam. 13. 2. — Also by intjl Is. 6. 2, Jud. 8. 18. When &R would be in the gen. it is placed as casus pendens with a retro- spective suff. Gen. 42. 35 tep3""li"lX K"N"n_3fl every man's bundle of money; 15. 10; 41. 12; 42. 25, Nu. 17. 17. So Gen. 9. 5 Vns K"K TD at the hand of every man's brother, unless vns B"N had become a single expression like one another, and the phrase mean at the hand of one another. Comp. Zech. 7. 10 do not plot VnN E^N nyi the hurt of one another, cf. 8. 17 for the sense. (e) Such is expressed by 3 with fit or suff. Gen. 44. 7 flJPI "1313 such a thing, n^Nfl D'Hlia such things. 41. 38 fits such a one. Jer. 5. 9 flf3 It^N Ma .swA a nation. Gen. 44. 15 y'DS "le-K B»K s«eA as /. 2 S. 9. 8. — 2 S. 17. 15 H HEBREW SYNTAX § 12, 13. JlKtai niftS suck and stick a thing. Jos. 7. 20, 2 K. 5. 4 ; 9. 12, cf. i K. 14. 5. For so and so (person) Ru. 4. 1. Cf. 1 S. 21. 3, 2 K. 6. 8. (/) The pronouns mine, ours, yours, theirs, &c, must be expressed by prep, and suff. Is. 43. 1 nnK 7 thou art 7»?«e ; Gen. 48. 5. Gen. 26. 20 D'OH W the water is owrj. Jer. 44. 28 they shall know anoi '3Bp Dip* '0 "U^ whose word shall stand, tkzW of theirs. GENDER OF THE NOUN 15 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN GENDER OF THE NOUN § 12. Of the two genders, mas. and fern., the mas. is the prevailing one, and by a natural inaccuracy the writer often falls into it even when speaking of a fern, subject, especially in using suffixes. § 1, R. 3. The distinctive fern, termina- tion a, i.e. at (Gr. § 16, R. b) is generally used in adj. and ptcp. referring to a fem. subject. In the case of living creatures, distinction of gender is indicated — (a) By the fem. termination, as b*Ni a hart, fem. fi7*N, thy a youth, fern. TXthy, bs$ a calf, fem. n^JT. (b) By different words, as IN father, DM mother, Tiftn he-ass, fifiN she-ass, 7]N ram, htT\ ewe, ll^ servant, TV2& maid. (c) Or the same word may be used for both genders, and differentiated only in construction, as Hos. 13. 8 b'OttJ 2^T a bear robbed of her whelps, 2 K. 2. 24 D* l '2. r ! Q^0 two bears. So D^yM camels, mas. Gen. 24. 63, fem. 32. 16; DVPN g oddess t 1 K. 11. 5. The grammatical difference, however, does not seem always meant to express a real difference of gend., cf. Jer. 2. 24. Anciently ~\y^ appears to have been of common gend. (d) Or a word of one gend. may be used as name of the class or genus, without distinction of individuals, as i73 dog, INT wolf, mas. ; rQJ^Nt hare, TVtP dove, fem. § 13. Of inanimate things the following classes are usually fem. (Gr. § 16) : — l6 HEBREW SYNTAX §13-15. (a) Proper names of countries and cities, as 722 Babylon, IfTVZ Sidon. Words like 2N1D Moab, &c, when used as name of the people, are usually mas., but fern, when the name of the country, and also when used for the population as a collective personified (§ 116, R. 5). So the word J12 daughter of inhabitants or people, as 722 J"l2, j'faS D2. (b) Common names of definite places, as districts, quarters of the earth, &c, as TJ? city, 72fl the world, 133 the circle (of the Jordan), TIN$ hades (mas. as personified Is. 14. 9), jE^fl the south, I'iDS north, Is. 43. 6. But there are ex- ceptions. (c) The names of instruments, utensils used by man, and members of the body, particularly such as are double, as 2^n sword, Di3 cup, 7^2 shoe; p# eye, JTN ear, 73"1 \ foot, &c. So of animals, pj5 A?r«. Again there are exceptions, as f]N w.f£, nostril, Fp^ ««v£, HS mouth. (d) The names of the elements, natural powers and unseen forces, as UJN fire, ttjpjj soul, n*n wind, spirit (usually), ttjptt? the sun (usually), but ITV moon, is mas. § 14. Some other classes of nouns are fem. 1. Abstract nouns, as HON truth, TTN1% strength, np"J2 righteousness, though there is often also a mas. form, as ~\X$ and 7T\W help, Dp2 and !"TC2p5 vengeance. So adj. and ptcp. used nominally, as we should say as neuters, as PISH evil T T (physical), Hos. 5. 9 n2EN2 a sure thing, Am. 3. 10 nrbj what is straightforward, Mic. 3. 9 rntt}?!"!. And often in the plur. Gen. 42. 7 rfittJp AarcA things, harshly, Is. 32. 4, 8 niTO £/«w things, plainly, J"Vi2'H3 liberal things. Zeph. 3. 4. The mas. plur. is sometimes used in poetry, Ps. 16. 6, 11, Pr. 8. 6 D^-piM. Cf. Is. 26. 10; 28. 22; 30. 10; 42. 9; 43. 18; 48. 6; 58. 11 ; 59. 9; 64. 2, Nu. 22. 18; 24. 13, Jos. 2. 23; 3. s, 2 S. 2. 26, 2 K. 8. 4; 25. 28. 2. Collectives, which are often fem. of ptcp., as nrnfo NUMBER 17 a caravan (from rnH a traveller), 7vT\% captivity (nTlS one going captive), JllttJ"' inhabitants, Is. 12. 6, f"Q^ enemy (of a people), IT? 1 ! the lower classes, 2 K. 24. 14, Jer. 40. 7, plur. Jer. 52. 15, 16. Cf. Mic. 4. 6, Zeph. 3. 19, Ez. 34. 4. 3. The fern., however, sometimes is used as nomen unitatis when the mas. is collect., as "^N fleet, 1 K. 9. 26, fMN « j/«)>, Jon. 1. 3, 4; iyto ^ hair, 2 S. 14. 26, mjjto a hair, Jud. 20. 16, 1 K. 1. 52, but probably coll. Job 415; PPVtlJ a song, Is. 5. 1, mas. generally coll. 1 K. 5. 12, though also singular, e.g. Is. 26. 1. So !~Q3~tt? a chariot, Gen. 41. 43 with 13")fr I K. 5. 6. Perhaps ilflttfe wick, Is. 42. 3; 43. 17, cf. Hos. 2. 7, 11, flax. Rem. 1. Sometimes when a parallel is seen in lifeless things to some organ or feature of living creatures the fern, is used, as IftJ the thigh, loins (sing, and plur.), 2^3"!! the sides, furthest back parts, of a locality; nSD forehead, front, nnsp shin-front, greave. And in a wider way, $ft suckling, child, ripjli'' sucker, shoot. So such words as horns, feet when transferred to things are used in plur. with fern, termination. Rem. 2. The fern, is used where other languages would use the neut., e.g. nxf this, il?S , RE' these two things, Is. 47. 9; nantp nnK o?ie of 'these things, 1 Chr. 21. 10; particularly in ref. to something previously mentioned, Is. 22. 11; 37. 26; 41. 20; 43. 13; 46. 11; 47. 7; 48. 16; 60. 22. See § 109, R. 2. Occasionally the plur. seems used as a neut., where fern, might have stood, Job 22. 21 Dro=rn thereby. Ez. 33. 18, Is. 30. 6. The passages Is. 38. 16; 64. 4 are obscure. NUMBER § 15. Of the three numbers the dual is now little used. On its use cf. Gr. § 16, R. a. The plur. of compound expressions like IN Tf% a father- house or clan, 7TI Tilil a man of valour (wealth), is formed variously. 2 1 8 HEBREW SYNTAX §16,17. i. rriiw jra piur. of second, i s. 31. 9 cnra^ rva their idol temples. 1 K. 12. 31, 2 K. 17. 29, 32, Mic. 2. 9, Dan. 11. 15, Ps. 120. i, &c. Tfh$$T\ TttJ? 2. V^n "nfaa plur. of first, jer. 8. 14 -ttirpii 'ntf /?w^ «A«, Is. 56. 6 "03rT ''ail strangers, cf. w. 3. 1 S. 22. 7, 1 Chr. > 5. 24; 7. 2,9, 2 Chr. 8. 5; 14. 5- 3. O^D Tl^aa plur. of both. Gen. 42. 35 nYY^ Qn^Spl *fe> bundles of money. 1 K. 13. 32 ntoan ^a. 1 K. 15. 20, 2 K. 9. 1 (cf. sing. Am. 7. 14); 23. 19; 25. 23, 26, Is. 42. 22, Jer. 5. 17; 40. 7, Mic. 1. 16, 1 Chr. 5. 24; 7. 5, 7, 11, 40. Cf. Neh. 10. 37. § 16. Many words are used only in plur. (a) Such words as express the idea of something composed of parts, e.g. of several features, as ffOS face, ffHfcW? neck (also sing.), or of tracts of space or time, QTOttJ heaven, D^D water, ffHl^ «5?&» 0« /!fe ortff" «dfe, Is. 7. 20 ; D^PT /#%, D^lpViy eternity, Is. 45. 17, DYfifi «#., ffHiya time of youth, D^apt *'/«* of old age, &c. Comp. d'HBD a letter (also sing.), 2 K. 20. 12, Jer. 29. 25. (b) Abstract nouns. As CTiap blindness, wh^HS. virginity, D^ttJ^p uprightness, D"HS3 atonement, D^aiat whoredom, CD^ttJ requital, fVDSnfl perversity, &c. The plur. in this case may express the idea of a combination of the elements or characteristics composing the thing, or of the acts realising it. (c) The plur. of eminence or excellence (majesty) also expresses an intensification of the idea of the sing.; eg. D^ITW God, and analogically D^ttJVrj? Holy One, Hos. 12. 1, Pr. 30. 3, D'^'vljJ Most High, Dan. 7. 18; so ptcp. referring to God, Is. 54. S, Ps. 149. 2, Job 35. 10. Similar words are D^a'lN lord, master, D^bya owner, cf. Is. 10. 15, Pr. 10. 26. So D^Enfl Teraphim, even of one image. On the consn. of such plur. cf. § 31, and § 1 16, R. 4. NUMBER 19 § 17. Many words in sing, have a collective meaning, and do duty for the plur., as "ipl cattle, j&J sheep, goats, P]t3 children, to^l creeping things, tfiy birds, TTfinlj. cattle, beasts, &c, M^ chariots. Almost any word may be used in the sing, as collective, as ttJ^N men, tl)D3 persons, V5? trees, Gen. 3. 8, "Vliy oxen, Gen. 49. 6, ni"lSt locusts, "yy cities, ]lNt stones. 1 K. 22. 47 ttnpil hierodouLi, 2 K. 11. 10 ]T2rin spears (beside a plur.), 2 K. 25. 1. 1 K. 16. 11 injn Aw comrades (beside a plur.), 1 Chr. 20. 8. Particularly in enumerations, where the emphasis is on the number, and it is sufficient to state the kind or class of thing enumerated, eg. 77)1 slain, 2 S. 23. 8, H^ni TT\^ young virgins, Jud. 21. 12, Tj7p kings, 1 K. 20. 1 (more usual Jud. 1. 7), }D3i z>z'#£j, Is. 7. 23, 7t£?ft proverbs, I K. 5. 12; and expressions like monSp Tidy warriors, 2 Chr. 26. 13, ]N2 nj>l Gen. 47. 3, cf. 2 K. 24. 14, SlDil /$« burden bearers, Neh. 4. 4 (1 K. 5. 29 rd. perhaps 72D). It is, however, chiefly words that express classes of persons or things that are used in the sing., and words of time, weight, and measure. Cf. § 37. Rem. 1. The plur. is quite natural in such instances as b^V timber (pieces of wood), WtS!) wheat in grain, 2 S. 17. 28 (ntsn wheat in crop, Ex. 9. 32). So D^P and nni?B» barley, &c. Rem. 2. The plur. seems often used to heighten the idea of the sing., 1 S. 2. 3 nijn knowledge, Jud. 11. 36 vengeance, 2 S. 4. 8, Is. 27. 11 understanding, 40. 14; Ps. 16. 11 joy, Ps. 49. 4 ; 76. 1 1 ; 88. 9 abomination, Pr. 28. 20, Job 36. 4. Cf. § 166. In poetry the plur. comes to be used for sing, without difference of meaning, Gen. 49. 4 bed sing, and plur., 1 Chr. 5. 1, Ps. 63. 7; 46. 5; 132. 5, Job 6. 3 (seas). Rem. 3. The plur. is sometimes used to express the idea in a general and indefinite way. Jud. 12. 7 1J&I ^VS in (one of) the cities of Gilead, 1 S. 17. 43 staves, 2 K. 22. 20 thy graves, Job 17. 1, Gen. 21. 7, Ex. 21. 22, Zech. 9. 9, Neh. 6. 2. The word '"W matters of seems to convey the same meaning, Ps. 65. 4. 20 HEBREW SYNTAX §18. Rem. 4. Such words as hand, head, mouth, voice, &c, when the organ or thing is common to a number of persons, are generally used in the sing. Jud. 7. 16 put the trumpets into the hand of them all, v. 19, Gen. 19. 10. Jud. 7. 25 the head of Oreb and Zeeb, cf. 8. 28 ; 9. 57, Jos. 7. 6, Dan. 3. 27. Ps. 17. 10 AfcezV mouth, Ps. 78. 36 tongue, 144. 8. So to clap ^ the hands 2 K. 11. 12, Is. 55. 12. So perhaps rfeu and "US carcases, Is. 5. 25, 1 S. 17. 46, cf. Trrafia Rev. 11. 8. But cf. Aeaak Job 2. 12, and usually eyes, though cf. Gen. 44. 21. Rem. 5. The idea of universality is sometimes expressed by the use of both genders, Is. 3. 1 WJJE'DI \VfO every stay, Deu. 7. 14. Also by the use of contrasted expressions, as Zech. 7. 14 3B>1 ~tiy passing or returning, 9. 8, and the common 3WV1 fdV restrained or free, Deu. 32. 36, 1 K. 14. 10; 21. 21, 2 K. 9. 8 ; 14. 26. Cf. Noeld. Carm. Arab. 42. 4. Rem. 6. The coll. ipn cattle is used in plur. Neh. 10. 37, but 133^S is to be read in same verse. The parall. to 2 Chr. 4. 3, viz. 1 K. 7. 24, reads differently. Plur. of 33T chariots, Song. 1. 9. In Am. 6. 12 rd. perhaps QJ "•ij??- THE CASES § 18. The cases are not marked by means of terminations except in rare instances. They must be supposed, however, to exist, and an accurate analysis of construction will take them into account. The cases are three, Nom., Gen., and Ace. When a word is governed by prep. 7 to, the dative is sometimes spoken of, and the abl. when it is governed by prep. )p from, &c. ; but this is inaccurate application of classical terminology. 1. The Nom. — The nom. has no particular termination (Gr. § 17). The personal pronouns are only used in nom., their oblique cases appearing as suffixes. The nom. is often pendens, being resumed by pronoun (§ 106). 2. The Gen. — (a) All words after a cons, state are in gen., THE CASES 21 as ttJ^n DID the marts horse, (b) All words governed by a prep, are in gen., as O^il HY>7 at the cool of the day ; cool is gen. by prep., and day is gen. by cool, (c) All suffixes to nouns and prep, are to be considered in gen., as 'iDID his horse (h. of him), PT72N beside her (at the side of her). (d) Sometimes a clause assumes the place of a gen. to a preceding noun, the clause being equivalent to the infin. or nomen actionis. Is. 29. 1 T]l 11211 Jl >, lp thou city where David dwelt (of David's dwelling).' 3. The Ace. — There are traces of a case ending in a. (a) The ace. may be directly governed by a verb, Plpll DlNirnN he took the man. The verbal suffixes are usually t t It v J direct obj., ^nplUI and put him. (b) The ace. may be of the kind called adverbial or modal, as in designations of place, time, &c, in statements of the condition of subj. or obj. during an action, or in limitations of the incidence of an action, or the extent of the application of a quality (§ 70, § 24, R. 5). (c) So-called prepp. like ^IIIN behind, 72St beside, &c, are really nouns in this kind of ace, except when preceded by another prep., as "HPINE from behind, when, of course, they are in the gen. (d) Many times clauses with 13 that, IttJfc?. "lti?N'fiN how that, assume the place of a virtual ace. to a preceding verb. 4. The construct is not a case but a state of the noun. The cons, is the governing noun in a genitive-relation ; its state or difference of form from the abs. or ordinary form is due to the closeness of the connection between it and its gen. The cons, may be in any case, as nom. ^INi! lilfi litO N^nn and the gold of that land is good; or gen. Ijinil fa?l in the midst of the garden, where midst is gen. by prep. ; o^ ace. D^llil ^V TH ~^$? to kee P the wa y of the tree of life, where way is ace. after keep, and cons, before its gen. tree, &c. 22 HEBREW SYNTAX § 19, 20. The cons, occasionally ends in zj more rarely in o or u. In Eth. the vowel a marks the cons. DETERMINATION. THE ARTICLE § 19. There is no indef. art. in Heb., the noun if indef. remains without change. Job 1. 1 TV*71 ttJ'W there was a man. 1 K. 3. 24 y\n v^np fetch me a sword. The predicate naturally is indeterminate and without Art. Gen. 3. 1 Wnit 71*71 ttJnsn the serpent was cunning. 2. 12, 25 ; 3.6; 29. 2, 2 S. 1 8. 7. The inf. or nomen actionis retains too much of the verbal nature to admit the Art. Occasionally nSHil the knowing occurs. Gen. 2. 9, Jer. 22. 16. And fern. verbal nouns approach more closely the real noun, and occasionally take Art. Ps. 139. 12 iTVlNS rDttffljS the dark- ness is as the light. Rem. 1. The numeral ins one is sometimes used almost like an indef. art., esp. in later style. Ex. 16. 33, 1 S. 7. 9, 12, 1 K. 19. 4 ; 22. 9, 2 K. 7. 8; 8. 6. Or it has the sense of a certain; Jud. 9. 53; 13. 2, 1 S. 1. 1, 1 K. 13. 11, 2 K. 4. i. The words ty'N man, r\VH woman prefixed to another term appear to express indefiniteness, &03J B^N a prophet, Jud. 6. 8; 4. 4, 2 S. 14. 5 ; 15. 16, 1 K. 3. 16; 7. 14; 17. 9. Eth. uses man, woman in the same way. 1 The inflection of an Ar. noun 'abd " servant " may illustrate the cases. Sing. Abs. with Art. Cons, and Gen. N. *abd«» a serv. 'el 'abd« the sen 'abdw lmaliki the s. of the king. G. 'abdj'ra 'el 'abd*' 'abd:' lmaliki. A. 'abdarc 'el 'abda Dual. 'abda lmaliki. N. 'ahd&ni 'el 'ahddni 'abdd lmalikt. G.A. abdaini 'el 'abda»re* Plural. "abdayz lmaliki N. 'abdflna 'el 'abdtna 'abd seems a noun, Am. 6. 3. Jer. 5. 13 "Cnn the Art. might be relative, either he who speaks, or that which he speaks (§ 22, R. 4), both little natural. Scarcely more likely, the " He has said " (the phrase they use). Sep. "Win. Rem. 3. In some cases the subj. and pred. are coexten- sive, and pred. has Art. Gen. 2. 1 1 23bn Mil it is that which goeth round. Particularly with ptcps. Gen. 42. 6 he was the seller; 45. 12, Deu. 3. 21; 8. 18; 9. 3, 2 S. 5. 2, 1 Chr. 11. 2. . Rem. 4. Certain archaic terms, originally appellatives, have acquired the force of proper names, as ?iNK> hades, ?3Fl the inhabited world, Dinn the primary ocean (plur. with Art. Is. 63. 13, of waters of Red Sea, Ps. 106. 9), and do not take Art. And so some other terms used in poetry, which greatly dispenses with the Art., as D^fl princes, Ps. 2. 2, BfaK man, Ps. 8. 5, *]fe» field, Ps. 8. 8, nie^S darkness, mid- night, Ps. 23. 4, n>iwn wisdom, power, Is. 28. 29, Job 6. 13. Also QX"l to£W 0.*, even in a comparison, Ps. 92. 11. So the divine names i?% V W, tf^». § 20. Words may be determinate in themselves or from construction, and with these the Art. is not used. Words def. of themselves are — (a) Proper names of persons, countries, cities, rivers, &c, as miT Jehovah, ITttJD Moses, IN'ift Moab, *& Tyre, mQ Euphrates. (3) The personal and other pronouns, Ex. 20. 2 mrf 1 ''DilN / am the Lord, Gen. 29. 27 flNt #10 the week of this one, 41. 28 ISlTl WH that is the thing, 3. 11 Tiff ip who told thee? — Words determined by construction are — nouns in the cons, state before a definite gen., whether this gen. be a proper name, a pron. (separate or suffix), a noun defined by Art., or itself a cons, determined by a definite gen. (Gen. 3. 24). Ru. 1. 3 iQW ttf'W the husband of Naomi Gen. 24. 23 .TIN ''O r& • t:it * ; - . - the daughter of whom (whose d.) art thou? 2. 25 OlNPf 'iflttJNl the man and his wife. 2. 19 XViWT} T^T\ the beast of 24 HEBREW SYNTAX § 20, 21. the field. 3. 24 VPyjn YJP T!fi. the way of the tree of life, 6. 18 spaa itfj. Rem. 1. Proper names of persons are always without the Art., and so names of peoples called after a personal ancestor, as Moab, Edom. Many names of places, rivers, &c, however, were originally appellatives and sometimes retain the Art., as Aw? Lebanon (the -white mountain?), iTWi Jordan (the river ?), njnsn Gibeah (the hill), '?? Ai (the mound). Usage fluctuates. Rem. 2. The def. gen. makes the whole expression de- finite. But this rule seems to have exceptions, the cons, remaining indef. This is the case at any rate with prop. names, as 1 S. 4. 12 r?^3 ^N a man of Benjamin, Josh. J. 21 a Babylonish garment, Jud. 10. 1, Deu. 22. 19, and apparently in other cases, Lev. 14. 34 a house, Gen. 9. 20, Jer. 13. 4. It is to be assumed in general, however, that the def. gen. determines the whole expression. Thus Heb. may say 3HJH the gold (so called generic Art. § 22), i.e. gold, and so Gen. 41. 42 3Hjn "l?"j the chain of the gold, i.e. a chain of gold ; the kind of definiteness, whatever it be, extends over the expression. Song 1. 13, 14; 4. 3. Cf. 1 S. 25. 36 ^'^n nriK'D the banquet of the king, i.e. a royal banquet; Jud. 8. 18 royal children. The use of Art. fluctu- ates, Song 1. 11, 13. Rem. 3. In compound proper names the Art. maintains its usual place. 1 S. 5. 1 "Wn |3N Ebenezer. And so with gentilics, Jud. 6. 11, 24 "HTjn *3K the Abiezrite, 1 S. 17. 58 •>arf?n TPz the Bethlehemite. 6. 14. Rem. 4. A number of cases occur of Art. with cons, or noun with sufF. (a) In some cases the text is faulty, being filled up by explanatory glosses from the marg. Gen. 24. 67 omit Sarah his mother. Jos. 3. 11 om. jyon, so v. 14, and v. 17'' ma. Jos. 8. 11 om. war (13. 5, cf. § 29, R. 5). Jer. 25. 26 rd. nia^DDH abs. and om. earth (Sep.), Ez. 45. 16 om. earth (Sep.). Jer. 32. 12 ruptsn iBBn can hardly be appos. the bill, the sale ; probably ungrammatical explicitum. from marg. for it of Sep. 1 Chr. 15. 27 rd. probably NB>B3 Dnw'rn (Berth.), cf. w. 22, 23. 2 Chr. 8. 16 cf. Ex. 9/18, DETERMINATION. THE ARTICLE 25 2 S. 19. 25. Is. 36. 8, 16 "VlEte ibon is correct in 2 K. 18. 23, 31, and hardly belongs to the original text. Jer, 48. 32 flD2E> JBjn is voc. and perhaps protected by Lam. 2. 13 nan DPBVV; otherwise Is. 16. 9. — 1 S. 26. 22, 2 K. 7. 13 are corrected by Mass. More serious faults of text, 2 S. 24. 5 (Dr. in loc), Ez. 46. 19, Dan. 8. 13. (b) Jos. 13. 9 " Medeba unto Dibon " is appos. to the Mishor, explaining it. Ez. 47. 15 might be the way to Hethlon, cf. Hos. 6. 9, but text dubious. Gen. 31. 13 133s ?N1V3 ?xn can hardly be, I am the God at Bethel (ace). Cases like 2 S. 2. 32 ; 9. 4, &c, are not parallel, and Num. 22. s is no doubt to be read : the river (Euph.), unto the land of the children, &c. 2 K. 23. 17 (possibly nap mn). 1 K. 14. 24, Art. may have slipped in mechanically after ^3. Jud. 16. 14 possibly "in*n, iINn being subsequent gloss. Ezr. 8. 29 perhaps rVDKWI, "house of God " being in loose appos., and "weigh " a virtual verb of motion (carry to and weigh). Ps. 123. 4 (DyiKBO? as second clause). Nu. 21. 14, 2 S. 10. 7, 1 K. 16. 24, &c, are cases of appos. With suff. Lev. 27. 23 1?iyfJ, the phrase is technical and suff. otiose. Jos. 8. 33 i^nn the (other) half of it. Is. 24. 2 rin"D|3 in assonance with the other words. Mic. 2. 12 possibly 'rn "^4/^. 2 K. 15. 16 after f>3. Jos. 7. 21, Pr. 16. 4, Ezr. 10. 14. § 21. Determination by Art. — With individual persons or things the Art. is used when they are known, and definite to the mind for any reason, e.g. — (a) From having been already mentioned. Gen. 18. 7 "1i£L-):a Hj??l he took a calf; v. 8 he took nto^ -|ttfN "IjXLlTp the calf which he had got ready. (b) Or from being the only one of their kind, as tfpttjn the sun, n^il the moon; the earth, the high priest, the king, &c. (c) Or, though not the only one of the class, when usage has elevated into distinctive prominence a particular indi- vidual of the class, as "IHSH the river (Euphrates). 7J£l,n 26 HEBREW SYNTAX § 21, 22. the lord (Baal). Ittt&H the adversary (Satan), Job i. 6, Zech. 3- 1, "ltyri the stream (Nile, cf. Am. 8. 8, the stream of Egypt), 13311 the circle (of Jordan), r^STl /^ house (Temple), Mic. 3. 12, Ps. 30. 1, QTHNil the (true) God. (d) Or when the person or thing is an understood element or feature in the situation or circumstances. Gen. 24. 20, she emptied her pail ri|2i$iT7fc$ into the trough (of course existing where there were flocks to water). 35. 17 "iKJfctofl fi7;?^'?i3 ano - ^ e midwife (naturally present) said, 38. 28. So 18. 7 the boy; 22. 6 the fire and the knife; 26. 8 the window. Ex. 2. 15 the well (beside every encampment). Jud. 3. 25 the key. 1 S. 19. 13, 2 S. 18. 24, Pr. 7. 19 the goodman. Eng. also uses the def. Art. in such cases; at other times it employs the unemphatic possessive pron. Gen.. 24. 64, she lighted 712201 73?Q from her camel ; v. 65 she took frpy&il her veil; 47. 31 his bed. Jud. 3. 20, 2 S. 19. 27, 1 K. 13. 13, 27, 2 K. 5. 21. (e) It is a peculiar extension of this usage when, in narratives particularly, persons or things appear definite to the imagination of the speaker — the person just from the part he played, and the thing from the use made of it. In this case Eng. uses the indef. Art. 2 S. 17. 17 rD/ifl ITTHm nnSttfn and a wench always went and told them. I S. 9. 9 ttPNn "V3N !"l!3 thus spoke a man when he went, &c. Jos. 2.15 71115. QT^Jpl and she let them down with a rope. Ex. 17. 14 1SU2. fiNT IhS write this in a book; 1 S. IO. 25, Jer. 32. 10, Job 19. 23.— D'eu. 15. 17, Ex. 21. 20 with a rod, Nu. 22. 27, Jos. 8. 29 on a tree, Jud. 4. 18 a rug, v. 21 a tent- pin, v. 19 a milk bottle, 6. 38 a cupful, 9. 48; 16. 21 (3. 31 ?). So probably Is. 7. 14 rTOpyil a maid. Gen. 9. 23 a garment (less naturally his, i.e. Noah's). Deu. 22. 17, Jud. 8. 25, 1 S. 21. 10 (some passages may belong to d). So with rel. cl. Ps. 1. 1, Jer. 49. 36. DETERMINATION. THE ARTICLE 27 (/) The person addressed is naturally def. to the mind, and the so-called vocative often has the Art. 1 K. 18. 26 1333? ^ItePT O Baal, hear us! 2 K. 9. 5 "ifon ^pj?N unto thee, Captain\ Jud. 6. 12 ^TlPl TiiJl ^3J/ '■■ Je. is with thee, O man of valour. Jud. 3. 19, 1 S. 17. 58, 2 S. 14. 4, Hos. 5. 1, Jer. 2. 31, Is. 42. 18, Jo. 1. 2, Zech. 3. 8. The noun with Art. is probably in appos. to thou, ye understood. Cf. Job 19.21, Mai. 3. 9, Mic. 1. 2. — 2 K. 9. 31, Is. 22. 16; 47. 8; 54. 1, 11, Zeph. 2. 12. Rem. 1. In such cases as DVil to-day, rWn to-night, DJJSn this time, Gen. 2. 23, ropn this year Jer. 28. 16, the definite- ness is due to the fact that the times belong to the speaker's present and are before him. Jud. 13. 10 DV2 that (a former) day is defined by the circumstance that occurred on it. Rem. 2. To e belongs the phrase DVil TPI occurring 1 S. i. 4; 14. 1, 2 K. 4. 8, ii, 18, Job 1. 6, 13; 2. 1. Probably: and it fell on a day (lit. the day, viz. that on which it fell, &c). Others make D1TI sub/., and the day was, i.e. there fell a day. The vav impf. following is less natural on this view, but the explanation of Art. is the same. — Gen. 28. 1 1 a place prob. belongs to e; it is hardly heilige Stdtte (like Ar. maqam) either here or 2 K. 3. 11. § 22. It is on the same principle as in § 21 that classes of persons, creatures, or things have the Art. The classes are known just from the fact of their having distinct characteristics. But, further, in such cases the individual possesses all the characteristics which distinguish the class, and the class is seen in any individual. Hence the use of the sing, is common. (a) The sing, of gentilic nouns is so used, as Gen. 13. 7 WiSn the Canaanite, 15. 21. Of course also the plur. with Art., rarely without, though D^ttDS Philistines, is more common; cf. 2 S. 21. 12. (£) So adjectives and ptcps., as j^H^n the righteous, 28 HEBREW SYNTAX 5 22. ytthn the wicked. Ptcp., Jos. 8. 19 lTiNS"T the ambush, 1 S. 13. 17 rPfTtttarT £&)£& before the sun, v. 5, 7. So in archaic or semi-poetical phrases like earth and heaven Gen. 2. 4, Ps. 148. 13, Gen. 14. 19 ; beast of the earth Gen. 1. 24, cf. Ps. 50. 10; 104. 11, 20, Is. 56. 9. In prose also the Art. is omitted with expressions familiar, Ex. 27. 21 "IJJID ^HN tent of meeting (as we say " to church," cf. John 6. 59 ev avvaycoyrj), 1 K. 16. 16 N2X IE' commander in chief. So king; 1 K. 21. 10, 13 to curse God and king, cf. 1 K. 16. 18, Am. 7. 13. Gen. 24. 11 1~\y Tw> at evening time, Deu. 11. 12 to year's end, 4. 47. Also such words as head, hand, foot, face, mouth. Is. 37. 22 shake t?iO the head, Mic. 7. 16 T\trb)l T put the hand upon the mouth. Job 21. 5, Pr. 11. 21; 16. 5. Gen. 32. 31 face to face, Nu. 12. 8 mouth to mouth. 2 S. 23. 6 T£ with the hand, Is. 28. 2, Neh. 13. 21, 2 Chr. 25. 20. Is. 1. 6 from foot-sole to head. Jer. 2. 27 to turn ^'V the back. The words heart, soul, eyes, &c, when in gen. by an adj., usually want the Art. Ps. 7. 1 1 upright of heart. Is. 24. 7, Ps. 95. 10 (Deu. 20. 6 Art.). Ps. 101. 5, Job 3. 20, Jud. 18. 25, cf. Ps. 37. 14, Job 30. 25. In particular the word {o before such words without Art. may mean all, the whole. Is. 1. 5 CfNVpa the whole head, 9. 11 the whole mouth, 2 K. 23. 3 the whole heart . . . soul, Ez. 36. 5. And even in other cases, Is. 28. 8 all tables. So phrases like 'O'SS all living, It^rM all flesh. — The phrase 30 HEBREW SYNTAX §23. ]1K ^J?a is usually anarthrous (Ps. 125. 5 Art.). And certain terms are used with a kind of technical brevity, e.g. 7^\ boundary, Jos. 13. 23, breadth, &c. (in measurements), 2 Chr. 3. 3. So " gate," " court," &c. (§ 32, R. 2). Cf. Mai. 1. 10, 11. Rem. 4. In later writings particularly the Art. is used like a rel. pron., as subj. or obj. to a verb and with prep. Jos. 10. 24, 1 Chr. 26, 28; 29, 8. 17, 2 Chr. 1. 4 (older usage Jud. 5. 27, Ru. 1. 16), 29. 36, Ezr. 8. 25 ; 10. 14, 17 (Jud. 13. 8 might be ptcp. without m.). Ez. 26. 17 also as accented is perf. The art. with ptcp. is usual (§ 99), and a number of cases accented as perf. of \'y verbs are certainly fern, ptcp., how- ever the accentuation is to be explained, e.g. Gen. 18. 21 their cry n«3n which is come; 46. 27, Is. 51. 10, Ru. 1. 22; 4. 3. Gen. 21. 3 iir"6l3n is ptcp. 1 K. 11. 9, Is. 56. 3 are also probably ptcps., and should be so pointed, unless the pointing is to be explained as following the type of s'b verb, cf. 1 K. 17. 14 i"l?3Fi. Dan. 8. 1 being late is doubtful. 1 S. 9. 24 for ^vJ?n that which is upon it, rd. probably n v^fJ the (fat) tail (Hitz. rppjil as imp. hiph. ?). Jos. 10. 24 is anomalous in spelling, and possibly should be read D'ppnn. — Ar. occa- sionally joins Art. to finite verb, the ass a/yujadda'u which has its ears cut off. Of course it is said that Art. is for alladhi the rel. THE GENITIVE. CONSTRUCT § 23. In the compound expression formed by the Gen. and the preceding cons, state, as "-|7QiTEl the son of the king, the first word is hurriedly passed over, and con- sequently shortened where possible (Gr. § 17), and the accent falls on the last half of the expression. The first half of the expression is called in Oriental grammar the annexed, the second half that to which annexion is made, and the relation between them annexion. The gen. may be a noun (subst. or adj.), a pronoun, or a clause. The cons, must be a noun (subst. or adj.). The use THE GENITIVE. CONSTRUCT 3 1 of the gen. is very wide. It expresses almost any relation between two nouns, corresponding often to the semi- adjectival use of nouns in our own language, as tree-fruit, fruit-tree, seed-corn, water-pot, except that the order of words is reversed, fruit of tree, tree of fruit, &c. The gen. may be said to be either gen. of the subject or gen. of the object, and this distinction applies to pron. suffixes, which are also in the gen. Gen. 27. 41 "^IN 72SI "•ipl the days of mourning for my father ; 3. 24 ff^nn Y^ Ipn tne way to the tree of life; 42. 19 Dp" 1 ^ TiSJTj. "Qtt? corn (needful) for the famine of your houses ; 2 S. 8. 10 ^F\ rftfcrhp tiW engaged in wars with Toi; Is. 9. 6 fiN-TrTOSJJn ^ fifcWjp the zeal of Je. will do this ; 26. 1 1 Q^nfcWj? WT). they shall see thy zeal for the people (Ps. 69. 10). Gen. 16. 5 •'pOQ ^p73? my wrong (that done me) be on thee ; 29. 13 Jft2BJ I'pJP the news about Jacob (2 S. 4. 4). Is. 32. 2 D"|t "irip a covert from the rain. Ps. 60. 10 ^TT") "PD 1NV3 Moab is my wash-pot. Is. 56. 7 'THDtt tf% m y house of prayer. Gen. 44. 2 V^lfij P|D3 his corn-money. Gen. 18. 20, Is. 23. 5, Am. 8. 10, Ob. 10, Hab. 2. 17. Rem. 1. The gen. of the subject may be (a) the possessor of any object, as Jer. 7. 4 nW ?yn the temple offer, Gen. 4. 1 frltPK his wife, (b) The subject to which any quality or attribute belongs, 1 K. 5. 10 nb?E' riDan the wisdom of Solomon ; 10. 9 '' nans the love of Je. (c) The agent in any action, especially after pass, ptcp., Is. 53. 4 D^fvK fiats stricken of God; or the instrument, Is. 22. 2 &6l 3nPI 7?ri &6 nonpp 'np not slain by the sword nor dead through war. Cf. on Particip. § 98. The gen. of the object is the converse of this, and may be : (a) the possession of a possessor, Gen. 42. 30 pKH \i'"lK the lord of the country, (b) The quality or attribute belonging to any subject, 1 K. 20. 31 ipn ^TD kings of clemency, Is. 30. 18 t3BE>p 'n?K a God of justice, (c) The o£/ princes, and very often in later writings. Or more generally: Is. 51. 11 oSfy niTOto everlasting joy; Zech. 11. 4 TlSVyp ]tift the flock (destined) for slaughter; Is. 13. 3 iflJUJ Vfvpy my /r"ntt5j?"Dy they are a stiffnecked people; Gen. 24. 16 Tto£ Tlij^O niltO "W3!T! and the girl was very pretty; 2 S. 9. 13 V75*} ^JjlttJ DDS lame in his two feet; 1 s. 25. 3 a^Sm in aJiNi-n i«n ns^ bate mita nwxn ~ • t -: 1- - • x : - - ■ v v - t • It the woman was of great discretion, and beautiful in form, but the man was evil in his doings. Gen. 12. 11 ; 26. 7; 29. 17; 39. 6; 41. 2-6, Ex. 4. 10; 6. 12, Deu. 9. 6, 13, Jud. 3. 15 ; 18. 2$, 1 S. 2. s ; 22. 2, 2 S. 4. 4, Is. 1. 4, 30; 3. 3; 19. 10; 20. 4 (n£ "iQlton); 29. 24; 54. 6, Am. 2. 16, Ps. 24. 4, Job 3. 20; 9. 4, Lam. 1. 1, Song 5. 8. Rem. 1. The gen. of material, a ring 0/ gold, is not par- titive, but explicative — a ring which is gold. Rem. 2. The gen. of quality, &c, forms along with its cons, a single conception, hence the suff. goes to the gen. Ps. 2. 6 'E'liJ "in my holy hill, Deu. 1. 41, Is. 2. 20 ; 9. 3 ; 30. 22 ; 31. 7 ; 64. 9. 10, Zeph. 3. 11, Job 18. 7. Cf. § 27. Rem. 3. The gen. of attribute or quality is very common with certain nouns, B^K, n^N man, woman, 15, J13 a>», daughter, ?y3 owner, possessor. Ex. 4. 10 D 11 "!^ B"K a £»orf speaker, Job 11. 2 OinBB' 'K a babbler, 2 S. 16.' 7 D'OT K a bloodsliedder, Pr. 25. 24 E , ?*"!9 ^B/S a brawling viom&n. Gen. 9. 20; 25. 27, 2 S. 18. 20, 1 K. 2. 26, Ps. 140. 12. — Pr. 11. 16; 12.4; 12.19; 28 -5! 29. 1,8, Ru. 3. 11, Zeph. 3. 4. 1 S. 14. 52 ^.CH? mighty man, 26. 16 1YID ^3 deserving death, 1. 16 -WO? na a worthless person. Nu. 17. 25, Deu. 3. 18, Jud. 18. 2, 2 S. 3. 34, 2 K. 14. 14, Is. 5. 1 ; 14. 12, Jer. 48. 45, Jon. 4. 10, Job 5. 7 ; 28. 8.— Mic. 4. 14, Mai. 2. 11, Ecc. 12. 4. And in stating age, 1 S. 4. 15 DWfTja fW rubB«) 98 years old. Gen. 50. 26, Nu. 32. n, Josh. 24. 29, Jud. 2. 8, Gen. 17. 17. 3 34 HEBREW SYNTAX §24-27. Gen. 37. 19 nioVin ^5?3 the dreamer, 2 K. 1. 8 *1$? '3 te>y, Pr. 23. 2 Bto '3 of large appetite. Gen. 14. 13, Ex. 24. 14, Is. 41. 15; 50. 8 (adversary), Jer. 37. 13, Nah. 1. 2, Pr. 18. 9; 22, 24; 24. 8, Neh. 6. 18, Ecc. 7. 12, Dan. 8. 6 (two-horned).— \ S. 28, 7, 1 K. 17. 17, Nah. 3. 4.— In 2 S. 1. 6 DifchS seems to mean war-horses, but cf. Dr. or Well, on v. 18. Rem. 4. Adverbs and particles being really nouns may stand virtually in the gen., 1 K. 2. 31 Dan W causeless blood- shed, Nu. 29. 6 TBTin n^> Ate continual burnt-offering, Ez. 39. 14, 'n 'EON, Deu. 26. 5 OJtt? '"0 a few men, Jer. 13. 27 V?? ^DJ? after Aow /o«£\ 2 S. 24. 24, Hab. 2. 19, Ez. 30. 16 (if read, right). And of course such particles as r.K, Vl?? &c. may themselves take a gen. after them. Rem. 5. The consn. in (d) is the usual one in Heb., of the type integer vita ; the ace. of limitation after adj. and ptcp. is uncommon, e.g. Is. 40. 20 florin J3DOJ] he who is poor in oblation, Job 15 10 D'D; T??1 3"1N tne l° r d of the country ; 24. 22 2!"It DT2 a ring of gold. Of course proper names and all pron., whether separate or sumxal, are def. of themselves. § 20. A number of constructs may follow one another, each depending on the one after it as its gen. Gen. 47. 9 \JttJ ifo* VjlljJ "Mpl the days of the years of the lives of my fathers ; 1 K. 2. 5 bwiW rClNl? "nto ^Xdh to the two captains of the hosts of Is. Gen. 41. 10, Lev. 10. 14, Nu. 6. 13, Josh. 4. 5, 2 K. 10. 6, Is. 10. 12; 21. 17, 1 Chr. 9. 13 (if Til be read. Perhaps h has fallen out before J"0N7D). § 27. As in annexion the two members form a single expression, nothing (except the Art. to the gen. and the n of direction to the cons.) can come between them, (a) An adj. qualifying either of the members must stand outside the expression. Jo. 3. 4 b"nXl '^ CO the great day of the Lord, Gen. 27. IS nHlpnp hhXn n^ 1to# "nSl the best garments of her elder son Esau; Gen. 10. 21 TfTiirr fiS 1 ' YlN the elder brother of Japheth; 44. H^Di 1 T\T$% Nl*l he came to the 36 HEBREV: SYNTAX § 27, 28. house of J.; 28. 2; 43. 17; 46. 1, Deu. 4. 41, 1 K. 19. 15. — Deu. 3. 24; 11. 7; 1 S. 25. 25, Is. 36. 9. (£) For the same reason not more than one cons, can stand before the same gen. For ex. the sons and daughters of the man cannot be expressed thus : UPNrr TtfiEb ^23., because the form 135, not being dependent, is without reason. Various forms are adopted. (1) VTTi22 , l tt^Nn 1 31- , 1 . T : (2) rriiim tfwn v&. (3) &vb (yon) nram D^an. The first is lightest and most usual. Gen. 41. 8 the magicians of Eg. and her wise men (=the mag. and wise men of E.), Jud. 8. 14 the princes of Succoth and her elders (=the pr. and el. of S.). The second is occasional. Gen. 40. I nj^UJlD ilD^m. 'ft'lJ/Q the butler of the king of E. and the baker; Ps. 64. 7 pay iS"! tt^N 1~!J7) the breast of each and the heart is deep. The third, circumscription of gen. by prep. 7, is common, and gains ground in the later stages of the language. Gen. 40. 5 B ^rh IttJN nDfcrTj nptttan.— This circumscription must be had recourse to also when the first member of a gen. relation is to be preserved indef., the second being def. 1 S. 16. 18 l, ttJ']7 ]Si a son of Jesse; cf. 20. 27 ^"jl. the son of Jesse (David), 1 K. 2. 39 D'Hiy^tt) ^tfOttr? two slaves of Shimei, Gen. 41. 12. See more fully Rem. s, below. § 28. Such words as 73 all, IT multitude, many, are nouns, and are followed by gen. Gen. 8. 9 V"}Nn"73 all (of) the earth, Ps. 51. 3 ?J' , Qhn lh? according to thy many mercies. So the numerals. Gen. 40. 12 D^W ]"lttJ7tt) three days. See § 29 Apposition, and § 36 seq. Numerals. On Adj. in gen. by their noun, cf. § 32, R. 5. Rem. 1. The cons, before a clause (§ 25) is scarcely a mere formal shortening of the word due to the closeness of connexion. It has syntactical meaning, the clause being equivalent to inf. cons, with suff. ; e.g. 1 S. 25. 15 = -^3 THE GENITIVE. CONSTRUCT 37 «??>™? (Pr. 6. 22), Ps. 4. 8 = d:3T an m'D (Hos. 4. 7 ; 10. i, Deu. 7. 7). In other cases there is om. of rel. pr. More like a mere formal shortening- is the use of the cons, before prepp. In poetry and the higher style chiefly the ptcps. (and nouns) of verbs that govern by a prep, are put in cons, before the prep. The real consn. in this case is by prep, and the cons, is secondary, as appears from Jud. 8. 11 D^PlNa \J«E>n (so Sep.) with Art. — Is. 5. 11 "l|53? TOTO; 9. 2 n'Sjja nrnpp; 2 8. 9%ip "hx*, jud. 5. 10, 2 s'. 1. 21, Is. 14. 19 ; 56. 10 (inf.), Jer. 8. 16, Ez. 13. 2, Ps. 2. 12, Job 24. 5. The few cases of shortening before vav copid. seem due to assonance, Ez. 26. 10 (cf. Jer. 4. 29), Is. 33. 6, or to the ear being accustomed to the cons, form before words closely connected, Is. 35. 2. In Is. 51. 21 the coming word j" seems to influence the preceding " drunken." Jer. 33. 22 'nfc TOO is altogether anomalous (cf. v. 21) ; Hag. 2. 17. Rem. 2. On indef. cons, before def. gen. cf. § 20, R. 2. Rem. 3. Sometimes an adj. is used nominally and brought within the chain of constructs. Is. 28. 16, a corner-stone rni? , - of preciousness of a foundation ; perhaps v. 1, 4 flower si} of a faded-thing (faded flower), Jer. 4. 11 wind of dry- ness. In some cases the Abs. seems retained in a phrase. Is. 28. 1 r 'O^H OW KM the fat valley of those stricken down of wine; v. 3 DIM. Ps. 68. 22, Pr. 21. 6? Text is doubtful, Is. 63. 11, the words "Moses," "his people," being wanting in Sep. Ez. 6. 1 1 r\V,"i wanting in Sep. Is. 32. 13 nrby ["Pip may be loose subord. in ace. On Is. 19. 8, cf. Rem. 1. — The consn. 2 S. 1. 9, O K'tl ~\YJ i>3 (Job 27. 3, Hos. 14. 3), where io seems separated from its gen., is un- certain. The i>3 appears rather to be used adverbially, wholly, in whole, cf. Ecc. 5. 15 (Ps. 39. 6 ; 45. 14) and the Chald. T ^>3p ^3 Dan. 2. 8, 41, &c. Rem. 4. An instance of two cons, before a gen. is Ez. 31. 16, but Sep. wants aroi. Dan. 1. 4 is scarcely an ex., cf. Is. 29. 12. Occasionally the first word seems to stand loosely in Abs., Is. 55. 4; less necessarily 53. 3, 4. In the broader or emphatic style, when one cons, would be followed by several gen., it is repeated before each. Gen. 24. 3, God of heaven and God of earth ; 11. 29; 14. 13, Jos. 38 HEBREW SYNTAX § 28, 29. 24. 2, though usage fluctuates, Gen. 14. 22 ; 28. 5, Ex. 3. 6, 16 with 4. 5, 1 K. 18. 36. There is nothing unusual in several gen. after one cons. Deu. 5. 19 ; 8. 8 ; 32. 19, Jud. 1. 7, 9, Is. 1. 11, 28; 37. 3; 64. 10, Ps. 5. 7, Pr. 3. 4. On the other hand Deu. 8. 7, 15, &c, are ex. of loose rhetorical accumulation of terms. Cf. Deu. 3. 5, 1 K. 4. 13. Rem. 5. Circumscription of the gen. is used: 1. When it is needful to preserve the indefiniteness of first word. 1 S. 16. 18 'Pv |3 a son of Jesse, 1 S. 17. 8, 1 K. 2. 39, Gen. 41. 12, Nu. 25. 14, Song 8. 1. Similarly the so-called ^ of authorship, in? "liOtD a psalm of ' D., or simply Tip by David. 2. When it is desired to retain for the first noun the some- what greater distinctiveness given by the Art. Gen. 25. 6 ; 29. 9 ; 47. 4, Jud. 6. 25, 1 S. 21. 8, 1 K. 4. 2, 2 K. 5. 9, Ps. 116. 15; 118. 20. 3. When it is necessary to retain a definite designation or expression in its completeness. 1 K. 15- 23 '^ '$$ D, P£ IF. " 1SD the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah, 2 K. 11. 4 the centurions, Ru. 2. 3 rjn? rn&n nppn Afe field-portion (property) of Boaz, 2 S. 23. 1 1 the field-portion (piece of country) ; cf. 2 K. 9. 25, Nu. 27. 16; 30. 2, Gen. 41. 43, Jos. 19. 51, 2 S. 2. 8, 2 Chr. 8. 10. Sometimes also with words not declinable, as Tera- phim Gen. 31. 19. And in general to express the gen. relation of, belonging to, in consns. where the case could not be used. Am. 5. 3 of, in, the house of Isr., 1 K. 14. 13, Jer. 22. 4, Am. 9. 1, Ezr. 10. 14, 1 Chr. 3. 1, 5; 7. 5. 4. For the same reason the circumscription is usual in dates and with numerals. Gen. 7. 11 in the 600 year nb V.n? of the life of N., 1 K. 3. 18 W]# H^tWl 0V3, Gen. 16. 3, iK. 14. 25, and often. Cf. on dates, § 38c The circums. occurs, however, without significance and gains in later style, Ps. 123. 4, 1 S. 20. 40, Jer. 12. 12 nirvij mn the sword of Je. 5. The gen. suff. is circumscribed in the same way, perhaps with some emphasis. 1 K. 1. 33 7 "IPX riTlBn my mule ; cf. v. 38, Ru. 2. 21, Lam. 1. 10, cf. 3. 44. So the curious **? nm my wife (a w. of mine) 2 Chr. 8. 11. After suff. Song 1. 6 w , °" 13 tny own vineyard, Ps. 132. n, 12. Rem. 6. A noun in appos. with a cons, is sometimes attracted into construction. 1 S. 28. 7 31S rfcga ntste a woman NOMINAL APPOSITION 39 possessing an Ob. Is. 23. 12 ; 37. 22 'X na JWI3 £fe virgin, the daughter of Zion. Jer. 14. 17, Deu. 21. 11. And some- times a noun in cons, is suspended by being repeated before its gen., or by the interposition of a synonym in appos. Gen. 14. 10 ion nnso nVlNa pits, pits of bitumen. Nu. 3. 47, Deu. 33. 19, Jud. 5. 22 ; 19. 22, 2 S. 20. 19, 2 K. 10. 6 ; 17. 13 (Kere), Jer. 46. 9 (if text right), Ps. 78. 9, Job 20. 17, Dan. 11. 14. 1 K. 20. 14 is different, and Ps. 35. 16 obscure. NOMINAL APPOSITION § 29. With a certain simplicity and concreteness of thought the Hebrew said: The altar is brass, the table is wood, instead of the altar is brazen, the table is of wood. Similarly he said: The ark is three storeys, the altar is stones, instead of consists of three storeys. So : the homer is barley; the famine is three years; his judgments are righteousness; I am peace. When, therefore, two nouns stand related to one another in meaning in such a way that they may form the subj. and pred. in a simple judgment or proposition, as, the altar is brass, they may be made to express one complex idea by being placed in apposition, the altar, the brass, for the altar of brass, or, the brazen altar ; a homer, barley, for of or in barley. In the former case altar is the principal thing, and brass is explana- tion; in the other barley is principal, and said to be the pertnutative (substitute or exchange) for the measure. In many cases appos. is used as in other languages, as, /, the Lord; his servants, the prophets, &c. Apposition is used — (a) In the case of the person or thing and its name. 2 S. 3- 3i "VH ^^ri the king David; Nu. 34. 2 |3tf| TW1 the land Canaan; 1 Chr. 5- 9 ms "lH^i! the river Euphrates, Gen. 14. 6 "V^to O-Tlil^ in their mountain Seir. Gen. 24. 4, 1 S. 3. 1 ; 4. 1, 1 K. 4. 1 ; 16. 21, 24, Ezr. 8. 21 ; 9. 1. In such cases as Nu. 34. 2, I Chr. 5. 9 the gen. is more common, though apposition may seem more logical. 40 HEBREW SYNTAX §29. If the personal name be second the nota ace. TIN or prep, if before the appellative has to be repeated. Gen. 24. 4 "'237 pn2?7 to my son Isaac; 21. 10. Gen. 4. 2 TTyf? tpFfi SinTM VnN'fiM bore his brother Abel; and fiN is usual before the proper name even when the appell. wants it, particularly if any word come between them. Is. 7.6; 8. 2, Gen. 22. 20, 21; 48. 13, Ex. I. 11; Jud. 3. 15, 1 K. 11. 14. On the other hand, there is no repetition of JIN or prep, with appell. when second. Gen. 16. 3 nrtHDtt? "l2iTfiN took H. her maid; 11. 31 ; 12. 5 ; 14. 16; 20. 14; 24. 59. Gen. 4. 8 VHM ?lll'7M Dp"! rose up against Ab. his brother. — Gen. 11. 28, Jud. 8. 27, 2 S. 7. 8, 10, Is. 22. 20. Cf. Gen. 43. 28, 2 S. 11. 17. (b) The person or thing and its class. 1 K. 7. 14 nt$fc$ STift/N a woman, a widow (widow woman) ; 2 K. 9. 4 ^V2H tOSSH the prophetical youth (not, the youthful prophet); Ex. 24. 5 D^TpT'tp DYGt sacrifices (pi) peace-offerings (gen. 'ttj ^nit later). Deu. 22. 23, 1 S. 2. 13, 2 S. 10. 7. Gen. 21. 20 a shooter, a bowman, and 6. 17 the flood, waters; the second word merely explains the archaic or unusual first. (c) The thing and its material, which may also be con- sidered the individual and its general class. 2 K. 16. 17 nCJnan lHan the brazen oxen; Deu. 16. 21 V^'^S m©N t : • 'tt ■ 1 •• t t" -: an Askera (of) any wood; Ex. 39. 17 2!ltn J"ini3?n the cords (of) gold; Ex. 28. 17 four ?1N D^tt rows (of) stones {gen. 39. 10); 2 Chr. 4. 1 3, two rows pomegranates, Ez. 22. 18, 1 Chr. 15. 19, Zech. 4. 10.— 1 Chr. 28. 18 1HT ClV^n the cher. {of, in) gold, Lev. 6. 3. In 2 K. 16. 14 rd. perh. abs. ryiyan; butcf. 23. 17. {d) The measure, weight, or number, and the thing measured, weighed, or counted. 2 K. 7. 1, 16, 18 TvTO TVtXD O^irtP D^nNDl a seah flour and fttw jra&r barley, Gen. 18. 6, Ru. 2. 17 D"nirt?? np^S about a» #>/«a/i of barley. Ex. NOMINAL APPOSITION 41 29. 40 1^ t^tlH ffJEn the fourth of a hin of wine ; ib. a tenth of fine flour, Nu. 15. 4, Ex. 9. 8; 16. 33, Nu. 22. 18, 1 K, 18. 32, Lev. 6. 13. — Gen. 41. 1 Qijp 1 ' D?ri2tt5 two years of /», 2 S. 13. 23. 2 S. 24. 13 Ijn D^tf yi$ 7 ^«ra of famine; ib. "yyy D^p' 1 fitij?0 3 days of pestilence. Gen. 29. 14, Nu. 11. 20, Deu. 21. 13, 2 K. 15. 13; Gen. 45. 11, 1 Chr. 21. 12, Ez. 38. 17, Dan. 11. 13. 2 K. 3. 4 100,000 rams, wool (fleeces), but 1 S. 16. 20 is not an ass-load of bread, but an ass laden with b. (text dubious). — 1 K. 16. 24 *p3 0^331 f° r two talents of silver, 2 K. 5. 23, cf. v. 17 ; iS. 17. 5'. With different order, Neh. 2. 12 13VP D^tMN men, few, Is. 10. 7 ; Nu. 9. 20 "iSDTp 0"W n ban? (mi for in). In other cases the usual order is Isaiah the prophet Is. 39. 3, Abiathar the priest 1 S. 30. 7. 42 HEBREW SYNTAX § 29. Hos. 5. 13 kingjareb is obscure ; Pr. 31. 1 perhaps L. king of Massa. Rem. 2. Repetition of prep. &c. before proper name has exceptions, Gen. 24. 12, 1 S. 25. 19 (but Sep. om. Nabal, cf. v. 25), Job 1. 8. With my, thy, his people Israel om. is more common. Rem. 3. In most of the cases a — e the gen. may be used (§ 24), i K. 7. 10, 2 K. 5. 5, 1 Chr. 29. 4, 2 Chr. 8. 18 ; 9. 9, 13. Cf. Ez. 47. 4 D^no '» with D'3-O 0»O. Rem. 4. In cases like 1 Chr. 28. 18 anr MVian where object is def. and material indef. the latter might be in ace. of specification, cher. in gold ; Lev. 6. 3 linen garment (g. in linen) ; and so cases like Gen. 18. 6 three seahsfine flour, though appos. is more natural. Ar. has four ways of connexion : appos. ; the prep, min, of (explicative) ; the gen.; and ace. of specif. Such passages as Ps. 71. 7 TV 'pno my strong refuge, Ez. 16. 27 nBT :|3"yn thy lewd way, Hab. 3. 8, 2 S. 22. 33, seem cases of appos., the noun being explanatory. Of course the second noun is not gen., but an ace. of limitation is less natural and expressive, and cases like Ps. 38. 201^ 'SMtp, 35. 19; 69. s; 119. 86, Ez. 13. 22 are of a different class (§ 70, 71, R. 2). Lev. 26. 42 W?? 3pJ?!, &c, Jer. 33. 20 Di s n '2 start from the gen. the cov. (of) with facob, and when the annexion is broken by the suff. the second noun is loosely left without prep., cf. Jer. 33. 2i. An ace. of specification with proper name or def. noun is improbable. With Ezr. 2. 62, Neh. 7. 64, comp. Jer. 52. 20. Rem. 5. Some cases of apparent appos. are due to errors of text. Josh. 3. 14 om. n^ian, 8. n om. nontan, cf. v. 10, as explanatory margins. Jos. 13. 5 v?an Y~>xn might be like Nu. 34. 2 (but Sep. otherwise). Jud. 8. 32 perhaps rnBJMike 6. 24. Is. 11. 14 rd. 1033. Jer. 8. 5 om. Jems. and Ez. 45. 16 om. psn, both with Sep. Rem. 6. The word i>3 all instead of taking gen. is often placed in appos., 2 S. 2. 9 rfe htrw\ Is. allofit, 1 K. 22. 28, Is. 9. 8; 14. 29, 31, Jer. 13. 19, Mic. 2. 12 ; often in Ezek., 11 15; 14. 5; 20. 40, &c. The archaic form of suff., as 2 S. 2. 9, is common, Is. 15. 3; 16. 7, Jer. 2. 21 ; 8. 6, 10; NOMINAL APPOSITION 43 20. 7 (15. 10 rd. wgj> DHj)3 or D????). — In such phrases as 1 S. 4. 10 WW B^N 1D2J1 e«cA is in appos. to subj. in the verb (pi. tents except Jud. 20. 8, 2 K. 14. 12 K'th.). In prose the plur. verb mostly precedes, but in higher style often follows, Is. 13. 8, 14. Rem. 7. An anticipative pron. sometimes precedes the subj. or obj., which then stands in appos. with the pron.; Ex. 2. 6 TWTIK insiffl and she saw him, the child, Ez. 10. 3 E^Nn iNba when he came, the man. Ex. 7. 11 ; 35. 5, Lev. 13- 57. Josh. 1. 2, 1 K. 21. 13 (2 K. 16. 15), Jer. 31. 1, Ez. 3. 21 ; 42. 14 (text?); 44. 7, Ps. 83. 12, Pr. 5. 22, Song 3. 7, 1 Chr. 5. 26; 9. 22, Ezr. 3. 12 ; 9. 1, Dan. 11. 11, 27. — In 1 K. 19. 21 Sep. wants " the flesh," and in Jer. 9. 14 " this people." The usage is common in Aram., and pre- vails in later style; it appears in Pr. 1-9, 10-22, but not in 25-29. . Rem. 8. When the same word is repeated in appos. intensity of various kinds is expressed ; e.g. the superl. of adj., 1 S. 2. 3 very proudly, Is. 6. 3 most holy, Ecc. 7. 24 very deep. With nouns Gen. 14. 10, Ex. 8. 10, 2 K. 3. 16 pits, pits (sheer pits), Jud. 5. 22, Jo. 4. 14. — With words of time the idea of continuity, constancy, Deu. 14. 22 rOB* XXW year by year. Often with prep. 2, Deu. 15. 20 fijtsa nJB>, 1 S. 1. 7, Nu. 24. r, Jud. 16. 20, 2 K. 17. 4. Comp. Deu. 2. 27 always by the road, 16. 20 always right- eousness. Ex. 23. 30, Deu. 28. 43. (2) With Numerals the idea of distribution; Gen. 7. 2 seven, seven (by sevens), 7. 3, 9, 15, Josh. 3. 12, Is. 6. 2; sometimes with and, 2 S. 21. 20, 1 Chr. 20. 6. Gen. 32. 17 each flock separately ; 2 K. 17. 29; 25. 15. (3) When words are joined by and the idea of variety is expressed; Deu. 25. 13, 14 stone and stone (divers weights), Ps. 12. 3, 1 Chr. 12. 34, Pr. 20. 10. The usage is very common in later style to express respective, various, several, 1 Chr. 28. 14 the respective services; v. 15 the several lamp- stands; v. 16 the various tables. 1 Chr. 26. 13, 2 Chr. 8. 14; 11. 12; 19. 5, &c, Ezr. 10. 14, Neh. 13. 24, Est. 1. 8, 22, and often. With ^3 prefixed, Est. 2. n, 2 Chr. 11. 12 (also post-Biblical). 44 HEBREW SYNTAX §30-32. THE ADJECTIVE § 30. The adj. as attribute, being virtually in apposition to the noun, is placed after it, and agrees with it in gend., numb., and case. Gen. 21. 8 ^"na rmtjjfp tMW he made a great feast; 20. 9 H^ PMIfln "h^ H^lPr thou hast brought on me a great sin ; Is. 5. 9 fTOttJ? D >1 3.1 0*P& many houses shall be desolate. It also agrees in determination, being without the Art. if its noun be indef., but having the Art. if the noun be determined in any way (by Art., def. gen. or suff.). Gen. 21. 8; 20. 9 above. 2 K. 4. 9 tt$"»N ttfnj? BVl^N a holy man of God; 1 S. 12. 22 ^"TiTT to$ his great name; 17. 13 EPTTiirr ^ttJI ^ JVJP0 the three eldest sons of Jesse; Is. 8. 7 ClplSyn "1i"f2n ""ft tfAe many waters of the River. If there be several adj. the concord of all is the same ; Is. 27. 1 fffflftm rfanSm iltipn ^im ' 'tt-: 1- : t :-: t! t - :-: with his sore and great and strong sword. The concord of the adj. when pred. is the same as when it is qualificative, though liable to be less exact. The position of pred. in the sentence is also variable (§ 103 seq.). The pred. is usually indefinite. § 31. The adj. having no dual is used in plur. with dual nouns; Is. 35. 3 nv?tp3 U^"% failing knees; 42.7 ri'pD? riYTiy D^y to open Wind eyes; Ex. 17. 12 O'Hl? HtpiD ' V Y V 1 the hands of M. were heavy (hand mas. only here, cf. Ez. 2. 9). Gen. 29. 17, 1 S. 3. 2, Ps. 18. 28; 130. 2, Pr. 6. 17, 18. With collectives agreement may be grammatical in the sing., or ad sensum in the plur. ; 1 S. 1 3. 1 5 Q^NSDSn DVn *\121) the people that were present with him ; but in v. 16 WXGSn Dyn. § 115. With the plur. of eminence the adj. is usually sing. ; Is. 19- 4 !~ltt?j7 D"01N AarjA master. Ps. 7. 10 (THS DTf^N righteous God; but in some parts of the Hex. (E) plur., THE ADJECTIVE 45 Josh. 24. 19 D^ttftj? O^rnN a holy God (cf. pi. vb. Gen. 20. 13; 35. 7). So 1 S. 17. 26 D^Pf 'tf the living God, Deu. 5. 23, Jer. 23. 36, but also in N 2 K. 19. 4, 16. Cf. Teraphim of single image, 1 S. 19. 13, 16. Gen. 31. 34 (E), where Ter. is treated as pi., may be doubtful. § 32. The demonstrative adj. Jit, Kin this, that, have the same concord as other adj. But (1) they necessarily make their noun def., ITHl ttJ^NPT this man, DUD COTT those days, and have themselves the Art. (2) In the case of nouns determined by pron. suff. they are in Appos. without the Art., Ex. 10. 1 TVVto ^Qftii these my signs ; and so always. (3) With another adj. or several they stand last, 1 K. 3. 6 iTSi! Tilan "ipnn this great goodness (v. 9); Deu. 1. 19 Ninn MTiSm ^lan *m)3n that great and terrible wilder- ness: Gen. 41. 35 H^Nil n^lPT n^atSPt D'OttfrT these good coming years. Rem. 1. Occasionally the adj. precedes the noun, par- ticularly y] in plur. (sing. Is. 21. 7; 63. 7, Ps. 31. 20; 145- 7). J er - l6 - l6 > Ps - 3 2 - 10; 89. 51, Pr. 7. 26; 31. 29, Neh. 9. 28, 1 Ch. 28. 5. Ez. 24. 12 (fern, cons.) might suggest that in some instances of the sing, the adj. is used nominally. — Is. 28. 21 the adj. maybe pred. , strange is his work. In other cases the adj. is independent and the consn. apposition, Is. 23. 12 thou violated one, virgin, &c. ; 53. 11 perhaps the place of p'1X is due to attraction of vb. p'W ; 10. 30 also apposition, thou poor one, Anathoth (Ew. al. would rd. rWV imp. answer her). Jer. 3. 7, 10 mU3 is almost a proper name, Treacherous, her sister. Rem. 2. Sometimes the noun is defined and adj. without the Art. (1) Numerals as ins one, and words similarly used as ins another, DUT many, being def. of themselves, may dispense with Art. Gen. 42. 19 (Art. v. 33), 1 S. 13. 17, 2 K. 25. 16, Jer. 24. 2, Ez. 10. 9; Gen. 43. 14, Jer. 22. 26, Ez. 39. 27. (2) In some cases the adj. is ace. of condition, or at any rate of the nature of pred. Gen. 37. 2, Nu. 14, 37, 4.6 HEBREW SYNTAX § 32, 33. i S. 2. 23 (Sep. wants), Is. 57. 20 (11. 9?), Ez. 4. 13; 34. 12, Hag. 1. 4, Ps. 18. 18; 92. 12.— Is. 17. 6 prob. re*. 'sn ''SyD. (3) Possibly euphony in some cases led to om. of Art. 2 S. 6. 3, unless new cart expressed a single idea (cf Mic. 2. 7) to which Art. was prefixed. (4) Other exx. Jer. 2. 21, where Hitz. suggests that pH} *11D may = ]S» DniDH, 1 S. 15. 9 where rd. DK031 fin? (cf. 1 K. 19. 11) at any rate. Dan. 8. 13; 11. 31. So formulas like V Orbs, D«n '» the living God. In other cases the adj. is defined and noun without Art. (1) Numerals and similar words like fa, having a certain definiteness of their own, may communicate it to their noun, which then dispenses with Art. Gen. 21. 29; 41. 26, Nu. 11. 25, cf. 2 S. 20. 3, Gen. 1. 21 ; 9. 10. (2) Certain half- technical terms came to be def. of themselves, as court, gate, entrance, &c. (§ 22, R. 4): court 1 K. 7. 12, 2 K. 20. 4 (K're), Ez. 40. 28, 31 (47. 16 text obscure); gate Ez. 9. 2, Zech. 14. 10 (Neh. 3. 6, gate is cons.); entrance Jer. 38. 14. So -way 1 S. 12. 23, Jer. 6. 16 (cf. Jud. 21. 19); day, par- ticularly with ordinals, Gen. 1. 31, Ex. 12. 15; 20. 10; Deu. 5. 14, Lev. 19. 6 ; 22. 27 ; cf. Is. 43. 13 DVD = DVno. (3) Other exx. 1 S. 6. 18; 16. 23, 2 S. 12. 4, Jer. 6. 20; 17. 2 (Ps. 104. 18) ; 32. 14 (text obscure), Zech. 4. 7, Neh. 9. 35, Ps. 62. 4, Ez. 21. 19 (text uncertain). 2 K. 20. 13 rather as Jer. 6. 20 than as Song 7. 10. 1 S. 19. 22 rd. perhaps fl&fj (Sep.) for fajn. (4) With ptcp. Jud. 21. 19, Jer. 27. 3; 46. 16 (Zech. 11. 2). Rem. 3. The usage § 32 (2) goes throughout all stages of the language, Gen. 24. 8, Ex. 11. 8, Deu. 5. 26; 11. 18, Josh. 2. 14, 20, Jud. 6. 14, 1 K. 8. 59 ; 10. 8 ; 22. 23, Jer. 31. 21, Ezr. 2. 65, Neh. 6. 14; 7. 67, 2 Chr. 18. 22; 24. 18, Dan. 10. 17. — Josh. 2. 17 is doubly anomalous (cf. Jud. 16. 28). The demons, is without Art. sometimes in the phrase ton D773 on that night, Gen. 19. 33 ; 30. 16 ; 32. 23, 1 S. 19. 10, cf. Ps. 12. 8 (§ 6, R. 1). 1 S. 2. 23 text dubious. — On the other hand 2 K. 1. 2 ; 8. 8, 9 rd. vH (cf. Jer. 10. 19). In 1 S. 17. 17 num. may define DrA (i S. 14. 29?). In 1 S. 17. 12 text faulty. The order § 32 (3) may be changed when adj. is em- THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON 47 phatic, 2 Chr. 1. 10, or when other specifications are linked to it, Jer. 13. 10. Rem. 4. When two adj. qualify a fern, noun the second is sometimes left in mas. 1 K. 19. 11 pfni rAviJ fin a. great and strong wind, Jer. 20. 9 (1 S. 15. 9). And in cases of a commodity and its measure or number the adj. may agree with the commodity as the main thing, 1 S. 17. 17 this ephah of parched corn ; v. 28. Rem. 5. The adj. is sometimes used nominally and put by the noun in gen.; 2 K. 18. 17 133 P'fl a great force, Is. 22. 24 |Bj3!l $3"b all vessels o/" the smallest, Song 7. 10 ntePl p) wine g/ 1 /Ae best. Deu. 19. 13 ; 27. 25, Jer. 22. 17 (cf. 2 K. 24. 4), Nu. 5. 18, 2 K. 25. 9 (Am. 6. 2 ?), Zech. 14. 4, Ps. 73. 10; 74. 15 (cf. Ex. 14. 27); 78. 49; 109. 2, 2 Chr. 4. 10, Ecc. 1. 13 ; 8. 10. — Other exx. of adj. used nominally, Gen. 30. 35, 37 (exposing the white), Deu. 28. 48 (and nakedness), Josh. 3. 4 (a distance), Jud. 9. 16; 14. 14 (sweetness), Josh. 24. 14, 2 K. 10. 15 (perh. om. ns), Jer. 2. 25; 15. 15; 30. 12, Is. 28. 4 (flower of a fading thing), v. 16, Ps. in. 8, Job 33. 27 (perverted right). — Conversely the noun may be put in gen. by the adj. used nominally, often with superlative meaning, Jud. 5. 29 (the wisest), Is. l 9- XI »' 35- 9» Ez - 7- 24; 28. 7. Ex. 15. 16, 1 S. 16. 7; 17. 40, Jer. 15. 15, Ps. 46. 5 ; 65. 5. Pr. 16. 19, bsB' might be inf. Rem. 6. The adj. when it expresses the characteristic attribute of the noun is sometimes used instead of it ; Is. 24. 23 f33pri the moon (the white), ilBnn the sun (the hot), 30. 16 ?j? the horse (swift), Jer. 8. 16, Mai. 3. 11 fefcn the consumer (locust). Mostly in poetry and less common than in Ar. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON § 33. The language possesses no elative form of the adj. Comparison is made by the simple form, followed by prep. ip, Gen. 3. 1 rnteil J"W btp D11^ more cunning than all the beasts; Deu. 11. 23 03Jp 0' , 7"T3 £3^3 nations greater 48 HEBREW SYNTAX §34. than you ; Hos. 2. JlH^D TN 'h 1*113 ^ it was better for me then than now; I S. g. 2 D^!T73P ?£& taller. Jud. 14. 18, 1 S. 24. 18, 2 S. 19. 8. With better the subj. is often a clause (inf.), Gen. 29. 19, Ps. 118. 8, 9, Pr. 21. 3, 9 (§ 89). (b) The quality (tertium comp) is often expressed by a verb, Gen. 41. 40 ^QQ /TJN I a/?'// &? greater than thou ; 29. 30 HnVe ^ITVnN irWI he loved R. wr« *>&*» L., 2 S. i. 23 >nia JlYnNQ 1?P 0*18)30 they ze/m? swifter than eagles and stronger than lions. Gen. 19. 9 tJ7 yi3 nriy OfTO now will we treat thee worse than them. Gen. 37. 4 ; 48. 19, Deu. 7. 7, Jud. 2. 19, 1 S. 18. 30, 2 S. 6. 22; 18. 8; 20. s, 6, 1 K. 5. 10, 11; 10. 23 ; 14. 9. § 34. The superlative is expressed by the simple adj. with Art., or followed by gen. of a noun or pron., 1 S. 17. 14 ftflpn N^H "lYTl and David was the youngest; 18. 17 "'fll pfb'njir' «y */o f»w/i THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON 49 to contain, Gen. 4. 13 XiB>3!? 7TI1 too great to bear, Ps. 61. 3 the rock ^ISO D=iT &>o Az^A ybr me, Is. 49. 6 feo light to be, Ex. j8. 18, i K. 19. 7, Gen. 26. 16; 36. 7, Ru. 1. 12, Hab. I. 13, Ps. 139. 12 Zoo dark for thee (to see). So with W? Isa. 7. 13 is wearying men too little? Nu. 16. 9. — Hos. 6. 6 knowledge of God rather than burnt-offerings ; Ps. 52. 5 evil rather than good, Hab. 2. 16, 2 S. 19. 44, where perhaps «/, "fa3 for Tfia, first-born rather than thou (Sep.). Rem. 3. The word expressing the quality is occasionally omitted, Is. 10. 10 (greater or more) than those of Jer., Job II. 17 (clearer) than noon. In Mic. 7. 4; Is. 40. 17 ; 41. 24, Ps. 62. 10, para the prep, is partitive or explicative, ^/"(con- sisting of) vanity. Rem. 4. The consn. with |D is sometimes virtually a superlative, 1 S. 15. 33 IBS D^JD ?3K>Pl the most bereaved of women (lit. bereaved above w.). — A superl. sense is expressed by joining a noun with its own pi. in the gen., Gen. 9. 25 a slave of slaves (lowest slave), Ex. 26 33 holy of holies (most holy), Is. 34. 10 eternity of eternities (all eternity), Ecc. 1. 2 vanity of vanities (absolute vanity), Song 1. 1, Ez. 16. '/, Deu. 10. 17. 1 K. 8. 27, though such phrases had at first sometimes a lit. sense. Rem. 5. Just as the simple adj. the abstract noun with gen. conveys superl. meaning, as 31D the best, Gen. 45. 18, Is. 1. 19, 3^0 the best I S. 15. 9, 15, "^D the choicest Ex. 15. 4, Deu. 12. 11, Wih, T'St'&ri the chiefest, Nu. 24. 20, Am. 6. 1, 6. Rem. 6. A kind of superl. sense is given to a word by connecting it with the divine name. Probably the idea was that God originated the thing (as Ar.), or that it belonged to Him, and was therefore extraordinary. Sometimes the meaning appears to be "in God's estimation," Gen. 10. 9. Cf. Jon. 3. 3 D'rfW? rh\-y\ "Vy (Acts 7. 20) ; Ps. 36. 7 ; 68. 16 ; 80. 11; 104. 16, Song 8. 6, 1 Chr. 12. 23. — 1 S. 14. 15; 26. 12 (Gen. 30. 8 seems different). 50 HEBREW SYNTAX § 35, 36. THE NUMERALS § 35. The numeral one is an adj., having the usual place and concord (§ 30). 1 S. 2. 34 "THS! D^l in one day, 1 K. 18. 23 "man IS!! A&e one ox, Gen. 11. 6 HUN HOto 0«0 three sons. 24. 10 ff'V'?? mto# ten camels. 1 K. 3. 16 CIM D^ttJ two women. Deu. 19. 2 W\)f tt5i?ttJ three cities. 31. 10 D^ttJ JDttJ seven years. There are exceptions, 2 K. 5. 22 ; and in the case of two the cons, is more common than abs. even before indef. noun. There are also two general exceptions — (1) With QiQ'' days the cons, is usual ; Jud. 19. 4 D'W nttPtiJ three days. Deu. THE NUMERALS 5 1 5. 13; 16. 4, 8, 13, but cf. 2 K. 2. 17. (2) So before other Num. 1 S. 25. 2. D^N Htihti three thousand. Jos. 8. 12 O^DTW niton /z'* thousand. 1 K. 5. 30 fTiNE tt&0 flW hundred, Jud. 4. 13. — Jos. 1. 11 ; 2. 16; 3. 2; 6. 3; 7. 3; 8. 12, Jud. 3. 29; 4. 6; 15. ii, 1 S. 26. 2. Cf. Rem. 1. (p) With noun determined by Art. or def. gen. the Num. is mostly in cons, with gen. of noun. Deu. 10. 4 TT)\D^ Q^lin the ten words. Jos. 10. 16 D'07ftn nifen the five • t : - •* >t:- v ■■ -: ^ &«£*. Jud. 3. 3 D^tpbp "g"5p nttton *&? /w /craft of the Ph. 1 S. 16. 10 ViSl nyltp his seven sons. Gen. 40. 12, 18, Nu. 23. 4, Jud. 14. 12; 18. 7, 1 S. 17. 13 (20. 20?), 2 S. 21. 22; 23. 16, 1 K. 21. 13, 2 K. 25. 18. There are exceptions, cf. 1 S. 17. 14. Cases like Am. 1. 3, 6, 9, &c, are according to § 20, R. 2. (c) The Num. may follow the noun in Appos. — mostly in later style. 1 Chr. 12. 39 nti}' 1 DtP H 1 ^ three days. Dan. I. 12. 1 Chr. 22. 14; 25. s, 2 Chr. 3. 12; 4. 8, Neh. 2. 11, Dan. 1. s, 15, Ezr. 8. 15, cf. Jos. 21 pass. Ex. in earlier books are comparatively rare, Gen. 32. 15, 16. In 1 S. 1. 24 rd -IS*. Rem. 1. Additional ex. of a. Gen. 30. 20 ; 45. 23 ; 47. 2, Deu. 16. 9, 16; 17. 6, Jos. 6. 4, Jud. 9. 34; 16. 8, 1 S. 1.8; 25. 5, 2 S. 21. 6, 1 K. 5. 28 ; 7. 4, 30 ; 10. 19 ; 17. 12 ; 18. 23; 21. 10, 2 K. 2. 24, Jer. 2. 13. There are excep- tions, 1 K. 11. 16. Rem. 2. The position of the Num. before the noun is almost exclusive in earlier writings, and is common at all times. This is true of all Num., whether units or higher numbers. The position after the noun occurs in Kings, is not unusual in P., and becomes very usual in Chr., Ezr., Neh., Dan., &C. 1 1 Sven Herner, Syntax der Zahlworter im Alt. Test., Lund, 1893. This careful Treatise pays particular attention to the literary age of the various usages. 52 HEBREW SYNTAX §37. Rem. 3. The gend. is sometimes inexact. Gen- 7. 13 (due to mas. form of noun), cf. Ex. 26. 26; Job 1. 4, Ez. 7. 2, Zech. 3. 9, 1 Chr. 3. 20, Ez. 45. 3 Kth. — The noun is sometimes sing, after units in the case of words used col- lectively, 2 K. 8. 17; 22. 1 (year), 25. 17 (cubit), Ex. 21. 37 (np3, |SV), cf. Gen. 46. 27 ; and in cases where the thing- weighed or measured is omitted (§ 37, R. 4). Gen. 24. 22, Jud. 17. 10, 1 S. 10. 4; 17. 17; 21. 4, Ex. 16. 22. In Ez. 45. 1 rd., breadth twenty thousand. Rem. 4. The Num. 2, 3, 4, 7 may take suffixes, as Wit? lee /too, both of us, WJBW /A "[PIN * T T T - — eleven stars. 2 S. 9. 10 0^33, "\to27 TV&ST\ fifteen sons. Tos. ■T XT T ■ ~: J J 4. 8 O^IN i~Hi#y "VntjJ twelve stones. Gen. 32. 23; 42. 13, Ex. 15. 27; 24. 4, Deu. 1. 23, Jud. 3. 14, 2 S. 2. 30; 9. 10; 19. 18, 1 K. 18. 31, 2 K. 14. 21. Ex. 27. 15, Nu. 17. 14; 29. 14, IS, Jos. 15.41. (b) The tens, 20-90. Jud. 12. 14 0^3 D^SHN forty sons. Gen. 18. 24 D|7H2 D^pn ^//J righteous. Exceptional order, Gen. 32. 15, 16 D"Hto^ ]"liriN *a/e»(y she-asses, &c. Gen. 18. 26, 28, Ex. 15. 27; 21. 32, Jud. 1. 7; 8. 30; 10. 4; 12. 14; 14. 11-13, 2 S. 3. 20; 9. 10, 2 K. 2. 16; 10. 1 ; 13. 7; 15, 20, Ez. 42. 2 ; 45. 12. THE NUMERALS 53 (c) Numbers composed of tens and units, e.g. 23, are treated as a single number twenty-and-three; and as they stand in Appos. the unit remains in the A 6s. (cases like 2 K. 2. 24 are exceptional). The gend. of the unit is, of course, determined by the noun: Jud. 10. 2 njttJ vhtf) Q -1 ")^ 23 years. The order three-and-twenty also occurs — chiefly in later style. It also belongs to later style to separate the elements of the Num., repeating the noun with each, as twenty year and three years, or the reverse order (mainly with the •viorA year). Jud. 7. 3 P|Sm D?3ttft D'ntoy 22 thousand (cf. Rem. 1). Nu. 7. 88 Q-nS nyiTlNn V H oxen. Nu. 35. 6, Jos. 19. 30; 2i- 39, J ud - IO - 3; 20. !5, 35, 4 6 > 2 K. 10. 14, Ez. 11. 1, 1 Chr. 2. 22; 12. 29. — Gen. 11. 24, Ex. 38. 24, Nu. 3. 39, 43; 26. 22 ; 31. 38, Jud. 20. 21. — Gen. 5. 15 ; 12. 4; 23. 1 ; 25. 7. Cf. Gen. 5 pass., Gen. 11. 13-25. Lev. 12. 4, 5 (repet. of days), cf. Num. 31. 32 seq. (thousand). (d) The usage is the same with tTNft hundred, O^DND, iTiNQ (all in abs. ; cons. fiNJp in later style); and F)7N thousand, D^Q/N, 0^D7N (cons. ''Qt'N occasional, Ex. 32. 28, Job 1. 3). 1 K. 18. 4 D^IS ilNQ 100 prophets. jud. 15. 4 o^jnuJ niNQ-tt^np soo foxes'. 1K.3.4 *^>n fi^itf i000 burnt-offerings. 2 K. 3. 4 D^N ^N "fNO 100,000 rams (Rem. 1). 2 K. 18. 23 O^D D^N 0000 horses. Ex. of hundred: Jud. 7. 22, 1 S. 17. 7 ; 18. 25 ; 25. 18; 30. 21, 2 S. 3. 14; 8. 4; 14. 26; 16. 1, 1 K. 7. 20; 10. 17; 11. 3, Jos. 7. 21. Ex. of thousand: 1 S. 13. 5 ; 17. 5, 1 K. 5. 6, Job 42. 12. (e) While, however, the Num. 11 and upward are con- strue with plur., except with collectives and words of time, weight, and measure, there is a natural tendency in enumera- tions to regard the thing enumerated as forming a class or genus, and to use the sing.; cf. § 17. Ex. 24. 4, Jud. 21. 12, 2 S. 8. 4; 23. 8, 1 K. 5. 12; 9. 14, 2 K. 24. 14. Comp. 1 K. 54 HEBREW SYNTAX § 37, 38. io. 16 yith 17, and 2 K. 2. 16 with 17; Ex. 26. 19 with 36. 24. The sing, is chiefly used with things which one is accustomed to count; the sing, king, 1 K. 20. 1, 16, is unusual. Rem. 1. (/) When the expression is def. the Art. usually goes with the noun, and the Num. is def. of itself. Jud. 7. 7 CHttJ ttfwrr rfiNB *&? 300 men (Rem. 1). 17. 3 TX&CS\ ftWrttft f)p3rr the 1100 (shekels) of silver. 1 S. 30. 21 D^Mil OTlNn £fe #00 *«£«. Gen. 18. 28, Deu. 9. 25, Jos. 4. 20, Jud. 7. 22 ; 18. 17, 1 K. 7. 44, 2 Chr. 25. 9, Ex. 26. 19 ; 36. 24. Rem. 1. Words used in sing, in the cases a — /fare Dl» days, HJE* years, B>'K Twera (esp. of troops), *!??? thousands, i"IBK cubits (often pi.), 13, ri3 (measures), 133 talents (also pi.), STia, PpE* (oftenest pi.) &c. ; and collect, as yi"\ infantry, 33T chariots, b»bj persons, np3 cattle, ]SV sheep. Usage fluc- tuates ; cf. § 17. — Adj. and words in Appos. may agree grammatically in sing. 1 S. 22, 18, 1 K. 20. 16, or ad sensum in pi. Jud. 18. 16, 1 K. 1.5. Rem. 2. In eleven the forms rnfcw 'y, "lfeW WW occur Deu. 1. 3, Jer. 1.3; 39.2, Ez. 26. i, but chiefly belong to later Style. In twelve the forms rntfJ? D*IE», 1W DW" are usual, the cons. '3$ &c., comparatively rare. Rem. 3. The form twenty-and-three (in c) is the older order and the one usual at all times, i.e. the larger number first and the two joined by and. The same order is usual when there are higher numbers, thus : hundreds and tens and units ; thousands and hundreds and tens, &c. It is characteristic of later style (occasionally in Kings) to put the smaller number first or omit the and. Cf. Ezr. 2 or Neh. 7 pass., Nu. 4. 36, 1 K. 10. 14. The repet. 20 year and S years or reverse order is almost peculiar to P. 1 Rem. 4. Words readily understood in expressions of weight, measure, or date are often omitted, as shekel, ephah, day, Gen. 24. 22 3nt rnfc>]j ten (shekels) gold, Ru. 3. 15 W& B^'yiP six (ephahs) of barley, Gen. 20. 16; 45. 22, 1 S. 10. 3, 4; 1 According to Herner, § 12, only 1 K. 6. 1 outside of P. THE NUMERALS 55 17. 17, 1 K. 10. 16. On om. of day, § 38c. The consn. Ex. 26. 2 i"I13S3 JOIN four by the cubit, four cubits, is common in later style. Ez. 40. 5, Zech. 5. 2, 1 Chr. 11. 23. Rem. 5. Numerals as independent nouns may take the Art. Gen. 18. 29 D^flNI? the forty. 2 K. 1. 13 't^H D^pnn the third fifty ; v. 14 the former (pi.) fifties; with suff. v. 10. Gen. 14. g, Nu. 3. 46, Deu. 19. 9, 2 S. 23. 18 seq. In most other cases the Num. is without Art., though there are exceptions. Jos. 4. 4 SJ"K "^J?"!! Q, i!?' the twelve men, Nu. 16. 35, Ex. 28. 10. Rem. 6. After eleven and upwards the sing, noun, par- ticularly of material or commodity, is probably in ace. of specification. § 71. § 38. The Ordinals. — (a) The ordinals first — tenth are adj. and used regularly (Gr. § 48. 2). Jud. 19. 5 Q^i ""yiin on the fourth day. 2 K. 18. 9 n^TTl rtlttto. So always in stating the number of the month (cf. c), 1 Chr. 27. 2-13. (6) From eleventh upwards the Card, numbers do duty for ordinals, and Art. is not generally used with the noun. Deu. 1. 3 ri2tt? Q^Sl")^ in the fortieth year. 2 K. 25. 27 tthh ItoV D^tpa in the twelfth month. Ex. 16. 1, Deu. 1. 2, 3, 2 K. 25. 27, Jer. 25. 3, 1 Chr. 24. 12-18; 25. 18-31. (c) In stating dates there are some peculiarities. 1. The gen. "of the month" is circumscribed by prep., ttnrv?, and day is often omitted. Ex. 16. 1 Vhhh D^ ItoV PlUtom on the fifteenth day of the month. 2 K. 25. 27 O^toya, tinhS nyitth on the 27th of the month. Even the Card. 1-10 are greatly used in this case, mostly with om. of day. 2 K. 25. 8 tirfrb rTS£H&L on the seventh. Deu. 1. 3 "rnif«l tinhV on the first. Gen. 8. 5, Lev. 23. 32, Ez. 1. 1, Zech. 7. 1, cf. 2 Chr. 29. 17, Ezr. 3. 6. 2. The word year is very often put in cons, before the whole phrase, Num. and year. 2 K. 8. 25 D'Tltt) fiJttJSl. !"BttJ mtoj7 in the year of twelve years (the twelfth year), 56 HEBREW SYNTAX § 38. i K. 16. 8, 15, 29, 2 K. 8.25; 14. 23; 15. 13, 17, 23,27; 25.8. And with year understood: 1 K. 15. 25, 28 D?fltp rOttfe the year of two years (second year). 1 K. 16. 10; 22. 41, 2 K. 3. 1 ; 15. 30, 32; 18. 10; 24. 12, Zech. 7. 1, Ezr. 5. 13, Neh. 1. 1, Dan. I. 21 ; 2. 1. Rem. 1. The adj. ins one is very often ussd for first, Gen. 2. 11 seq.; 4. 19, Ex. 1. 15, Nu. 11. 26, 2 S. 4. 2, Ru. 1. 4. Rem. 2. The word jrear is also construed with gen. of the def. Ordinal. 2 K. 17. 6 n'jrcvin JWa zW the year of the ninth year. 2 K. 25. 1, Jer. 32. 1, Ezr. 7. 8, Neh. 2. 1 ; 5. 14. — In c the form Bnn? "tiB'JQ is used for on the tenth of the m. (spelling plenary except Ex. 12. 3). Rem. 3. The Art. seems used with the Num. in cases where the whole expression is def., as Lev. 25, 10, 11 the fiftieth year (of jubilee), Deu. 15. 9 the seventh year (of ^ manu- mission), 1 K. 19. 19 ; but occasionally in other cases, Ex. 12. 18, Nu. 33, 38, 1 K. 6. 38, 1 Chr. 24. 16; 25. 19; 27. 15. Its place varies, 1 K. 19. 19 IB'Vn D , 3B i with 1 Chr. 25. 19 Rem. 4. Distributives. — (a) These may be expressed by Card, with ^ to: 1 K. 10. 22 IMB> Ithvh nns once to = every three years. Ex. 16. 22, 1 K. 5. 2, Ez. 1. 6. (b) By re- peating the Num. Gen. 7. 2, 3, 9, 15, Ex. 17. 12, 1 K. 18. 13, Ez. 40. 10. § 29, R. 8. Very often the whole phrase is repeated, Is. 6. 2 six wings, six wings to each, Jos. 3. 12, Nu. 13. 2; 34. 18, Ex. 36. 30. Rem. 5. Multiplicatives are expressed variously. — Thus : as much as you, they, &c, by D33, DH3, 2 S. 24. 3, Jer. 36. 32, Deu. 1. 11. — double by iwp, used in Appos. either before or after the noun, Gen. 43. 12 (after), 15 (before), Ex. 16. 5, 22. Also by DW, Ex. 22. 3, 6, 8, twofold. — By the du. fern, of Num., as 2 S. 12. 6 D)FiV3"iN fourfold. Gen. 4. 15 D^nyaB* sevenfold. Is. 30. 26, Ps. 12. 7. Or by simple Card. Lev. 26. 21, 24, cf. Gen. 4. 24. — By 1"IVT (hands), Gen. 43. 34 fivefold, Dan. 1. 20 tenfold. Comp. Gen. 26. 12 &\$V HKD a hundredfold. THE NUMERALS 57 Times is expressed by DJ?B (beat). Gen. 2. 23 OVSH rtz's /z;;ze. Jos. 6. 3 nnx B one time. Neh. 13. 20 D^FISM 'B orace or twice. Gen. 27. 36; 43. 10 D)DVB two times. Ex. 23. 17 Qipj;3 tW three times, &c. Gen. 33. 3, Nu. 14. 22, 2 K. 13. 19, Job 19. 3, Neh. 4. 6. — 2 S. 24. 3 D^aVB riND 100 &«s. Deu. 1. 11 DVOJJS f)i>N 1000 zfzWs, 1 K. 22. 16. — The word time may be omitted. 2 K. 6. iofinN, &TW once, twice. 1 K. 10. 22, job 40. 5. Also nnsa, DW3 i S. 18. 21, Job 33. 14, Nu. 10. 4. With similar omission, T^VO a second time, Gen. 41. 5, Is. 11. 11 ; niPw a third time, i S. 3. 8, a seventh time 1 K. 18. 44. — Other words for times are DvJ"! Ex. 23. 14, Nu. 22. 28, 32, 33 ; and D'Jb Gen. 31. 7. Rem. 6. Fractions. — Apart from 'VD half, 1 K. 16. 21, &c, fractions are formed : (a) by separate words, as $n*l a fottrth, Nu. 23. 10, 2 K. 6. 25 ; B"pn a ./£/%, Gen. 47. 26. The analogy has not been followed in other cases (cf. Ar. tholth a third). The form JQ"1 also, 1 S. 9. 8. For a fewrt fnfcV (pi. 'f»), peculiar to P. The tithe is lt?Jj». (b) By the /e?». of Ordin. as IVKOB' a z'AzVh?, 2 S. 18. 2, 2 K. 11. 5, Ez. 5. 2, 12; rPjD"l a fourth, Nu. 15. 4, Neh. 9. 3. So the others, Gen. 47. 24, Lev. 5. 11, 16, 24, Ez. 4. 11 ; 45. 13. Above tenth the Card, must be used, Neh. 5. 11, the one per cent. The noun of measure, weight, &c, usually has the Art. after the fraction, Ex. 26. 16, Nu. 15. 4; 28. 14, 1 K. 7- 31. 3 2 . 2 K - 6 - 2 5. Ez - 45- !3 5 4 6 - J 4- Obs. — In prose composition these general rules may be safely followed. 1. Place all numerals before their noun. 2. The units take their noun in pi.; before an indef. noun they are in the abs., except two ; before a def. noun in cons.; also in cons, before the word days and before other numerals. 3. The numbers 1 1-19 have fixed forms (Gr. § 48), but the second form of 11 and 12 may be neglected. 4. The numbers 1 1 and upwards take their noun in pi. , except collect- ives, and words of time, weight, and measure, though usage is not uniform, § 37, R. 1. 5. Compound numbers like 23 form one number twenty-and-three (in this order), the unit in abs., but its gender regulated by the noun. So in greater numbers the largest first, and each class joined by and, as 6000 and 300 and 50 and four. 6. The rules for Ordinals, § 38. 58 HEBREW SYNTAX §39. SYNTAX OF THE VERB THE PERFECT § 39. The simple perf. is used to express an action com- pleted either in reality or in the thought of the speaker. The perf. is used to express completed actions where Eng. also uses past tenses. — (a) Like the Eng. past tense, to denote an action completed at a time indicated by the narrative, as Gen. 4. 26 7)1111 tN then it was begun (began men); or completed in the indefinite past, Job I. 1 rPJl CJ'W there was a man. Gen. 3. 1; 15. 18; 22. 1; 29. 9; 31. 20. Even if the finished action may have extended over a period of time, unless it is desired to mark this specially, the simple perf. is employed ; Gen. 14. 4, twelve years n^V they served, 1 K. 14. 21, and often. (b) Like the Eng. perf. with have, to denote an action finished in the past but continuing in its effects into pres. ; Gen. 4. 6 ^p3Q 1 7D3 !"T)37 why has (is) thy face fallen ? Is. 1 . 4 '"rTWb. lltV they have forsaken the Lord. In this case the pres. must sometimes be used in Eng., Ps. 2. 1 ilE57 T T Bjfa It&H why do the nations rage? Ps. 1. 1. Or to denote an action Just finished, or finished within an understood period; Gen. 4. 10 JTto^ lift what hast thou done? 1 S. 12. 3 ,| £irt£7 ^ "yitt5TlN whose ox have I taken? Gen. 3. 22; 12. 18; 22. 12; 26. 22; 46. 31, Ex. 5. 14, Nu. 22. 34, Jud. 10. 10; 11. 7, 1 S. 14. 29. (c) Like the Eng. pluperf. to indicate that one of two actions was completed before the other. This use is most common in dependent (relative or conjunctive) clauses. Gen. THE PERFECT 59 2. 8, he put there "ISP "WJM d*7N!TfiN the man whom he *• -TV-: T T (T had made; 6. 6 DlNiTnS !"ltoy ^ 'i QrW repented //W t t It t x v x •- ^ &*o? »z«afe man. Gen. 2. 5, 22; 3. 23; 18. 8, 33; 19. 27; 26. 15, 18; 28. 11, Nu. 22. 2, 1 S. 6. 19; 7. 14; 28. 20, 1 K. 5. 15 ; 1 1. 9. With modal force, Gen. 40. 15 should have put, 1 S. 17. 26 should have defied. After PCiT, Gen. 19. 28 the smoke was gone up, Deu. 9. 16, Jud. 6. 28. When the dependent clause is introduced by and the subj. usually precedes the verb; Gen. 20. 4 yp N7 INT PPbSI and Abimelek had not approached. 31. 19, 34, Jud. 6. 21, 1 S. 9. 15 ; 25. 21 ; 28. 3, 2 S. 18. 18, 1 K. 1. 41, 2 K. 9. 16. (a?) In hypothetical sentences the perf. is employed both in protasis and apodosis where Lat. subj. would be used. jud. 13. 23 rh$ npb ah *nrw?nj? V?0 ^ */ he had wanted to kill us he would not have taken a burnt-offering. Gen. 43. 10, Nu. 22. 33, Jud. 8. 19; 14. 18, Is. 1. 9. So in other supposed cases; Gen. 26. 10 one of the people tSJJftS iiti? might readily have lain, 2 K. 13. 19. Also in Opt. sent, in ref. to past, Nu. 14. 2, and fut, Is. 48. 18; 63. 19. Cf. Cond. and Opt. Sent. §§ 1 30, 1 34. Rem. 1. Though it may be doubtful whether the shades of meaning expressed by our tenses were present to the eastern mind, it is of great consequence to observe them in translation. The direct sent. 1 K. 21. 14 fibjl 11133 Pjpp N. has been stoned and is dead, when made dependent by 'S v. 15, must be rendered, that N. had been stoned and was dead. In Is. 53. 5, 6 the perf. must be translated in three ways : all we were (had) gone astray ; the Lord caused to fall on him ; by his stripes we have been healed. Job 1. 21, the Lord gave . . . hath taken. In Ps. 30. perf. has all its various uses : v. 4 hast brought up ; v. 7 I said ; v. 8 hadst made to stand . . . didst hide ; v. 12 hast turned (or possibly didst turn). Ezr. 1. 7. So inchoative perf., Ps. 97. 1 t\?0 '* is become king; 2 K. 15. 1 became king, and often. 60 HEBREW SYNTAX § 40, 41. § 40. The perf. expresses actions regarded as completed, where Eng. rather uses the present. — (a) In the case of stative verbs, i.e. verbs expressing mainly a mental or physical condition, as to know, remember, refuse, trust, rejoice, hate, love, desire, be just, &c. ; to be, be high, great, small, deep, clean, full, be old, many, &c. Eng. by its pres. expresses the condition, Heb. rather the act which has resulted in it. Gen. 27. 2 '■rYiE D^ VlJTP tib Vti|2T I am old, I know not, &c; Jud. 14. 16 ^riirjM >^T\ yflWip pi thou only hatest me, and lovest me not ; Gen. 42. 3 1 D^SHD W^il N7 we are not spies. Stative verbs, however, often occur in such a way that their perf. must be rendered by a past tense; Gen. 28. 16 I knew, 34. 19 he delighted, 37. 3 loved, Jud. 8. 34 remembered. The connexion shows to what time the com- pleted act belongs. (b) In a class of actions which are completed just in the act of giving them expression. This usage appears chiefly with verbs denoting to speak, as verbs of swearing, declaring, advising, and the like, or their equivalents in gesture. Deu. 26. 3 D^n "ttnaPT / profess this day; 2 S. 17. n VEEJ£ ^ / advise; 2 S. 19. 8 VlJfattJa iTlPPiL / swear by the Lord. Gen. 22. 16, Nu. 14. 20, Deu. 4. 26; 26. 17; 30. 15, 18, 19, I S. 17. 10, 2 S. 16. 4 r worship, 19. 30, 1 K. 2. 42 / hear (obey), 2 K. 9. 3 I anoint, Jer. 22. 5 ; 42. 19, Ez. 36. 7, Ps. 129. 8; 130. I, Pr. 17. 5. Song 2. 7 I adjure. So the frequent II "10M -sttzV/fc Je., or '1 N H3 thus saith. In some cases impf. ""ll^N' , is used, hardly as a frequent, but as a present. This occurs in the midst of a speech, Is. 1. 11, 18; 33. 10; 40. 1, 25 ; 41. 21, Ps. 12. 6. Both forms Is. 66. 9. (c) In a class of actions which, being of frequent occur- rence, have been proved by experience (perf. of experience). Jer. 8. 7 the turtle and swallow PlJNia njJTlN YlDttJ observe the time of their coming ; Job 7. 9 T\h^"\ UP ""I^S ^ do*^ ' - •• - IT T T T THE PERFECT 6l dissolves and vanishes. Is. 40. 7, 8, Am. 5. 8, Ps. $4. 4 findeth, layeth, Pr. 1. 7 despise, 14. 19 fozw; 22. 12, 13. Rem. 1. Exx. of stative verbs. I3f remember, Nu. 11.5, Jer. 2. 2 ; 1$D refuse, Ex. 7. 14, Nu. 22, 13, Deu. 25. 7 ; nt33 /rz«/, 2 K. 18. 19, 20; nDB> rejoice, 1 S. 2. 1, Is. 9. 2; fan /o otmA, Deu. 25. 8, Is. 1. 11 ; pTi be just, Gen. 38. 26, Ps. 19. 10; PI3J 5e high, Is. 3. 16; 55. 9; Vu be great, Gen r 9- I 3> |I3p be small, Gen. 32. 11 ; p»J? #e afee/>, Ps. 92. 6 "HIE 60 clean, Pr. 20. 9 ; nbo be full, Is. 2. 6, Mic. 3. 8 ?3X to mourn, Is. 33. 9, Joel. 1. 9; rOK #0 -willing, Deu 2 5- 7> DXD loathe, Am. 5. 21, Job 7. 16; JDB> 62 Jfl^tf, Is 1. n ; 33"l fe many, Ps. 3. 2 (n3"l= become many) ; nip Ao/e, Ps. 130. 5, &c. § 41. The perf. is used to express actions which a lively imagination conceives as completed, but for which the fut. is more usual in Eng. — {a) The perf. of certainty. Actions depending on a resolution of the will of the speaker (or of others whose mind is known), or which appear inevitable from circumstances, or which are confidently expected, are conceived and described as having taken place. This use is common in promises, threats, bargaining, and the like. Is. 42. 1 Y^J? ''rm ^PXyi "Hiy ]n behold my servant, I will put my spirit upon him; Is. 6. 5 ^rPQ-p""^ y^N woe is me for I am undone ; Ru. 4. 3 iftjn m3Q TMWTl Piphft ^ t:It t : It v t - '- : v Naomi is selling the field-portion. Gen. 15. 18; 17. 20; 30. 13, Nu. 17. 27, 28, Jud. 15. 3, 1 S. 2. 16; 14. 10; 15. 2, 2 S. 24. 23, 1 K. 3. 13, 2 K. 5. 20, Is. 30. 19, Jer. 4. 13; 31. 5, 6, Ps. 6. 9, 10; 20. 7; 36. 13; 37. 38. In these last exx. and many others the tense may be called the perf. of confidence. (b) It often happens, esp. in the higher style, that in the midst of descriptions of the fut. the imagination suddenly conceives the act as accomplished, and interjects a perf. amidst a number of imperfs. Job 5. 20, 23 hath redeemed 62 HEBREW SYNTAX §41. (4. 10) ; Hos. 5. 5 Judah is fallen. This usage receives an extension among the prophets, whose imagination so vividly projects before them the event or scene which they predict that it appears realised. Is. 5. 13 njn^V^P '•BV TOi my people is gone into captivity ; 9. 5 IJ?""!?? T7J ^ for a child has been born to us; 9. 1 ^VlS "VlN %n "sjtfTia D^flH they who walked in darkness ^#z>£ seen great light. Is. 5. 14; 9. 2 seq., 10. 28; 11. 8, 9; 28. 2, Hos. 4. 6; 10. 7, 15, Jer. 4. 29, Am. 5. 2. The prophetic perf. is sometimes scarcely to be distinguished from perf. of confidence, Ps. 22. 22, 30. (c) The perf. is used in the sense of the future perf. to indicate that an action though fut. is finished in relation to another fut. action. Gen. 24. 19 nfitiJ? 173"DM 1% until they (shall) have done drinking; 2 S. 5. 24 TJ^dS '* N£ W ^ for then Je. will have gone forth. Gen. 28. 15; 43. 9 ; 48. 6, 1 S. 1. 28, 2 K. 7. 3 ; 20. 9, Is. 4. 4; 6. 11 ; 16. 12, Jer. 8. 3, Mic. 5- 2, Ru. 2. 21. Rem. 1. The prophetic perf. may be distinguished from the ordinary perf. by the fact that it is not maintained con- sistently, but interchanges with impfs. or vav conv. perfs., the prophet abandoning his ideal position and returning to the actual, and so falling into the ordinary fut. tenses, e.g. Is. 5. 14-17. The prophetic passage may begin with perf, Is. 5. 13, which is frequently introduced by ^ for, pb therefore, or other particles, Is. 3. 8 ; 9. 5 ; or it may begin with vav impf, Is. 2. 9. When further clauses with and are added, if the ideal position be sustained, the natural secution, vav impf, may be used, Is. 9. 5, Ps. 22. 30, or simple perf. if verb be disconnected with and, Is. 5. 16. But frequently the ideal position is deserted and the ordinary fut. tenses, the impf. or vav perf, are employed, Is. 5. 14, cf. v. 17, Ps. 85, 11, 12. Cf. Is. 13. 9, 10; 14. 24; 35, 2,6; 46. 13; 47. 9; 52. 15; 60. 4. Rem. 2. It seems but a variety of (c) when the perf. is used in questions expressing any lively feeling, as astonish- ment, indignation, incredulity, or the like. The speaker THE PERFECT 63 imagines the act done, and expresses it in a tone convey- ing his feeling regarding it. Gen. 18. 12 shall I have (had) pleasure! 21. 7 who would have said? Ex. 10. 3; 16. 28, Jud. 9. 9 shall I have abandoned 1 . Nu. 23. 10, 23, 1 S. 26. 9, 2 K. 20. 9, Jer. 30. 21, Ez. 18. 19, Hab. 2. 18, Ps. 10. 13; 11. 3; 39. 8; 80. 5, Job 12. 9. Cf. interchange ofperf. and impf. Hab. 1. 2, 3, Ps. 60. n. Rem. 3. Owing to the want of participles expressing past time, the perf. has to be used in attributive or circum- stantial clauses referring to past. Gen. 44. 4 Ip^rnn W not having gone far; 44. 12 ?nn beginning at the eldest ; 48. 14 guidinghis hands, Gen. 21. 14; Nu. 30. 12 without checking, Deu. 21. 1, Jud. 6. 19; 20. 31, 1 S. 30. 2, 1 K. 13. 18, Job 11. 16 waters passed away; Is. 3. 9 without concealment. And so to express an action prior to the main action spoken of, Ps. 11. 2. Very compressed is the language, Jud. 9. 48 TPW]} DIVSO ilD what ye have seen me do. If me had been expressed the consn. would have been an ordinary Ar. one. Lam. 1. 10, Neh. 13. 23; cf. impf. 2 S. 21. 4, Is. 3. 15. Rem. 4. Another verb following on perf. is usually appended with vav impf., but in animated speech asyndetous perfs. are often accumulated. Deu. 32, 15, Jud. 5. 27, Is. 18. s; 25. 12; 30. 33, Lam. 2. 16. Rem. 5. In some instances perf. appears to express a wish (precative perf.). Job 21. 16 the counsel n ijrn be far ! 22. 18. Lam. 1. 21 riN3n bring thou, where structure of verse requires ref. to fut; 3. 56 seq., where v. 55 continues 54; Ps. 18. 47. Is. 43. 9 ivajM may be form of imper., and Ps. 7. 7 TWi a circumst. clause. It would be strange if Heb. altogether wanted this usage, which is common to all the Shem. languages in some shape. Wright, ii. 3, Dillm. p. 406 foot, Noeldeke, p. 181, Del. Assyr. Gr. § 93. The position of the verb is freer in Heb., as is usual in compari- son of Ar. The usage may be allied to perf. of confidence (Ps. 10. 16; 22. 22; 31. 6; 57. 7; 116. 16), the strong wish causing the act to be conceived as accomplished. 64 HEBREW SYNTAX §42-44. THE SIMPLE IMPERFECT § 42. The simple impf. expresses an action incomplete or unfinished. Such an action may be conceived as nascent, or entering on execution (pres.), progressing, or moving on towards execution (impf.), or as ready, or about to enter upon execution (fut). Connected with the last use is the use of impf. to express a great variety of actions which are dependent on something preceding, whether it be the will or desire of the speaker (juss., opt.), or his judgment or per- mission (potential), or on some other action, or on particles expressing purpose and the like (subjunctive). The uses of the impf. are very various, and some of them rarer in prose writing ; those usual in ordinary prose may be mentioned first. § 43. (a) The impf. expresses a future action, whether from the point of the speaker's present, or from any other point assumed. I S. 24. 21 IJ'lT'ftri TpO ^ "M^T I know that thou shalt be king; 2 K. 3. 27 IjSw "IttJN faSfllN np*l he took his son who was to be king; Gen. 2. 17; 3. 4; 6. 7; 37. 8 ; 43. 25 were to eat, 1 K. 7. 7, 2 K. 13. 14 was to die. (b) The impf. is employed to express actions which are contingent or depending on something preceding. The shades of sense of impf. in this use of it are manifold, cor- responding to Eng. will (of volition), shall (of command), may and can (of possibility or permission), am to, in the present; and to would, should, 7night, could, was to, in the past or indirect speech. Particularly (1) in interrogative sentences; (2) in dependent clauses with ^3 that and the like; and (3) after particles like IpN howl "^N perhaps, &c, and conditional particles like DM if. Gen. 3. 2 EtfTW ''"ISJ? 73«3 we may eat; 3. 3 *i3aft «ta«^ N 1 ? ye shall not eat of it; Gen. 43. 7 -\EfrV *>$ 5H3 SfiTrj were we then to know that he would say '? 27. 45 M^Qj hltito PTO 1 ? why should I V " : - T v It t ** THE SIMPLE IMPERFECT 6$ be bereaved of you both? 44. 8 2i32 IpN"! and how should we steal \ 2. 19 "17 NTjpynD T^rh to see what he would call it; Jud. 9. 28 12"p}?3 ^ D^^? who is Shechem */W we should serve him ? Job 9. 29 IftthN ^!)N / am (have) to be guilty \ Gen. 44. 34; 47. 15, Ex. 3. u, Deu. 7. 17, Jud. 8. 6; 17. 8, 9 wherever he might find, 1 S. 18. 18; 20. 2, 5 j^/a? sit, 23. 13, 2 S. 2. 22; 3. 33 should Abner {was A. to) afe! 6. 9, 2 K. 8. 13, Ps. 8. 5, Job 7. 17. With "h^ Gen. 16. 2; 24. 5, Nu. 23. 27, 1 S. 6. s, 1 K. 18. s, 2 K. 19. 4, Am. 5. 15. With QN if, Gen. 18. 26, 28, 30; 30. 31, Jud. 4. 8, Am. 6. 9. See Cond. Sent. — With Job 9. 29 cf. 10. 15; 12. 4, 1 S. 14. 43 ; 28. 1. (c) In particular impf. follows final (telic) conjunctions, as ]1?dV in order that, "ltpN that, ^W? that not, |Q lest. Ex. 4- 5 ^ENI |yn7 *&** A& and similar words, i s. 24. 14 *«£ cyaj-jp ^b-iipn ban? ~\afr *itt>so J7ETI as says the proverb, Out of the evil cotneth forth evil; Jud. 7. 5 iVarr p^ 1tt?i$3. ^ a dog laps ; Gen. 29. 26 ^CQpJpa, |3 nipjP'N^ it is not so done in our country. Some- times this is not has the nuance of ought not. Gen. 20. 9 ItojrfN 1 ? "ittJN D^toj??? deeds which ought not to be done, cf. 34. 7, 2 S. 13. 12.— Gen. 50. 3, Ex. 33. 11, Deu. I. 31, 44; 2. 11, 20; 28. 29, Jud. 11. 40; 14. 10, 1 S. 5. 5 ; 19. 24, 2 S. 5. 8 ; 13. 18 ; 19. 4, Am. 3. 7, 12, Hos. 2. 1 (cannot be counted). Of a universal truth, Ex. 23. 8, Deu. 16. 19 a gift blinds, 1 S. 16. 7, 2 S. 1 1. 25 the sword devours, 1 K. 8. 46 no one who sinneth not, Ps. 1. 3-6. Of a characteristic or habit, Gen. 44. 5, Ex. 4. 14 speaks (can speak), Deu. 10. 17, 1 S. 23. 22, 2 S. 19. 36, 2 K. 9. 20 drives furiously, Is. 13. 17, 18 (the Medes), 28. 27, 28, Ps. 1. 2, Job 9. 11-13. But also of an event repeated or general within a limited area. 1 S. 9. 6 feta" 1 M3. 13/T? "ltt?N TO whatever he speaks comes true; 1 K. 22. 8 H'itO ^hy NSJrV? N7 A* never prophesies good about me. Ex. 13. 15; 18. 15, 2 K. 6. 12, Hos. 4. 8, 13; 7. 1-3, 14-16; 13. 2 kiss calves, Am. 2. 7, 8, Is. 1. 23; 14. 8, Mic. 3- 11. (b) Of actions customary or general in the past. Gen. 2. 6 rny "INI and a mist used to go up. 1 S. 2. 19 l'tOp V'JflM 1&N i^TltpiJfl and a little robe his mother used to make for hint. 2 Chr. 9. 21 once every three years HYON ("ON^^Tl ti^UTIfl came the ships of Tarsh. This impf. may distribute an action over its details or particulars ; Gen. 2. 19 "IfiJM 73") DlWfl 1 7'N^pl whatever he called it. Particularly under the influence of a negative; 1 S. 13. 19 N^E" 1 N7 tthm a smith THE SIMPLE IMPERFECT 67 was not to be found; Gen. 2. 25 IttJttfeJT k7\ they were not (at any time) ashamed; 1 S. 1. 13 vh th\p) JTi^i rPriSip SftDttJl her lips moved, but her voice was not heard. Ex. 21. 36, 1 K. 8. 8, 27 (cf. 22. 8 in a); 18. 10, 2 K. 23. 9 (contrast neg. impf. and pos. perf.), Jer. 13. 7. Cf. Rem. 1. Rem. 1. Other exx. Gen. 6. 4 ; 29. 2; 31. 39, Ex. 8. 20, Nu. 11. 5. 9, Deu. 2. 11, 20, Jud. 5. 8; 6. 4, 5; 17. 6, 1 S. 1. 7; 13. 18; 14. 47 (rd. perhaps 3?B*) ; 18. 5; 23. 13; 25. 28, 2 S. 1. 22 never returned '; 2. 28 did not engage in the pursuit; 12. 3, 31 ; 17. 17; 20. 18; 23. 10, 1 K. 5. 25, 28; 6. 8; 10. 5; 17. 6; 18. 10; 21. 6, 2 K. 3. 25; 4. 8; 13. 20, Jer. 36. 18, Ps. 106. 43, Job 1. 5, 1 Chr. 20. 3. Rem. 2. This impf. is used, e.g., 1. in describing a boundary line and naming its successive points, Jos. 16. 8, interchanging with vavperf., 15. 3 and often. 2. In describ- ing the course of an ornamentation, 1 K. 7. 15, 23 ran round, 2 Chr. 4. 2. 3. In stating the amount of metal that went to each of a class of articles, 1 K. 10. 16, 2 Chr. 9. 15 ; and so of the number of victims offered in a great sacrifice, 1 K. 3. 4, cf. 10. 5. 4. In describing the quantity which a vessel, &c, contained, 1 K. 7. 26. So the details of collect- ing and disbursing moneys, 2 K. 12. 12—17. — ^ n 2 K. 8. 29 (9. 15) the preceding plur. "wounds" perhaps distributes the verb wounded {perf. 2 Chr. 22. 6), just as the rest does Joab's action, 1 Chr. 11. 8, and all the cities David's, 1 Chr. 20. 3, and all the land the effect of the flies, Ex. 8. 20, cf. Deu. 11. 24. So 2 S. 23. 10 of the people returning in parties or successively (v. 9 their dispersion). Jer. 52. 7, Ezr. 9. 4. Rem. 3. Allied to § 44a above is the use of impf. to form attributive or adjectival clauses, descriptive of the subj. or obj. of a previous sentence. The restricted sphere of the ptcp. enlarges this usage. Gen. 49. 27 T^) 3NT '12 Benj. is a ravening wolf; Is. 40. 20 3j5"V"fcO fS a tree that doth not rot; Hos. 4. 14 P3J"N? DJJ an undisceming people ; Is. 51. 2 rnb C3p?inri S. your mother (who bears you) ; v. 12 man that dies {mortal man). 55. 13, Ps. 78. 6, Job 8. 12, cf. Ex. 12. 34, 68 HEBREW SYNTAX §45. Nu. ii. 33, Zeph. 3. 17. Is. 30. 14 unsparingly, Ps. 26. 1 •without wavering. Particularly in comparisons. Job 9. 26 {MB' 1tS£3 as a» eag'/e swooping; 7. 2 as a servant Ma/ longeth. Deu. 32. n, Hos. 11. 10, Is. 62. 1, Jer. 23. 29. § 45. To express single unfinished or enduring actions in the pres. or past the ptcp. is usually employed in prose, with a different shade of meaning. The impf., however, is often used after certain particles, as IN then, □"IE not yet, DTID3, before. Ex. 15. 1 TTQJO y& tN then sang Moses; Gen. 19. 4 113ttJ^ D^l? /^y w*r£ not yet lain down when, &c. 27. 33 Nfafl D"1t3i 7Dtol and I ate ^/ot thou earnest. Deu. 4. 41, T v v : - It Jos. 8. 30; 10. 12; 22. i, i K. 3. 16; 9. 11 ; 11. 7; 16. 21, 2 K. 12. 18; 15. 16. — Gen. 2. 5; 24. 45, 1 S. 3. 3. — Jud. 14. 18, 1 S. 2. 15, 2 K. 6. 32, Jer. 1. 5. So sometimes after T$, Jos. 10. 13, Ps. 73. 17. See Temporal Sent. Rem. 1. The use of impf. with interrog. is peculiar. The interrogation not only brings the action into the present, but seems to give such force to the verb that the finite tense may be used. Gen. 32. 30 why PKtPri dost thou ask ? 37. 15 t^?!' - ' 10 what dost thou seek? comp. the answer E'g?P ^H. So question and answer Gen. 16. 8. 2 K. 20. 14 W3* T^B whence came they ? with the answer W3 they came. Gen. 44. 7, Ex. 2. 13 ; 3. 3, Jud. 17. 9 ; 19. 17, 1 S. 1. 8 ; 17. 8 ; 28. 16, 2 S. 1. 3, 1 K. 21. 7, Job 1. 7; 2. 2; 15. 7, Is. 45. 9, 10. In some cases the questions may be freq., Is. 40. 27. Perhaps also with other strong particles, like H3n 1 S. 21. 15, Gen. 37. 7? And necessarily when ptcp. is resolved into a neg. clause, Jud. 20. 16, Lev. 11. 47. Rem. 2. Such particles as then create a space or period with which the action is contemporaneous, into which the speaker throws himself, cf. 2 K. 8. 22 where then = at that (general) time. In poetry the usage is extended, and appears with such words as day, time. Job 3. 3 perish 13 TSS D^ the day on which r was (am) born ! 6. 17, Deu. 32. 35. In other cases it may be doubtful whether contemporaneousness or immediate subsequence be expressed : Job 3. 1 1 why died THE SIMPLE IMPERFECT 6g (die) I not from the womb, came I not out of the belly and expired? cf. v. 13. The pointing - J/1JK1 would have been good prose (Jer. 20. 17), and so would perf. in first clause (Jer. 20. 18), but the one tense protects the other. Cf. the reverse order of events, Nu. 12. 12. In elevated style this usage of impf. is common. The speaker does not bring the past into his own present, he transports himself back into the past, with the events in which he is thus face to face. Ex. 15. 5 the depths 1B , D3' 1 covered (cover) them ; Deu. 32. 10 WNreipl found (findeth) him; Ps. 80. 9 a vine from Eg. J^SH thou bringest, thou drivest out the nations; Job 4. 15. 16 a breath "IBDPI spn^ passes, my hair stands up ; it stops, &c. So an instantaneous effect is graphically expressed. Ex. 15. 12 thou didst stretch thy hand pN iBWSFl the earth swallows them, v. 14 the nations heard flTJ"V they are terrified. Is. 41. 5, Hab. 3. 10, Ps. 46. 7; 77. 17; 69. 33; 78. 20. The Eng. pres. best renders this impf., our historical pres. being a similar usage. Nu. 23. 7 Balak ^ny bringeth me. Ps. 18. 7 ; 104. 6—8. Hitz. (Ps. 18. 4) so explains 1 K. 21. 6 13"!K '3 ; 13 is recita- tivum. If reading right, Jud. 2. 1 npjJS must rather express progressive bringing up. So perhaps 2 S. 15. 37 WS^ pro- ceeded. In 1 K. 7. 8 i"W! is wanting in Sep. Rem. 3. In the prophetic and higher style the impf. is often used of single actions where prose would express itself differently. There is alsb frequent interchange of perf. and impf., e.g. Is. 5. 12; 9. 17; 10. 28; 13. 10; 14. 24; 18. s; 19. 6, 7; 42. 25; 43. 17; 49. 13, 17; 51. 6; 60. 4, Hos. 7. 1; 12. 11, Ps. 26. 4, 5; 52. 9; 93. 3. In early writing these changes have meaning, but in later poetry, especially in the historical psalms and Job, the significance is not always apparent, and the changes look part of an unconscious traditional style. Some scholars, however, diminish the difficulty by the assumption that the impf. often stands for vav impf. See § 51, R. 5. Rem. 4. The impf. is frequently used for imper. , even in the 2nd pers. Deu. 7. 5 ; 13. 5, Am. 7. 12, Hab. 3. 2, Ps. 17. 8; 64. 2; 71. 2, 20, 21; 140. 2. 70 HEBREW SYNTAX §46-48. THE CONVERSIVE TENSES. PERF. AND IMPF. WITH STRONG VAV § 46. The conversive tenses seem the result of two things : first, the feeling of the connexion of two actions, and that the second belongs to the sphere of the first, a con- nexion expressed by vav; and, second, that effort of the lively imagination already noticed under the simple tense- forms (§ 41 b, § 45, R. 2, 3), by which an impf. is interjected among perfs., and conversely, a perf. among impfs. These lively transportations of the imagination, which appear only occasionally in the case of the simple tenses, have in this instance given rise to two distinct fixed tense-expressions, the vav conv. impf. and the vav conv. perf. In usage the former has become the historical or narrative tense, and the latter the usual expression for the fut. or freq. when con- nected with preceding context by and. The actual genesis of these two tense-forms belongs, however, to a period lying behind the present state of the language. They are now virtually simple forms, having the meaning of the preceding tenses, impf. or perf., and it is doubtful if it is legitimate to analyse them, and treat vav impf. for ex. as and with an impf. in any of the senses which it might have if standing alone. — It is the shortened forms of impf. that are usually employed with vav, when these exist; but this is by no means universal. IMPERFECT WITH STRONG VAV. VAV CONV. IMPF. § 47. Vav conv. impf. follows a simple perf. in any of the senses of the perf. In usage, however, it has become a tense-form in these meanings of the perf. in narrative style, though no perf. immediately precedes. If the connexion of vav and impf. be broken through anything such as a neg. or other word coming between, the discourse returns to the IMPERFECT WITH STRONG VAV 7 1 simple per/. Gen. I. 5 WTg ^rh\ . . . -tW? N"}j?^. Gen. 4. 4. s rrytf t& riT^^l ^?C^ s *#!! and J e - *"* respect to Abel, 3«/ to Cain A* had not respect. As to the kind of connexion between the preceding and vav impf. the latter may express either what is strictly consequential, or what is merely successive in time, or what is only successive in the mind of the speaker. In the last case the event or fact expressed by vav impf. may really be identical with the preceding event, and a repetition of it, or synchronous with it, or even anterior to it ; the speaker expresses them in the order in which they occur to him, so that the and is merely connective, though the form retains its conversive meaning. Gen. 40. 23 inTOl^! . . . ~DT VO o 2*\ 'liT 1 1W "TON which Joshua left and died. So vav impf. often merely sums up the result of a preceding narrative, Jud. 3. 30 INto ^33.^1 so Moab was subdued; 8. 28. § 48. (a) Vav impf. continues a perf. in sense of Eng. past; and it is usual in this sense in narrative, although no perf. actually precedes. Gen. 3. 13 VpfoT. ^M^H tt5|l|n the serpent deceived me, and T ate. 4. 1 ; 7. I9, 1 S. 15. 24. With neg., Gen. 4. 5 unto Cain *lto?p ]^ph *1h^ JTtfttJ *^ he had not respect, and C. was very angry. Gen. 8. 9, Jer. 20. 17, Job 3. 10; 32. 3 did not find an answer and condemn (so as to condemn). With interrog, Gen. 12. igr. — When 72 HEBREW SYNTAX § 48 > 49 - vav is separated from verb, Gen. 31. 33 N2D NT! . . • N2J1 41. 21, Jud. 6. 10. (£) It continues perf. in sense of Eng. perf. with have. Gen. 3. 17 hlikm ^0^ Tip 1 ? ttytttt? "'S to* hearkened and eaten. 16. 5 TpNl, ««^ / aw despised; 32. 31. With interr., Deu. 4. 33 ifi*} '« b*lp dj? 3tt?\$l has a people heard the voice of God and lived? With neg. 1 S. 15. 19 rTOTI ZOyrn '"» Tip! ttynttTN 1 ? wn y hast thou not obeyed, but hast flown upon the spoil? 1 S. 19. 17, Job 9. 4. — Jos. 4. 9 he set up 12 stones Qtt) ^H*! flW ^ ^7 ^ r ^ there to this day. Is. 50. 7, Jer. 8. 6. Gen. 32. 5, 1 S. 19. 5. (c) In the sense of plup. Gen. 39. 13 D3 !,l 1 ^133. 3J37 "'S kad left his garment and fled; 31. 34 DQtoflT . . . !"Tnp7 71X11. Dn^Sy ^^ • ■ • now K- h a d taken the Teraphim, and put them in the camel's saddle, and sitten down upon them. Gen. 27. 1; 26. 18, Ex. 15. 19, Nu. 21. 26, Jos. 10. 1, Jud. 4. 11, 1 s. 30. 1, 2, 2 s. 18. 18, 1 k. 2. 41. is. 39. 1 ptrvn rtan "S heard that he had been sick, and was better. (d) After hypothetical or conditional perf. 1 S. 25. 34 "Win] EHD'? ''TP (so rd.) unless thou hadst made haste and come; Ex. 20. 25 n^nfll PPT^ fiEOn ^n'n "V3 to/ thou lifted up thy iron upon it, thou hast polluted it. Pr. 1 1. 2 p7p fcilj! jVlT Ml has pride come, shame has come (when pride comes then, &c), cf. 18. 3. — Nu. 5. 27, Ps. 139. 11, Pr. 18. 22, Job 9. 16; 23. 13. In Opt. Sent. Jos. 7. 7, Is. 48. 18. Rem. 1. The contrast in such passages as Gen. 32. 31 'WBa ^sarn '« Win I have seen God and (yet) my life is pre- served hardly lies in the vav, but is suggested by the two events. 2 S. 3. 8. Neither is it probable that the vav expresses an inference ; Job 2. 3 yJVDFil is not, and so (so that) thou settest me on. The ref. is rather to Satan's insinuation, ch. 1. 9 seq. Rem. 2. It is questionable whether vav impf. has the IMPERFECT WITH STRONG VAV 73 sense of plup. except in continuance of a perf. of that meaning. When and introduces something anterior to the general narrative, it is usually disconnected with the verb, which is then preceded by its subj. (§ 39 c). There are a few peculiar cases, Ex. 32. 29, 1 S. 14. 24, 1 K. 13. 12, Is. 39. 1, Jer. 39. 11, Zech. 7. 2, Neh. 2. 9. There is nothing to show that Ex. 32. 29 is anterior, it seems parallel to v. 26, 27. In 1 S. 14. 24 Sep. has a different text in which ?S S 1 stands quite regularly. In 1 K. 13. 12 the sense requires hiph. WW and they showed. Possibly Is. 39. 1 should rd. as 2 K. 20. 12 yog' '3, though the mere fact of a different reading is not conclusive. See Driver's exhaustive note p. 84. § 49 (a) Vav impf. continues a perf. of experience, expressing a common truth. Is. 40. 24 }tt)l*>l DHiL f)tt>3 he blows upon them, and they wither; Job 7. 9 ^h*} )2V iTj?3 the cloud wastes away and vanishes. Nah. 3. 16, Job 14. 2 ; 24. 2, 11. So in continuance of a ptcp. with this meaning. Am. 5. 8 DiSW DJil " l Q l ? N"Ylpn who calleth the waters of the sea, and poureth them; 9. 5- — Gen. 49. 17, 1 S. 2. 6, Jer. 10. 13, Am. 6. 3, Mic. 7. 3, Nah. 1. 4, Ps. 34. 8, cf. v. 21, Job 12. 18, 22-25, P r - 21. 22. (b) In continuance of prophetic perf. Is. 9. 5 *)27'W3 jl fc^i??! • ■ • T^l a son nas been given us, and the government is laid upon his shoulder, and they have called. Ps. 22. 30 VtWlttJ'n V?5N all the fat of the earth have eaten and worshipped. In such cases the fut. is almost necessary in Engl, owing to our different way of thinking. Is. 5. 25 ; 24. 18; 48. 20, 21, Mic. 2. 13, Jer. 8. 16, Ps. 20. 9. After perf. of confidence, Ps. 109. 28. With no preceding perf., but stating the issue of actions just described, Is. 2. 9 Htt^l ttrN"7Qti? ! H D"7N therefore men are brought down, and man humbled (punishment, not practice as A.V.), cf. 5. 15 ; 44. 12, 13. Job 5. 15, 16; 36. 7. Or confident expectation, Ps. 64. 8-10 0"YH hath shot at them, &c. 94. 22, 23 ; 37. 40. 74 HEBREW SYNTAX § 50, 51. § 50. (a) Vav impf. continues any verbal form as inf. or ptcp. which is used in a sense equivalent to a perf., and even a simple impf. having reference to past time. Gen. 39. 18 Nlj?N1 T ^p y&yi^ when I lifted up my voice and cried; 35- 3 *7®y TT] ^to najfil b&h who answered me, and was with me. See exx. § 96, and R. 2, and § 100 e. Gen. 27. 33; 28. 6, 1 K. 18. 18, Ps. 50. 16 (past is reviewed). — Ps. 3. 5 ■OUSjJQ N"1pN V^n I'p'ip I cried aloud unto Je., and he heard me. Ps. 52. 9 ; 95. 10, 1 S. 2. 29, 1 K. 20, 33, Deu. 2. 12, Jer. 52. 7, Hos. 11. 4, cf. Gen. 37. 18. (b) Vav impf. may naturally follow anything which forms a starting-point for a development, though not a verb, such as a statement of time, a casus pendens, or the like. Gen. 22. 4 YOVpTlM «to?l ^'•'pigrf O'to on the third day he lifted up his eyes ; Is. 6. 1 nWjMJJ. TjSan HID 11301. 1 S. 4. 20; 21. 6, Hog. 11. 1, Ps. 138. 3. 1 K. 15. 13 JDTIN Ml ("n^lSD •"PD'H V3N and also Maacha his mother he removed from being dowager, 12. 17. Hos. 13. 6 IJ^Lto^l OrPJHO? the more their pasture, the more they ate themselves full. Gen. 22. 24, 2 K. 16. 14, Jer. 6. 19, Mic. 2. 13, Ex. 14. 20. After rt2Tt Nu. 22. 11. In 2 S. 11. 12 mni2d begins v. 13. tt: It • ° Similarly after a clause stating the ground or reason. 1 S. 15. 23 *!y^ap xlpN???! . . • rip«J3 \W_ because thou hast rejected the word of Je. he has rejected thee from being king. 1 K. 10. 9, Is. 45. 4; 48. 5, Job 36. 9, Ps. 59. 16 (Hitz. TJ'V'U cf. 1 S. 2. 16. Pr. 25. 4 (inf. abs.). And vav impf. regularly continues another vav impf., as Nu. 22. 21, 22 'm fiM-in^ . . . '^yt\ . . . tthrro ,l ?i op|o and Balaam arose and saddled his ass, and went . . . and the anger of God was kindled. § 51. In such sentences as and in course of time Cain brought, or, and when they were in the field Cain rose up, i.e. when the circumstances, temporal or adverbial, under which the action was performed are stated, the language IMPERFECT WITH STRONG VAV 75 prefers to use co-ordinate clauses, prefixing ipf^ and it was. Gen. 4. 3 pjj NIJT D'W Yjpp TT^ ««a? z* was in course of time that (and) Caz'w brought; 4. 8 rntoa DnVTlS "'STl p Bj5*l ««^ *'* was when they were in the field that C. rose up. This construction is the usual one in prose narrative. See for variety of usage Gen. 12. 11, 14; 19. 34; 21. 22; 22. 20; 24. 52; 26. 8; 27. 1 ; 29. 13; 41. 8, Jud. 1. 14; 11. 4, 1 S. 10. 11 ; 11. 11 end, 2 S. 2. 23. Rem. 1. Such a sentence as and when they saw her they praised her may be made in various ways. 1 . . . . Dnx"}3 Wl • • • *&?i 2. . . . Dnsna . . . $>rM. 3. . . . #>rn /. .'wrwi. The first is usual ; the second with inf. back in the clause is classical, e.g. Gen. 32. 26 ; 34. 7 (35. 9) ; the third not unusual with see, hear, and finish n?3 (24. 19; 30. 1; 37. 21, Ex. 34. 33, 2 S. 11. 27), but also in other cases. Other forms are rarer, e.g. Gen. 27. 34 yWVl . . . Dnk"l3 without and (cf. 2 S. 15. 10) ; or mainly late, as WiTJ . . . DnS"]31 or \?bn . . . '~0\ with and at the beginning. The secution to TVl is not always vav impf., though this is usual. These forms appear 1. 'p K3J! . . . Wl. 2. 1,-pi 'p joan. ... 3. twn j*pi . . . wi. 4 . 'p nam . . . vn. Exx. of 2, Gen. 40. i, Ex. 16. 27, Deu. 9. 11, Jos. 10. 27, 1 S. 18.30, 1 K. 11. 4; 14. 25; 15. 29; 17. 17. Of 3, Gen. 7. 10; 15. 12; 22. 1, Ex. 12. 29, 1 S. 18. 1, 2 S. 3. 6, 2 K. 2. 9. In 4 run is usually followed by ptcp. or nominal sent. Rem. 2. Ex. of vav impf. after stative verb, Is. 3. 16, are haughty and walk; Ps. 16. 9. The impf. after tK, &c. referring to the past (§ 45) is also continued by vav impf. Jos. 8. 30, 31 ; 10. 12 ; 22. 1, 1 K. 3. 16 ; 11. 7 perf., 2 K. 12. 18. On the other hand, the secution of fut. perf. (§ 41 c) is usually vav perf. or simple impf., Jud. 9. 9, 1 S. 26. 9, Is. 4. 4; 55. 10, 11, Gen. 26. 10; 43.9. So very often the proph. perf. (§ 41 b) and perf. of confidence is con- tinued by vav perf., the ideal position not being maintained. Gen. 9. 13 ; 17. 20, Nu. 24. 17, Deu. 15. 6, 2 K. 5. 20, Is. 2. 11 ; 43. 14. Rem. 3. In the brief language of poetry vav impf. some- f6 HEBREW SYNTAX §51. times expresses a dependence which is usually expressed by '3. Is. 51. 12, 13 WW P18"' l who art thou that thoufearesfi Ps. 144. 3 with 8. 5. Gf. Is. 49. 7. Rem. 4. Vav impf. express the ingress or entrance upon realisation of the second action in connection with the first. But the second is confined to the sphere of the first, and has not independent duration, as an unconnected impf. might have. Thus W "IDX he said, and it was, is all bounded by one circle, so that and it was becomes in usage the expression of a finished fact, taking on the quality of the preceding perf. Hence vav impf. comes to stand inde- pendently in the sense of the perf. It may be interjected like the perf. amidst other forms (§ 41 b), Ps. 55. 18, 19, Hab. 1. 10, or stand unconnected with immediately preced- ing forms, Ps. 8. 6 and thou didst let him want, adding merely another fact ; cf. 2 S. 19. 2, where mourns is a larger idea than "weeps" which it embraces (unless "mourns" were understood of successive fits of lamentation). The fact expressed by vav. impf. may be completed really or only ideally. Jer. 38. 9 and he is dead (must die) of hunger ; Job 10. 8 and thou hast swallowed me up ; 10. 22 and it has shone (its light is) as darkness. Cf. the instructive pass. Nu. 12. 12. In such poetical passages as Job 4. 5; 6. 21; 14. 10, where vav impf. appears to follow a present, it is not the vav impf. but the preceding verbs that are peculiar. The vigorous poetical style expresses the completed acts touch, see, die, by the impf. (pres.), cf. 14. 106. — It is not always easy to perceive the significance of the changes in secution ; cf. Am. 9. 5 with Ps. 104. 32, Hos. 8. 13, Mic. 6. 16, Ps. 42. 6 with v. 12, Job 7. 17, 18; 9. 20, Ps. 52. 9. Rem. 5. The use of the impf., particularly in poetry, can hardly be accounted for by supposing that it expresses in every case some meaning distinctively belonging to the simple impf. This difficulty has induced some scholars to assume that the vav conv. forms may be broken up and still retain the conversive sense. Hitz. proceeds on these principles: 1. vav and the verb maybe separated, so that Alpj3 . . • 1 = "bap\ : vav perf. ; and ty?j^ ... 1, Jni3|* . . . ) = IMPERFECT WITH STRONG VAV "]7 ta'??!> and so fop: . . . 1 = fojM. Job. 5. 11; 28. 25, Is. 29. 16, Ps. 22. 22; 27. 10; 44. 10, Job 3. 256; 4. ii, Jer. 44. 22. ' 2. The simple impf. forms without vav may be equivalent to the convers. forms where the latter might have stood, viz. at the head of the clause, so that ^Bp!, i>Bj* = fops and &f. = ifcp5, Ps. 8. 7; 18. 12; 44. 11 ; 81. 8; 138. 3; 139. 13, Hos. 6. 1. 3. The simple impf. forms (without vav in the clause) may be equivalent to the convers. forms in the middle of a clause, just because there the vav conv. forms could not stand, the vav necessarily falling' away ! Ps. 32. 5 ; 60. 12 ; 1 14. 3. Cf. Hitzig on Ps. 32. 5 ; 30. 9; 39. 4; 116. 3, Jer. 15. 6; 44. 22. The exx. cited by Ew. indicate that he proceeds virtually on the same principles. 1. Ps. 69. 22 impf. disjoined from vav (in secution to vav impf.). 2. Ps. 78. 15 no vav but impf. at head of the clause where vav conv. impf. might have stood. So v. 26, 49, 50. 3. Ps. 81. 7 no vav in the clause and impf. (after perf.) not at the head. So Ps. 106. 18; 107. 6, 13. Driver admits of two cases: 1. Separation of vav by tmesis, but only with strictly modified form (?9p^ &c). And 2. strictly modified form at head of clause without vav. If the principle be admitted at all, however, it will be necessary to go further, because the strictly modified forms are so few, and even they are not always employed. In regard to 1, 3 of Hitz. above, it is certain that the presence or absence of a preceding vav has no effect on the usage of impf. in the middle of a clause. It is not unnatural that in rapid and vigorous speech the vav might drop off when the verb stands at the head of a clause, particularly among other vav impf. forms, as Ps. 78. 15, 26. Comp. Ps. 106. 17 with Nu. 16. 32; 26. 10; Hos. 6. 1, Pr. 7. 7. Cf. Ps. 18. 12, 14, 16, 38, 39, 44, with the same verses in 2 S. 22. Rem. 6. In some cases vav impf. is pointed as simple vav, e.g. Is. 10. I3"VDK1, T11S1, 43. 28 ^HNl, 48. 3; 51. 2; 1 Hitz. extends the principle to prose, e.g. Deu. x, 12, Jos. 15. 63, 2 S. 2. 28 (on Job 20. 19). 78 HEBREW SYNTAX § 52, 53. 57. 17; 63. 3-5, Zech. 8. 10, Ps. 104. 32; 107. 26-29. * n most of these cases the peculiarity belongs to the first pers. In some of them the vav has evidently conversive force, e.g. Is. 43. 28; 51. 2; in others, e.g. Is. 10. 13, it may be doubtful whether the impf. be not a graphic pres. or freq. There seems no doubt that according to the Massor. tradition the strong vav received in some instances a lighter pro- nunciation. On similar light vav with Juss. cf. § 65, R. 6. Rem. 7. Strong vav is also used with Cohort. This form had no doubt originally a wider sense as an intensive. In some cases a certain force or liveliness may still appear in coh. with vav. conv., e.g. Gen. 41. 11 n»?ri3i and why! we dreamed, 32. 6, Ps. 3. 6; but often any additional emphasis is not to be detected, the form being partly rhythmical, 2 S. 22. 24, or probably, since coh. and juss. make up a single tense-form, partly used as the natural parallel to the juss. forms of vav impf. The use of strong vav with coh. is sporadic. It is rare in the prophets, and most common in the personal narratives in Ezr., Neh., and Dan. PERFECT WITH STRONG VAV. VAV CONV. PERF. § 52. Vav perf. follows a simple impf. in any of its uses, and has the same use. It has, however, in practice become a tense-form, used in the sense of impf., particularly as fut. and freq., although no impf. precedes. When a neg. or other word must come between the vav and perf., the dis- course returns to the simple impf. Is. 11. 6 fcn3"D3? 2Mt *13"| V^T "Hroy "^. and the wolf shal1 dwel1 with the lamb, and the leopard shall lie down with the kid ; Hos. 2. 9 NJflpn ikv) QntiJiXfl and she shall seek them, and shall not find them. Gen. 12. 12, 1 S. 1. 11. § 53. (a) Vav perf. continues impf. in the sense of fut., and its use in this sense is general, although no impf. immediately precedes. 1 K. 22. 22 TjJttJ XTC\ VY^iT] N2N / will go out and be a lying spirit ; Jud. 6. 16 Tf&}} SlYl^ PERFECT WITH STRONG VAV 79 JVSJTl / will be with thee, and thou sha.'t sir.ile Midian. With interrog. Ex. 2. 7 VWTjTj ^Nil shall I go and call? Jud. 15. 18, Ru. 1. 11, 1 S. 23. 2. With neg. Jer. 22. 10 HN1T T1V 2W' 1 VO he shall no more return, and see his t t : T native land. Gen. 18. 18; 24. 7, 38, 40; 40. 13, 19; 46. 33 ; 50. 25. (b) It continues the impf. when it is contingent or dependent on something foregoing, and in general in the senses mentioned § 43 b. Eg. of volition, 1 S. 17. 32 ^pD^ DPl/i'l 'iyF thy servant will go and fight. Of command, Ex. 20. 24 PtOT) "Vnfoyn HE-lN Ham an altar of earth ^ t : -it: • v -: 1- t t-: - : • shalt thou make me, and sacrifice upon it ; v. 9. — Gen. 37. 26 what gain toTJIN WMI imNTIN t\7Xl ^ that we should kill our brother, and cover his blood? 1 S. 29. 8. — Gen. 27. 12 VJ-iyriM YV?rn W^ ^IN perhaps he w«y /"!. ^1 npttjni ... a mist used to go up, «««/ water; 2. 10 DttJOl rem "HEP from there it separated itself, and became four t t : heads; 1 S. 2. 19, 20, and a little robe 'IQM YPTTtoSW} *0 nn7yni. his mother used to make for him, and bring it up to him every year. Gen. 6. 4 ; 29. 2, 3 ; 31.8; 38. 9, Ex. 17. 11, Nu. 21. 8, 9, 1 K. 18. 10. This use ol vav perf . is very common in graphic descriptions of past events that were customary or habitual, and in giving the details of a scene. Gen. 29. 2, 3 (watering of the flocks), Ex. 33. 7-1 1 (procedure with the Tabernacle), Jud. 2. 18, 19 (what happened when a Judge was raised up), Jud. 6. 2-6 (details of a Midianite raid), 1 S. I. 4-7 (Elkanah's case with his two wives), 1 S. 2. 13-16 (practice of the priests), 1 S. 17. 34-36 (David's PERFECT WITH STRONG VAV 8 1 experiences with wild beasts), Am. 4. 7, 8 (a drought), 1 K. 5. 6-8 (Solomon's menage). Rem. 1. (1) The story is generally introduced by HVil and it used to be, followed by DK or ^3 with perf. (simple perf. Nu. 11. 8), sometimes without rpfll (Jud. 2. 18); or by freq. impf. Ex. 33. 7. (2) Details are often introduced or a new start made in the narrative by iTiil. (3) When vav is disjoined from the verb the simple freq. impf. is employed. (4) The writer does not always consistently continue vav perf. or freq. impf. , but falls into simple narrative with vav impf., &c, 1 S. 2. 16, Jud. 6. 4; 12. 5, 6. The passage 1 S. 17. 34 seq. is freq., Op 1 ! having the force of a vigorous supposition (when he rose up). The use of vav perf. as freq. is exceedingly free ; it may occur in any connexion, introducing an additional trait or an entirely new fact. Is. 6. 3 nt"?X nt snpj and one cried (continuously) to the other; 2 S. 12. 16 Mt^l |pi fcOl and he went in and lay allnight (the child died on 7th day). 1 S. 7. 16 T]?ni and he used to go yearly (following a historical narrative) ; 1 K. 9. 25 'B* npyni awrfSol. offered thrice a year (a new point). 1 S. 16. 23 ; 27. 9, 1 K. 4. 7, 2 K. 3. 4, cf. Gen. 37. 3. § 55. Vav perf. continues verbal forms belonging to the sphere of impf., or equivalent to it in meaning, as (a) imper., coh., juss. ; (b) infin. ; (c) ptcp. (a) 1 S. 8. 22 inaSam ub^pl yntt) listen to their voice, and appoint a king; 1 K. 2. 31 iJTQj? 5 ) 'iiryjS fall upon him, and bury him. Gen. 6. 14; 19. 2 ; 45. 19, Ex. 18. 19-22, 1 S. 12. 24; 15. 3, 18, 2 S. 19. 34, 1 K. 2. 36; 17. 13, Jer. 25. 15. So after inf. abs. as general imper. (§ 88 b), Deu. 1. 16; 31. 26, Jer. 32. 14. Cohort, Gen. 31. 44 JT"]2 Urn^ ivH rTTTl let us make a cov. and it shall be a witness : Ru. 2. 7. After juss., Ex. 5. 7 |1H WT\f\ 13^ DH let them go themselves, and gather straw. 1 K. 1. 2; 22. 13. Gen. 1. 14; 28. 3. (b) Infin.— In ref. to fut, 2 K. 18. 32 ^Tlpb} "W^n^ 6 82 HEBREW SVNTAX § 56, 57. till I come and take you ; Jud. 8. 7 'H'Ta fiirnN '■> fim ^flttJlT when Je. gives Zebah into my hand / wz// thrash, &c. Gen. 27. 45, Ex. 1. 16; 7. 5, Jud. 6. 18, 1 S. 10. 2, 8, 1 K. 2.42, 2 K. 10. 2, 3. So inf. abs. for finite verb, Is. 5. 5 ; 31. 5. After inf. in freq. sense, Am. 1. 11 nnttJl IT!** IDTO^ Vttrn an d stifled his compassions; Jer. 7. 9, 10 n^H HiDH QriNll . . . *]to31 do ye steal, murder, commit adultery . . . and then come and stand before me ! 23. 14. (c) Ptcp.— In ref. to fut, Ex. 7. 17 . . . HSD ^5« HSH OT? ttpHSl behold I will smite the waters, and they shall be turned into blood. So v. 27, 28 ; 8. 17; 17. 6, Deu. 4. 22, Jos. 1. 13, 1 S. 14. 8, 1 K. 2. 2; 13. 2, 3; 20. 36, Jer. 21. 9; 25. 9. In a contingent or freq. sense, Ex. 21.12 U^M i"l3Q ]~IO"l any one who smites a man jo fcfe?/ he dies ; 2 S. 14. 10 'hi* inNirn Ty^N "l?l"TOn whoever speaks to thee bring him to me (it is scarcely necessary to read intOPn, cf. Jer. 2. 27, Song 5. 9, jos. 2. 17, 20). 1 s. 2. 13, 14 raj rat ttfw'M tntll "l}^ fc^l whenever any one sacrificed the priest's man would come . . . v. 14. Nu. 21. 8, 2 S. 17. 17, Mic. 3. 5. § 56. Vav perf. may follow anything which supplies the ground or condition of a new development. Hence it forms the apodosis to temporal, causal, and conditional sentences or their equivalents, casus pendens, &c. Gen. 3. 5 DV3, MTS inppJI D5?3N on the day ye eat your eyes shall be opened. Obad. 8. Hos. 1. 4 VngjDl ttjrn Ttt> yet a little, and T will visit; and often with Tiy, Ex. 17. 4, Is. 10. 25 ; 2i. 16; 29. 17, cf. 16. 14; 18. 5, 1 S. 2. 31, 1 K. 13. 31. — Is. 6. 7 ^/ijr "ID"! ^pnDtfrby nj J«3 this has touched thy lips, «»<^ thine iniquity shall depart. Ps. 25. 11 TJTDttJ IVs'? /j)D/!?l '^ for thy name's sake pardon. Is. 3. 16, 17; 37. 29, Nu. 14. 24, Jud. 1 1. 8, 1 K. 20. 28, 2 K. 19. 28.— Casus pendens, Is. 9. 4 nrVjiT! . . . }ND pNp'Va ^ for every boot of him that trampeth in the fray . . . shall be for burning; 10. 26 PERFECT WITH STRONG VAV 83 1 iNto!! , l D !, tl"7V 1!llSp , l and his rod upon the sea, he shall lift it up. Nu. 14. 31, 1 S. 25, 27, 2 S. 14. 10. After T\1T\- Nu. 14. 40 why) *iaarr; jer. 23. 39 ^to^ ^jn (so «/. =T>MtoJl). Ez. 34. 11. Cf. Gen. 47. 23. In all the above uses of vav the apod, has a certain emphasis. And, of course, vav perf. continues another vav perf. Gen. 3. 22 TH . . . VsNl . . . nph') . ■ . nSttfHS. Deu. 11. -t -t: '-t: - ; • I v 18-20. §57- When there is an adverbial clause the phrase mm. ##*/ zV j^a// be, or, zc/aj (freq.), is often prefixed, particularly when the actions arefut. or frequentative. Ex. 22. 26 mm "'riyQttJ'l ^7^ pl^V 1 ? anc ^ w ^ en h e shall cry unto me, / will hear; Nu. 21. 9 TT) . . . tO^m ttfWnN TTtifrDN HTT1 ««rf tx • * : • v ' - t * tt: it was if a serpent had bitten a man, he looked . . . and lived; Jud. 6. 3 YHQ n 1 ?^ Vi jnrDN iTm and it was when It : • x t : -t • t t : Israel had sown, Midian used to come up. Gen. 24. 14; 27. 40, 44. 31, Ex. 1. 10; 4. 8, 9; 17. 11 ; Deu. 17. 18, Jud. 4. 20, 1 S. 3. 9; 16. 16, 1 K. 1. 21; 11. 38. — Gen. 30. 41; 38. 9, Jud. 19. 30, 1 S. 16. 23, 2 S. 14. 26; 15. 5. If and be disjoined from verb the impf. must be used, Gen. 12. 12; 30. 42. But frequently impf. without and is employed, Gen. 4. 14, Ex. 33- 7-9, 1 S. 2. 36; 17. 25, 2 S. 15. 35, 1 K. 2. 37; 19. 17, 2 K. 4. 10, Is. 2. 2 ; 10. 27 ; 14. 3, 4. Rem. 1. In § 56 the time designations are sometimes very terse ; Ex. 16. 6 Efl3>T|! 3"?.? at evening, then ye shall know. Cf. Nu. 16. 5 jn , 1 1^3 in the morning he will show. Jud. 16. 2. Pr. 24. 27 fVOSI ins afterwards, /14c« build thy house, 1 K. 13. 31. The causal connection also may be very slightly expressed. Gen. 20. 11 there is no fear of God here 'JUTni and they will kill me. Ru. 3. 9 I am Ruth Fifenai therefore spread thy skirt. 2 K. 9. 26 I saw the blood of Naboth yesterday ^pp^l and I will requite thee. Is. 5. 8 till there be no place DrDB^iTl and ye be let dwell alone. 2 S. 7. 9, 14; 14. 7, Gen. 26. 10, 22, Deu. 6. 5, Jud. 1. 15, Pr. 6. 1 1 ; 24. 33, 34. Am. 5. 26, 27, and (therefore) ye shall 84 HEBREW SYNTAX § 53, C9. take up (the unexpressed ground is the exaggerated cultus in contrast to v. 25). Vav perf., however, has acquired the force of a repre- sentative of the impf., and may occur in a fut. or freq. sense in any connection. Josh. 22. 28, Is. 2. 2, Jud. 13. 3, 1 S. 15. 28, 1 K. 2. 44. Ex. 6. 6, 2 S. 16. 13. Peculiar Am. 7. 4 n^DSl and it would (or toz'//, is in act to — the imminent act made pres.) devour. The act was not begun. Rem. 2. The two most common forms of § 57 are Hos. 1. 5 wuBh twnn Di"? nvn / W z7/ 6mz£; and Hos. 2. 23 n;rn ri3J?S X*-in Di s 3 [will answer, cf. w. 18. The latter common in Is. (see exx. at end of § 57). Am. 8. 9, Zeph. 1. S, with 12. Rem. 3. In later style iTm sometimes agrees with subj.-_ Nu. 5. 27, Jer. 42. 16; cf. z/. 17, instead of being used impersonally. PERF. AND IMPF. WITH SIMPLE VAV (COPULATIVE) § 58. In the more ancient and classical language vav with perf. is almost invariably conversive. In the declining stages of the speech the vav of the form 7Ep"l is often simply copulative, and he killed; while in post-biblical language the vav convers. disappears. In the classical language, however, vav with perf. occasionally expresses an action not consequential or successive to what precedes, but co-ordinate with it. (a) When the second verb merely repeats the idea of the first, being synonymous, or in some way parallel with it. 1 S. 12. 2 imfen "VfoJpt 'Wl I am old and grey; Is. 1. 2 >, £1E)J2'VY) ^iil?^ D^?i I have nourished and brought up children. Gen. 31. 7 he has cozened me, and changed (changing) my hire. Deu. 2. 30, Nu. 23. 19, 1 K. 8. 47, 2 K. 19. 22, Is. 29. 20; 63. 10, Ps. 20. 9; 27. 2; 38. 9, Job 1. 5, Lam. 2. 22, 1 Chr. 23. 1. This diners little from the asyn- detous construction. Jos. 13. 1, Lam. 2. 16, Jud. 5. 27. PERF. AND IMPF. WITH SIMPLE VAV 85 (&) When the second verb expresses a contrast. 1 K. 3. 1 1 fi^Ntth . . . QiW ph&tf tib thou hast not asked long t:-t: • t -r 1 - x ° life . . . but hast -asked, &c. Jer. 4. 10, thou saidst, Ye shall have peace ttJESPn^ l^n HS^I. whereas the sword reaches to the life. 1 S. 10. 2 he has lost thought of the asses Oj? XtiT\ and is concerned about you. 2 K. 8. 10, Pr. 9. 12. And, in general, when an action is thrown out of the stream of narrative, and invested with distinct importance and independence. Gen. 21. 25 IN Hplm. and Abr. chid with Abimelek. Gen. 34. 5 held his peace, so 2 K. 18. 36. 1 K. 21. 12 (the two points in Jezebel's letter are carried out). 2 K. 18. 4, where, perhaps, each of the acts is emphasised. Is. I. 8 and is left, 22. 14; 28. 26. (c) But there are many cases where vav with perf. appears in simple narrative, and is merely copulative. 1 K. 12. 32; 13. 3 ; 14. 27; 2 K. 14. 7, 10; 21. 4; 23. 4, and often. The usage becomes more common as the language declines, and comes under the influence of Aramaic. Even in early style the form rPffi. and it was is not quite rare. Am. 7. 2, 1 S. 1. 12; 10. 9; 17. 48; 25. 20, 2 S. 6. 16. In Gen. 38. 5 rd. WtTl with Sep. Rem. 1. The perf. with vav seems occasionally to resume and restate briefly an event previously described in detail ; Jud. 7. 13 ^5231, 1 K. 20. 21, Gen. 15. 6? The two cases of 7Vi) Jud. 3. 23, 2 S. 13. 18 are curious. In 2 S. v. 18 states how the two injunctions of v. 17 were literally carried out. In 1 K. n. 10 njSl has almost plup. sense. In 1 K. 6. 32, 35 y?P\ is freq., distributing the act over several objects; § 546. In 2 S. 16. 5 the consn. is unusual, two nominal clauses might have been expected. In some cases the text is faulty, as Is. 38. 15 "lOKl. § 59. The impf. with simple vav (copulative) is common in all periods of the language, especially in animated speech. The use of the simple impf., and especially its repetition, 86 HEBREW SYNTAX § 60, 61. gives the various actions more independence and force than if the ordinary secution with vav perf. had been adopted. Gen. 49. 7 KFB&O . . . DpyPlN / will divide them . . . and I will scatter them ; Hos. 5. 14 "iy7MT ^fltON- Sometimes with force of contrast, Hos. 6. 1 IJSJQ^I. fyVS he has torn, but he will- heal us. 8. 13; 13. 8, Is. 5. 29. The asyndetous consn. is only slightly more vivid. Ex. 15. 9, Hos. 5. 15; 6- 3; 9- 9; 10. 2 (common in Hos.). In later style impf. with simple vav is used where earlier style would have used vav perf., Ps. 91. 14; and in conditional sentences, Is. 40. 30. THE MOODS. IMPERATIVE, JUSSIVE, AND COHORTATIVE. § 60. The imper. is used, as in other languages, to express a command, advice (often ironical, 1 K. 2. 22, Am. 4. ^permission, or request. Besides the ordinary form one strengthened by n may be used, to which or to the ordinary form the precative particle N3 is often added ; Gen. 27. 26 ^TnjPtift N3TlttJ3l come here and kiss me ! 24. 23 V? S3 ^yXl tell me! Ex. 20. 12, 2 S. 18. 23, Nu. 23. 7. The imper. is only used in 2nd pers. ; for other persons the impf. (juss., coh.) must be employed; Gen. 18. 4 N3Tlp? D?7D tOJft? let some water be brought. Even for the 2nd pers. the impf. is often used, § 45, R. 4. Gen. 44. 33, 1 K. 1. 2. The imper. cannot he used with negative particles. The impf. must be used, whether with fcO, expressing a command, or with ~>N, expressing oftener dissuasion, deprecation. In the latter case the juss. is very common. Gen. 45. 9 XVT\ Tfa5?jT7N "^N come down to me, delay not; Deu. 9. 7 "Of n3$JT7N remember, forget not. Gen. 18. 3; 26. 2; 37. 22, Deu. 31. 6, 2 K. 18. 26-32, Is. 6. 9, Jer. 4. 3, 4. Ex. 20. 3 seq. Rem. 1. While the lengthened imper. originally ex- pressed some subjective emphasis on the part of the speaker THE MOODS. IMPER., JUSS., AND COHORTATIVE 87 it is often dificult to see any difference between the forms in usage, comp. Jud. 9. 8 with v. 14, 1 S. 9. 23. The extended form seems more courteous than the abrupt shorter form, but euphony always exerts an influence. In some cases the longer form has become fixed, as flE«iD hasten, finyj awake, Htf'Sin bring near, nyaE'n swear, rD'Bfjn listen (exc. Job 33. 31), and others. Rem. 2. The imper. is sometimes interjected in descrip- tions of the fut., the speaker himself taking part in the events described, and directly addressing the subject of them. This imper. is equivalent to a strpng subjective ex- pression of fut., e.g. Is. 54. 14 'prn be far = thou shalt be far, Ps. no. 2, Job 5. 22, 1 S. 10. 7, Is. 37. 30; 65. 18. Rem. 3. In higher style the plur. imper. is used when no definite subj. is addressed ; Is. 13. 2 W'Wfe' lift up a signal! — let a signal be lifted up! 14. 21, and often. Rem. 4. A number of imper. may follow one another, particularly in animated speech. Gen. 27. 19, Jer. 5. 1. Various forms appear. 1. "IDK =]? go, say, Deu. 5. 27, 2 S. 7. 3, 1 K. 18. 8, 19, 41, 44; 19. 5, Hos. 1. 2. 2. lbs 1 ! 1? go and say, 1 K. 22. 22, &c. 3. Fl"10Nl "p, Deu. 12. 28, Jud. 4. 6, 2 S. 7. 5, 1 K. 19. 11, Is. 6. 9. 4. mOK! 7]i?n, Jer. 2. 1 ; 3. 12, and often in Jer., 2 S. 24. 12, 2 K. 5. 10. Not uncommon formulas are, 1 K. 20. 7 *H"W WVj, v. 22 sing., Jer. 2. 19. Different order, Jer. 5, 1 ijm WINTi, cf. both forms, 1 S. 23. 22, 23. § 61. Jussive and Cohortative. 1 — Besides the ordinary impf. there are two modified forms of it, the so-called Cohortative and the Jussive. The former, used in the first person, expresses the desire, will, or intention of the speaker when he himself is subj. of the action; the juss., used in second and third pers., expresses the speaker's desire, will, or command when others are the subj. of the action. The 1 The impf. &c. of an Ar. verb, in 3rd pers. is as follows : — Impf. Subj. Juss. Energic. 3 s. yaqtula yaqtula yaqtul yaqtulanna, yaqtulaw, 3 pi. yaqtuliJwa yaqtuM yaqtul/2 p. yaqtula. 88 HEBREW SYNTAX § 62, 68. first form is called by some the Intentional ; others embrace both under the name Voluntative. When special cohort, and juss. forms exist they are generally used to express the senses just noted, but by no means uniformly, the simple impf. being often found where the modified forms might have been employed. Job 3. 9 n^v 1 ^ with 2 °- 1 7 n^V 1 ?*?. § 62. Use of Cohort. — The coh. or intentional is used to express the will of the speaker in ref. to his own action, Deu. 12. 20 Itol rfyfo I would eat flesh: 17. 14 rTOitoN ttt:i ^ T • t lb® ty r wil1 set a kin s over me ; x 3- 7 n i"'7?5£! HD^. D"HIlN we will go and serve other gods. The particle M2 is often added, Gen. 18. 21 N3TmN T will go down, Ex. 3. 3, Jud. 19. 11, 13, Is. 5. 1. The cohort, form is only occasional with neg., 2 S. 24. 14 OTN "P21 'T5 N3TT?93 !"HSN"7N . . . but into the hand of man let me not fall; Jer. 17. 18; 18. 18, Jon. 1. 14, Ps. 25. 2; 69. 15. When there are several verbs one may have coh. form and the others not, or all may have it. Comp. Is. 1. 24, Gen. 24. 57, Ps. 26. 6 with Gen. 22. 5; 33. 12, 2 S. 3. 21, Hos. 2. 9; 6. 3, Ps. 27. 6.— Thus when the speaker is free the coh. expresses intention or determination, or it may be desire ; when he is dependent on others it expresses a wish or request. Gen. 11. 3,4,7; 12. 2, 3; 33. 14; 50. s, Nu. 21. 22, Deu. 2. 27, Jud. 12. 5, 1 S. 28. 22, 2 S. 16. 9, 1 K. 19. 20. § 63. Use of Jussive. — The juss. is used — (a) to express a command ; 1 S. 10. 8 brj\F\ D"!2P njttttj seven days thou sltalt wait. Particularly in neg. sentences, Deu. 3. 26 Tljf "ON "l?n flpiJT^N speak to me no more; Hos. 4. 4 #*» nj^Wj Yghtt tfW let none contend and none reprove. If there be several neg. clauses N^ is often used after the first, 1 K. 20. 8 ni^H N^ yptfiT^N listen not, nor consent, Am. 5. 5 ; but in impassioned language ^N THE MOODS. IMPER., JUSS., AND COHORTATIVE 89 is retained, Hos. 4. 15, Ob. 12-14. — Gen. 22. 12; 30. 34; 33.9; 45- 20, Deu. 15. 3. (b) To express advice or recommendation; Jud. 15. 2 her sister is prettier rpfinfl T? NSTlfi have her instead of * tvs-': t ■ : her; Gen. 41. 33 Vin^. ttPM HiT)? NT, (so Baer) let Ph. look out a man and place him; v. 34. Ex. 8. 25, 1 K. 1. 2; 22. 13. (c) To express a wish, request, or entreaty; 1 S. 1. 23 V"m '1 Dj£ may Je. fulfil his word; 1 K. 17. 21 M"3ttJ£l T\XT\ T?)iTtt$p3 wza/ ^e J0&/ of this child return ; Gen. 18. 30 *$ivb "till Nr^N be not angry, Lord. Gen. 13. 8; 19. 7; 26. 28; 30. 24; 31. 49; 44. 33; 45. 5, Ex. 5. 2i, Nu. 23. 10, 1 S. 24. 16, 2 S. 19. 38, 1 K. 20. 32. Rem. 1. In a few cases the coh. appears in 3rd pers., Deu. 33. 16 (rd. nK13D?), Is. 5. 19, Ps. 20. 4, Job n. 17. On the other hand a few cases occur of juss. in 1st pers., 1 S. 14. 36, 2 S. 17. 12, Is. 41. 23 (Kth.), 28. These facts might suggest that coh. was at one time a complete tense-form (like Ar. energic), and that the same was true of juss. At present the fragmentary forms supplement each other. Rem. 2. Except in neg. sent, the juss. of 2nd pers. is rare, the imper. being used, in 2nd pers. 1 S. 10. 8, Ez. 3. 3 (Sep. points Kal), Ps. 71. 21. It is also rarely that the juss. is used after i& ; Gen. 24. 8, 1 Sam. 14. 36, 2 S. 17. 12; 18. 14 (coh.), 1 K. 2. 6, Ez. 48. 14. Deu. 13. 1. ? Rem. 3. The form ^Ip^ &c. (hiph. of rp*) occurs with no juss. sense, e.g. Nu. 22. 19, Deu. 18. 16, Hos. 9. 15; Jo. 2. 2, Ez. 5. 16. So Gen. 4. 12 (hardly ft om being apod, of a con- dition). There seems a confusion with Kal of S|DK as a k's; cf. 2 S. 6. 1, Mic. 4. 6, Ps. 104. 29. On some anomalous uses of juss. and coh. cf. § 65, R. 5 . 6. 90 HEBREW SYNTAX § 64, 65. THE MOODS WITH LIGHT VAV § 64. Imper. with simple vav. — The imper. with simple vav following another imper. expresses the certain effect of the first, or it may be its purpose. The first imper. in this case virtually expresses a condition which carries with it the second as a consequence. Gen. 42. 1 8 VTX\ *W% H^T do this and live; 2 K. 5. 13 "intD , l yVTS wash and become clean; Is. 45. 22 lytpiiYl ^7Nl ^5 look unto me, and be saved. Sometimes the certain issue rather than strict consequence is expressed, as in the ironical concession, Is. 8. 9 V^Nnn IfiiTl gird yourselves, but (ye shall) be confounded. 2 K. 18. 31, Am. 4. 4; 5. 4, 6, Jer. 25. 5; 27. 12, Ps. 37. 27. Without vav, Hos. 10. 12, Song 4. 16, Pr. 20. 13. § 65. Juss. and coh. with simple vav. — The coh. and juss. with simple vav are greatly used to express design or purpose ; or, according to our way of thought, sometimes effect. If the purpose-clause be neg. N71 with indie, is almost always used. (a) After an imper., or anything with imper. sense, as coh. or juss. Gen. 27. 4 rnSte'l "h ("l^in bring to me that I may eat; Ex. 14. 12 'SETIM rnijni 1330 b~Vn leave us alone, that we may serve Egypt; Jud. 6. 30 N2Jii"T TteF\ ^23,TlNl bring out thy son, that he may die; Ex. 32. 10 " , SM"inj 1 _'l s j> •"tTPSri let me alone, that my anger may burn ; Gen. 42. 2 J"fl03 tib) !Tnp/] ^TOttJ buy corn for us, that we may live, and not die; 1 S. 5. 11 N71 itlS^l . . . VT?ti5 ''rite nvy* send away the ark that it may return, and not kill me; 2 S. 13. 25 -%h$ -&33 tih) liVj ih) M3"Sm let us not all go, that we be not burdensome to thee. Cf. Rem. 1. (b) After clauses expressing a wish or hope. Jud. 9. 29 TTypto) "HTjl njTl DynTlM ]JT ^n would that this people were in my hand, that I might (then I would) remove Abim. THE MOODS WITH LIGHT VAV 91 Is. 25. 9, Jer. 8. 23 ; 9. 1 ; 20. 10 (after "y^N, cf. coh. Ex. 32. 30), Ps. 55. 7, Job 6. 9, 10; 13. 5; 22. 28; 23. 3-5; 16. 20, 21 my eye drops (=a prayer) that he would vindicate. (c) After neg. sentences. Nu. 23. 19 IW^ hi* U^N tib God is not a man, that he should lie; cf. inf. 1 S. 15. 29. Ps. 51. 18 rtiJ^") Hit yfenn fc*7 thou desirest not sacrifice, that I should give it. 2 K. 3. 11, Is. 53. 2, Ps. 49. 8-10; 55. 13. Without and, Job 9. 33 there is no daysman, that he might lay his hand upon us both. So v. 32. (d) After interrog. sentences. 1 K. 22. 20 7lFi& ^fo by?[ INnSrnN who will entice Ahab to go up? Am. 8. 5 "U$ il'V'iLtifrT ttnhil "itl^l Vm when will the new moon be over, that we may sell corn? Ex. 2. 7, 1 S. 20. 4, 1 K. 12. 9 (cf. inf. v. 6), 2 K. 3. 11. Is. 19. 12; 40. 25 ; 41. 26, 28, Jer. 23. 18 (rd. last word yftttP"!, cf. v. 22), Hos. 14. 10 (Jer. 9. 11), Jon. 1. 11, Lam. 2. 13, Job 41. 3, Est. 5. 3, 6. Instead of vav with juss. or coh. the more vigorous imper. with vav may be found in the above cases, a-d. Gen. 20. 7 ; 45. 18, Ex. 3. 10, 2 S. 21. 3, 1 K. 1. 12, 2 K. 5. 10; 18. 32; Ps. 128. 5, Job 11. 6, Ru. 1. 9. Rem. 1. Additional exx. of § 65a. Gen. 13. 9; 18. 30; 19. 20; 27. 21; 30. 25, 28; 42. 20, Ex. 8. 4; 14. 15, 16, Nu. 14. 42; 21. 7; 25. 4, Deu. 1. 42; 5. 28, 1 S. 9. 27; 11. 3; 15. 16; 17. 10; 18. 21; 28. 7, 2 S. 14.7; 16. 11, 1 K. 13. 6, 18; 18. 27, 2 K. 5- 8; 6. 22, Is. 2. 3 ; 5. 19; 55- 3» J er - 37- 2 °; 38- 24, Hos. 2. 4, Ps. 45. 12; 81. 9, 11; 83. s ; 90. 14, Job 13. 13. In the cases a-d, Ar. uses fa with subjun. Occasionally Heb. uses vav with volunt. to express design even after the indie, in the past, as Lam. 1. 19 13W blit ttS^a they sought food that they might revive their soul (cf. inf. v. 11). Is. 25. 9, 1 K. 13. 33, 2 K. 19. 25. Rem. 2. The idea of design expressed by the consn. is illustrated by its interchange with b and inf., e.g. 1 K. 12. 6 inf. with v. 9 juss., 1 K. 22. 7 with v. 8, cf. Deu. 92 HEBREW SYNTAX §65. 17. 17 with v. 20. Effect is rather expressed by vav perf., n\"n not W, though the distinction is not always apparent; comp. 1 S. 15. 25 coh. with v. 30 vav perf. Ex. 8. 12, 1 S. 24. 16, 2 S. 21. 6, 1 K. 1. 2. Thejuss., however, does not express effect simply so as that, apart from design ; though there is a tendency to put design into the action, rather than the agent, and this might explain some cases of juss.; cf. § 149, R. 3. — On the other hand, in negative sent, vav perf. often expresses the effect or con- sequence of the action, the whole compound expression (first verb and its consequence vav perf.) being under the neg. ; Deu. 7, 25, 26 n*m K^rrxfy nnpbi . . . "ibnn t6 thou shalt not covet and take, thou shalt not bring it to thy house and so become a curse. Ex. 33. 20, Deu. 19 10; 22. 4, Is. 28. 28, Ps. 143. 7. Rem. 3. The neg. apod, is usually subordinated by K?1 (or HO) with ordinary impf. The form ?N1 rather co-ordinates its clause to the preceding one, Deu. 33. 6, Gen. 22. 12, Jud. 13. 14, Ps. 27. 9, though some cases may seem dubious, Nu. 11. 15, 1 S. 12. 19, Ps. 69. 15, cf. both neg. Pr. 27. 2. Rem. 4. The vav is occasionally omitted. Ps. 61. 8 irnS3) )D (imp. pi. rOD) enjoin that they keep him. Ex. 7. 9, Is. 27. 4, Job 9. 32, 33, 35, Ps. 55. 7; 118. 19; 119. 17. In Ps. 140. 9 rd. perhaps 10 v £ and attach to v. 10. Rem. 5. Some uses of coh. are peculiar, (a) It is not unnatural that the coh. or intentional should be used to express an action which one resigns himself to do, though under external pressure — a subjective I must. Is. 38. 10 n ?P£, Ps. 57- 5, Jer. 3. 25 ? (b) Its use is also natural when a narrator recalls and repeats dramatically his thoughts and resolutions on a former occasion, as the Bride recites the resolutions she formed in her dreams, Song 3. 2, cf. 5. 2. So perhaps Ps. 77. 4, 7, Hab. 2. 1, Job 19. 18? But Ps. 66. 6 nriDtM DtJ» there did we rejoice, can hardly be so ex- plained (though impf. might be according to § 45, R. 2). Other cases occur where its usual sense cannot be attached to coh. The form, however, is but a fragment of a mood, which possibly had originally a wider range of meaning. There is also a tendency in the later stages of a language THE MOODS WITH LIGHT VAV 93 to use the stronger forms without the special force they have in earlier times. Thus the coh. seems sometimes to be merely an emphatic impf., and rhythm may occasionally have dictated the form. Jer. 4. 19, 21; 6. 10, Ps. 42. 5; 55. 3, 18; 88. 16, Is. 59. 10. — In several cases after 1J?, Pr. 12. 19, Ps. 73. 17. Cf. Lam. 3. 50, where juss. tn'is parall. to Tpf!, not as Ps. 14. 2. Rem. 6. The use of juss. forms, especially in later books, is full of difficulty. According to Mass. pointing (the strict moods being omitted) the following forms are in use : — perf. \a ?'l?pn. impf. \b ?*I?i?2 simple perf. and impf. 2fl ?t?i???. 26 ^Bipni regular convers. forms. 3a ^t?j?ni. 3J Ttpjp'l vav copulative. 4 5 tap:,'^?i>-l the modified form with or without simple vav used in the senses of the simple impf., e.g. in descriptions of past and present (= 16), and as vav perf., &c. (= 2b, 36). While 3a is in the main late (§ 58), 2fi is common at all times in animated speech. The difficulty lies with \b ; e.g. Job 13. 27 vjn 1D3 DBTI) and thou settest my feet in the stocks (the form preserved in the quotation, 33. 11). Ps. 11. 6, Is. 12. 1, Pr. 15. 25, Job 18. 9, 12; 20. 23, 26, 28 ; 27. 22, &c. Again, Joel 2. 20 ^K3 !"PJN inanSf byn\ his smell shall come up and his stink shall ascend, where bm = nr6yi or rbvn\ ; Zeph. 2. 13 in; en «« 2 ^i 30, &c. It is perhaps well to endeavour to fit some known juss. sense on each case as it is met with, though it may prove a waste of ingenuity. Further, while the general principles of Syntax may be common to all the Shem. languages, appeals to analogies from cogn. languages are often precarious. The reader for ex. who calls in the use of A.r. au, or, with subj. in the sense of unless, or else, to explain the juss. Is. 27. 5 P.H7- 'N or that (unless) he take hold, will be disconcerted to find in the next verse a juss. S^?'! in a plain affirmative sentence. 1 1 Appeal to Ar. au in Is. 27. 5 is all the more precarious, inasmuch as the indie, is permissible after au. Cf. a case Noeld. Carm. Arab. 5. 7. 94 HEBREW SYNTAX § 65, 66. As many juss. forms cannot be understood in a juss. sense, many scholars are inclined to go behind the Mass. tradition, and point according to what is supposed to be classical usage. Two main lines of emendation present themselves: i. to point 1 or 1 (vav conv.) in a number of cases where Mass. has 1 with juss. forms. ^.^..Job 34. 37 3$ for 3$, Is. 63. 3 H for P. Pr. 15. 25, Job 15. 33; 20. 23 ; 27. 22, &c. 2. To substitute indicative (defectively written) for juss. of Mass. E.g. Mic. 3. 4 T?P^ for ">HD , 1. Deu. 32. 8, Ps. 85. 14, Job 34. 29, &c. In cases where there is consonantal shortening in the form only the first method is available ; in cases where there is mere vowel difference either method may be used, e.g. Job 13. 27 DKTil may be read DB'W or EBTll a s may seem necessary. 3. These two principles may need to be supplemented by more or fewer of the assumptions referred to, § 51, R. 5. Unfortunately even these very wide operations on the Mass. text fail to explain all the instances. Cases like Jo. 2. 20, Dan. 11. 4, 16, Lev. 15. 24, Ez. 14. 7, &c. remain. In these cases the juss. seems used as an ordinary impf., and the question is raised how wide the usage may be. While therefore it is of course legitimate to subject any case of Mass. pointing to criticism, sporadic emendations, so long as uncertainty remains on the general question, afford little satisfaction. The state of the question being understood the following cases maybe looked into. Exx. of yao Is. 12. 1, Job 10. 16, Ecc. 12. 7, Dan. 11. 10, 18, 19, 28. D't? Zeph. 2. 13, Ps. 85. 14, Job 13. 27; 24. 25; 33. 11, Dan. 11. 17. ^J Is. 35. 1, 2; 61. 10, Zech. 10. 7, Pr. 23, 25, &c. rvn Gen. 49. 17, 1 S. 10. 5, Lev. 15. 24, Ps. 72. 16, Job 18. 12; 20. 23; 24. 14. prn hiph. Is. 27. 5; 42. 6, Job 18. 9. Din hiph. 1 S. 2. 10, 2 S. 22. 14, Job 37. 4, 5 ; 40. 9 (no- where in indie). "fyo hiph. Job 15. 33; 27. 22, Dan. 8. 12, cf. Ps. 68. 15. iriD hiph. Mic. 3. 4, Job 34. 29. niO Is. 50. 2. Job 36. 14. Din Ps. 72. 13 and often. -in» hiph. Ps. 11. 6, Job 20. 23. on Nu. 24, 7, 1 S 2. 10, Mic. 5. 8.— Nu. 24. 19, Deu. 28. 8, 21, 36; 32. 8, 18, 1 K. 8. 1, Is. 27. 6; 63. 3, Hos. 14. 7, Mic. 6. 14; 7. 10, Jer. 13. io (cf. THE ACCUSATIVE 95 coll. 3 25 ; 4. 19, 21), Nah. 3. 11, Zech. 9. 5, Mai. 2. 12? Ez. 14. 7 with Jo. 2. 20, Zeph. 2. 13, Ps. 12. 4; 25. 9; 47. 4; 58. s ; 90. 3; 107. 29, Job 10. 17; 17. 2; 20. 26, 28 (cf. 36. 15); 23. 9, n; 27. 8; 33. 2i, 27; 34. 37; 38. 24; 40. ig, Pr. 12. 26; 15. 25, Lam. 3. 50, Dan. 11. 4, 16, 25. 3°- The frequency with which certain words appear anomal- ously in the juss., and the place of others in the clause, suggest that rhythm sometimes dictated the form (Job 23. 9, 11). The fact that the anomalous juss. is often at the head of the clause has little meaning, as this is the usual place of the verb. — Pointing like Ex. 22. 4 C^iTiyy '3 seems due to the accentual rhythm, and no more implies an intermediate "IV3'' than n^'D implies anything but p'O'D. Cf. Job 39. 26; 22. 28, Ps. 21. 2; 104. 20? GOVERNMENT OF THE VERB THE ACCUSATIVE § 66. Verbs subordinate other words to themselves in the accusative case. This accus. is of various kinds. Besides the ace. of the object, verbs may subordinate words to them- selves in a freer way, in what may be called the adverbial accus., e.g. in definitions of place and time. Again, the action of the verb may reach its object not directly, but through the medium of a preposition. Very many so-called preposi- tions, however, are really nouns, and stand themselves in the adverbial ace. The accus. termination a in the Shemitic speeches is probably the remains of a demonstrative particle (Eth. ha or a), which indicated the direction to of the verbal action or the verbal state, and this demonstrative nature of the case explains its very wide usage. 1 1 With this idea of direction to of the verbal action or bearing on of the condition expressed by the verb is to be compared the use of prep. $1 with obj. in Aram, and later Heb. 9<5 HEBREW SYNTAX § 67, 68. The chief accusatives are these — (i) The ace. of absolute object or infin. abs., with which may be connected the cognate ace. (2) The ace. in definitions of time, place, and measure. (3) The ace. of condition, or state of subject or object of the verbal action, including ace. of manner of the action. (4) The ace. of specification, or, as it is called, of respect. (5) The ace. of the direct object of transitive verbs. (6) Certain other accusatives, less common or doubtful in Heb., as the ace. of ■motive or purpose of the action ; the ace. after tTTT to be, &c. ; and that after certain particles as !7|n behold, &c. 1. The Absolute Object § 67. (a) Any verb, transitive or intransitive, may sub- ordinate its own inf. abs. or nomen verbi in the ace, with the effect of adding force to the predication. Gen. 2. 17 HTO rVfoft thou shalt die; 18. 18 b'Hi *\lh mm VH he shall be a great nation ; Is. 6. 9 yifttt} IJftStt) hear ye indeed. This ace. mostly precedes the verb, but may follow it, and does so always in the case of imper. and ptcp. See Inf. Abs. § 86. (b) Cognate accus. The cognate noun may be sub ordinated in the same way as an inner ace. in order to strengthen the verb; 1 S. 1. 6 DJ?5"Da ^C^r? ■"M??^?" 1 . and her rival (fellow-wife) continually aggrieved her ; Lam. I. 8 DVltfrV 1 HSltpn Nttn Jer. sinned (a. sin); Is. 42. 17 nttQ, V&P bpS3, D^ntpkil they shall be ashamed (with shame). I K. 1. 12, Is. 21. 7, 24. 16; 66. 10, Mic. 4. 9, Hab. 3. 9, Ez. 25. 12, Zech. 1. 2, Job 27. 12, Ps. 14. 5 ; 106. 14. More frequently the cognate ace, instead of strengthening the action absolutely, expresses a concrete instance of the effect or product of the action; 2 K. 12. 21 "Ittjjjpnipj^l and they made a conspiracy, so 15. 30; Gen. 40. 8 12Q7n Di7n we have dreamed a dream. Ex. 22. 5, Josh. 7. 1 ; 22. 20, 31. Usually this ace. is strengthened either (1) by a gen., or (2) by one or more adj. 1 S. 20. 17 'ilPTM 'ittjpa i"Gi"W THE ACCUSATIVE 97 he loved him, with his love for his own soul; Jer. 22. 19 "15P1 ""^D fQ^i? he shall be buried with the burial of an ass; 2 K. 13. 14 "i^brmN Tlhft he was sick of his disease. : X V T T Lev. 26. 36, Deu. 16. 18, Josh. 9. 9, 2 S. 4. 5, Is. 14. 6; 2 7- 7! 45- I 7> J er - 3°- J 4> Zech. 7. 9, t/". Ps. 139. 22. With o#., Gen. 27. 34 -»^?p— T^ TTOH n 1 ?^ njJSTC p}W he cried with long? Gen. 3. 14 ^H "TSybs all the days of thy life ; Hos. 3. 4 IHP?. C^SH D'W wza«j/ days shall they abide. Ox, how many? of time; Gen. 7.4, 24; 14. 4; 15. 13. — Gen. 21. 34; 27. 44. § 6g. Ace. of place. — Definitions of place are put in ace. (a) In answer to the question where ? In prose this is usual with the words fVH house, nns door, and some others, but chiefly when the definition of locality is general, prepositions being used when it is more precise. This ace. is also gener- ally defined more fully by a following gen. Gen. 24. 23 D'ipE 'SplNIT'S, B^rj is there room in thy father's house! 2 S. 9. 4 t3Q rra. Mirman he is at the house of M. ; Gen. 18. 1, 10 ^n^nnns atf* Mim as he sat at the door of the tent. — Gen. 38. 11 ; 45. 16, Ex. 33. 10, Josh. 1. 4, 15 ; 12. 1 ; 23. 4, 1 K. 19. 13, 2 K. 2. 3, Is. 3. 6, Jer. 36. 10. Gen. 28. 11 at the place of his head, I S. 26. 7 ; Ru. 3. 8, 14 a/ the place of his feet. Without a following £■«!., Ru. 2. 7. Proper names compounded with ITS, are similarly construed, 2 S. 2. 32, Hos. 12. 5. Comp. Jer. 27. 18 with v. 21. (£) In answer to whither ? Gen. 27. 3 mteil N2 go out to the field; 45. 25 £W? y^N WtM and they came to the land of C. The PI of direction is frequently appended, Gen. 24. 16 PC'JPPT "nrn and she went down /o the fountain; 12. 5 ; 39. 1, 12; 42. 38; 43. 17. Of course prepp. (^M, ny, &c.) may be used before noun of place, and must be used with names of persons, to which, too, the D local cannot be appended; Gen. 45. 25 IpJj^M |W5 ^M INi*} to the land of C. to Jacob (cf. Jer. 27. 3). The prep, is used also with creatures, Gen. 31. 4 12^"S« m^Tt to the field to his V V T ~ flock.— Gen. 13. 10; 24. 27, Ex. 4. 9; 17. 10, Josh. 6. 19, 24, Jud. 1. 26; 19. 18, 1 S. 1. 24; 17. 17, 20, 2 S. 20. 3, Is. 14. 11, THE ACCUSATIVE 99 Jer. 16. 8; 18. 2, 3, Nah. 2. 6.— In Ez. 11. 24; 23. 16 D^to is now name of the country; Jer. 50. 10; 51. 24, 35. (c) In answer to how far f Gen. 7. 20, 1 K. 19. 4, Ez. 41. 22, Jon. 3. 4. Rem. 1. In elevated speech and poetry words are put in ace. in answer to where ? more freely, 1 K. 8. 43 in heaven, Is. 16. 2 at the fords, 15. 8; 45. 19 in a waste (in vain), 2 Chr. 33. 20. In 1 S. 2. 29 pjjo is corrupt in some way. Job 22. 12, Ps. 92. 9, height is scarcely ace. of place but concrete for adj. as predicate, thou art height = high ; cf. Ps. 10. 5, Is. 22. 16. In the frequent ''JSTIK, 1 S. 1. 22 ; 2. ii, 17, 18, Ex. 34. 23, &c, DX is prep. Rem. 2. The ace. whither? is also used freely; Gen. 31.4 called Rachel to the field, 31. 21 set his face to mount Gilead, Is. 10. 32 wage his fist toward the mount, Is. 40. 26, Ps. 55. 9, Job 5. 11, Ps. 134. 2, Lam. 5. 6. — The force of the n of direction has in many cases become enfeebled, e.g. flBB* = there ; so it is used with prep; of motion to Josh. 13.4, Ez. 8. 14, Ps. 9. 18; and even with prep, in and from, Josh. 15. 21, Jer. 27. 16. In later style it becomes a mere ornate ending, Ps. 116. 14, 15, 18; 124. 4; 125. 3, though perhaps for sake of rhythm earlier, Hos. 8. 7; 10. 13, Ps. 3- 3- Rem. 3. When questions how long? how far? &c. are answered in numbers, it is strictly the numeral that is in ace. The case of the thing enumerated will depend upon the numeral, being e.g. in gen. after numeral, O'Ob JTIB'J? ten times, Gen. 31. 7, or in apposition with it, or possibly in the ace. of specification after it, as 0\ y WVSlii forty days. See § 37, R. 6. Possibly under this ace. comes the use of "IBDO according to the number, Job 1. 5, Jer. 2. 28, Ex. 16. 16. Or it is ace. of limitation. Rem. 4. The verb kd to come, when = come upon in a hostile sense, has often ace. suff. of person in poetry and later style, Is. 28, 15, Job 15. 21 ; 20. 22, Ps. 35. 8; 36. 12. With noun Is. 41. 25 (though D^ has been suggested), Ez. 38. 11. In a favourable sense, Ps. 119. 41, 77. Similarly DDK to come upon, Job 3. 25. IOO HEBREW SYNTAX § 70, 71. § 70. Acc. of condition. — Any word describing the con- dition of the subject or object of an action during the action is put in the acc; and so words describing the manner of the action, (a) Gen. 15. 2 'H'njSJ "^n "OiN'l seeing Z go childless; Is. 20. 3 F)rri U^fXjf 'HIJf ^bn my servant has ■walked naked and barefoot; Prov. I. 12 D^n DV73? let us swallow them, up alive (1 K. 20. 18). Or even when no verb is used, 2 S. 12. 21 Tf T^il "Yll5?l for the sake of the child when alive (1 K. 14. 6 her feet «j .r^ (1 Chr. 12. 38). See § 140, R. 1. This usage of the noun is mostly poetical, prose rather employs a prep., nt?3? confidently, but ntJ3 Jud. 8. 11, &c, Lam. 1. 5 '?& into captivity, elsewhere ^SPa ; Ps. 119. 78, 86 -fyV falsely, in vain, usually "ipe6 1 S. 25. 21. Jer. 23. 28, Ps. 73. 13, 119. 75, Job 21. 34. Comp. Is. 30. 7 with 49. 4; 65. 23. Ps. 119. 75 ™»S with 2 K. 12. 16. Rem. 3. The ace. of restriction (§ 71) is usually an indef. noun, Gen. 3. 15; 37. 21, Ps. 3. 8. The phrase smite intlie bowels is usually U>ohn-?tt, 2 S. 2. 23 ; 4. 6 ; 20. 10. In 3. 27 {>N may have fallen out. The ace. 1 K. 15. 23 in his feet is IWB, 2 Chr. 16. 12, as is usual, cf. 2 S. 2. 18, Am. 2. 15 (so Arab, fi rijlaihi). The ace. of respect is little used after adjs. in Heb., the gen. consn. being employed; cf. § 24, R. 5. The place of ace. of resp. is often taken by a prep., 1 K. 22. 24 'rvprrpy, Mic. 4. 14. Rem. 4. The ace. of motive, so common in Arab., per- haps appears Is. 7. 25 "N?& flS"}' 'for (out of) fear of thorns. — Possibly also njn when = become, takes ace. after it, Hos. 8. 6 the calf of Sam. nNT D''33B> jAa// &?«w«e splinters. The frequent use of prep. / makes this consn. probable ; cf. Jer. 26. 18. So Eth. ; the Ar. use is wider. And so perhaps verbs of similar meaning, as "jQn to turn (also niph.), Jer. 2. 21, Lev. 13. 3, 4, 10. 3. The Ace. of the direct Object § 72. Many verbs govern the direct ace. in Kal ; and many of those intrans. in Kal govern ace. in the Caus. (hiph. &c). Of the latter kind are Nto come ; hiph. bring, &c. Before the direct ace, when also def, the particle JIN is THE ACCUSATIVE 103 common. It is greatly used before persons, and especially before pronouns, which it assumes as suff. in the case of the pers. pron. It is also used, however, before things. Gen. 2. 15 O-TNimN np"1 he took the man; 2. 24 VINTIM I'tT t t It v I- ■ - 'tv -:l- 'iftN'.n^'l shall leave his father and his mother ; 4. 1 1 fttlp; ^pnH ^lOTilM to receive thy brother's blood; 40. 4 JTIfiJ^ Qn& and he served them; 41. 10 'tflto \ljff) and he put me. Though the use of HN is common, it is very often wanting, and is much less employed in poetry and elevated con- densed style than in the broader prose writing. It is altogether wanting for ex. in the poems, Ex. 15., Deu. 32., Jud. 5., I S. 2., and other poetical passages. Rem. 1. The direct obj. when a pron. is often appended to the verb, as suff., esp. in earlier style, Gen. 4. 8 WfjnM and slew him ; in later style nx with suff. has greater currency. But nx must be used in these cases : (a) when for the sake of emphasis the obj. is to be placed before the verb ; Jud. 14. 3 v^JJ fiflX get her for me. Gen. 7. 1 ; 24. 14; 41. 13, 1 S. 8. 7; 21. 10, Hos. 2. 15. (b) When obj. is governed by inf. abs., which is too inflexible to receive suff. ; Gen. 41. 43 iHX flnjl and set himover, &c, 1 S. 2. 28, Jer. 9. 23, Ez. 36. 3. (c) When the verb, whether fin. or infin., has already a nearer suff. either of subj. or obj.; 2 S. IS- 2 5 ^^ ^y?) he will let me see it; Gen. 29. 20 ironxa FiriN because of his loving her. Gen. 19. 17; 38. 5, Deu. 7. 24, 1 S. 1. 23; 18. 3, 2 K. 8. 13 — the form Deu. 31. 7 is unusual, cf. 1. 38; 19. 3. Similarly when subj. of inf. cons, is a noun, Deu. 22. 2. In Ar. and Eth., as in Ital., the verb can have two suff., a nearer and more remote. Rem. 2. When several obj. under the same verb are coupled with and nx is usually repeated before each of them, esp. if they be distinct from one another, Gen. 1. 1. But usage fluctuates, the newer broader style multiplying nx. Gen. 8. 1; 10. 15-18; 12. 5, 20; 15. 19-21; 21. 10. Rem. 3. The use of nx with any ace. except that of direct obj. is rare, (a) Of time, how long-? Ex. 13. 7, Deu. 104 HEBREW SYNTAX § 72, 73. 9. 25; when? Lev. 25. 22. (b) Of place, whither? Nu. 4. 19, Jud. 19. 18, Ez. 21. 25. (c) Of restriction, Gen. 17. 11, 14, 25 (not 24), 1 K. 15. 23. Rem. 4. To the rule that T)tt is used only before def. obj. there are apparent exceptions. First, it is used with un- defined obj. (a) In poetry, which greatly dispenses with the art. ; e.g. in the case of words denoting- a class, Is. 41. 7 ; 50. 4, Pr. 13. 21. (b) In prose with words which are of the nature of pronoun, e.g. ^3 all, Deu. 2. 34, 2 S. 6. 1 ; "IHK another, Jer. 16. 13. So with *iriN one; and Num. in general have a certain definiteness of their own, Gen. 21. 30, Nu. 16. 15, 1 S. 9. 3, 2 S. 15. 16. Comp. the usage with man, woman, in the sense of any one, Ex. 21. 28, Nu. 21. 9, cf. Lev. 20. 14. In some other cases the phrase though put indefinitely has a particular reference, e.g. 2 S. 4. 11 a righteous man (Ishbosheth), 1 S. 26. 20 a flea (one who is, &c), i.e. David. In 2 S. 5. 24 a known kind of divine rustling is referred to, and art. of 1 Chr. 14. 15 might be accepted were it not the habit of Chron. to correct anomalies. 2 S. 18. 18 pillar might be cons, before rel., but text is uncertain (Sep.). 1 S. 24. 6 of the robe has prob. fallen out after skirt (Sep.). On 1 K. 12. 31 ; 16. 18, cf. § 22, R. 3. Secondly, ns seems used otherwise than before the obj. (a) Some of the cases are only apparent. For ex. a neut. verb used impersonally with prep, and subj. is felt to have the force of an act. vb. ; 2 S. 11. 25 -irnrrnK spj'jn JT^ = take not amiss the thing; so 1 S. 20. 13 (rd. 30") Neh. 9. 32 ns?nrr?3 rtK TOSp I3jn?J~?N regard not as little ; so even the noun DJJD with prep. f>, Josh. 22. 17. Similarly ? rpn = to have, Josh. 17. 11 ; cf. the Eth. usage with prep, ba, in, with, as baya is with me = I have, followed by ace. (Dill, p. 343). (b) In some cases a particle like behold, or a verb like thou hast, seest, may float before the writer's mind under whose regimen the noun falls, as Ez. 43. 7 ''NDS DipDTlK behold (Sep. thou seest) the place of my throne. But in many cases ns seems merely to give emphasis or demon- strative distinctness to the subj., particularly the emph. which an additional or new thing has, or which is natural in resuming things already spoken of. 1 S. 26. 16 where is THE ACCUSATIVE I05 the spear nPIBSTINI and the cruse? 1 S. 17. 34 there came the lion SVHTTIM and the bear too (the verbs are frequent.). Ex. of resumption, Jud. 20. 44, 2 S. 21. 22, 1 K. 2. 32, Ez. 14. 22, Zech. 8. 17. Other ex. Nu. 3. 26; 5. 10, 2 K..6. 5, Jer. 27. 8 ; 36. 22, Ez. 17. 21 ; 35. 10 ; 44. 3 (47. 17-19 ?), Neh. 9. 19, 34, Hag. 2. 17, Zech. 7. 7, Ecc. 4. 3, Dan. 9. 13. Cf. Ez. 43. 17 after prep. ; 1 S. 30. 23 text obscure (Sep.). § 73. Classes of verbs governing ace. of obj. — (a) As in other languages active verbs take ace. of obj., as JTM give, np7 take, Cto put, fr]T"1 pursue. But so also many verbs properly stative, as DIN /^w cto^j ; 28. 14 T^D ntpitf Mini, wearing a robe. Gen. 38. 19, Deu. 22. 5, 1 S. 28. 8, Is. 49. 18, Lev. 6. 4, Song 5. 3. Is. 59. 17, Ps. 109. 29. Y ox put ^Vpn is often used. (e) Verbs signifying to inhabit, dwell in, as 2tiT dwell in, pttJ *#., 113 afo/*// wzV/&, Is. 44. 13, Jer. 17. 6, Ps. 37. 3, Jud. 106 HEBREW SYNTAX § 73, 74. 5. 17, Is. 33. 14, 16, Ps. 94. 17. In poetry even ace. of person, Ps. 5. 5 ; 120. 5. — The consn. with prep, is more usual in prose. (/) Verbs of speaking, as "ten speak to, TX^J answer, hear, N"V call, (TO command, &c. But consn. with prep, is also t't t • common in most of these cases. Rem. 1. The verbs xia go in, NVJ come out, may also be construed with ace, Jer. 10. 20 ^KX? ^a my children have gone out from me, 2 K. 20. 4, Jos. 8. 19. So =|?n in the sense of go through, walk in (different from ace. of goal, whither?) Deu. 1. 19; 2. 7, Is. 50. 10 (darkness), Job 29. 3. Rem. 2. Under (c) may be classed such verbs as TW? to swarm with, Ex. 7. 28, pS A> multiply greatly, cf. Pr. 3. 10. ?73 to flow with, Jer. 9. 17, and similar verbs, as f )0E' fo over- flow with, Is. 10. 22 ; TV g down (flow) with, Jer. 13. 17, Lam. 3. 48, Ps. 119. 136; *|?n go (flow) with, Jo. 4. 18; *|IM /o d&v^, Jud. 5. 4, Jo. 4. 18, Song 4. 11; and others. Also i"DV /o c3 Nip to call with the name = invoke Gen. 4. 26, proclaim Ex. 34. 5, &c. Rem. 7. The direction of the action upon obj. is some- times indicated by prep. \s, particularly with ptcp. and inf. whose rection is weaker than that of fin. vb. Is. n. 9 D'MD DJp covering the sea, cf. different order, Hab. 2. 14. Am. 6. 3, Is. 14. 2. The caus. (hiph., pi.) not uncommonly reaches its obj. by b, Nu. 32. 15, 1 S. 23. 10 (2 S. 3. 30), Is. 29. 2, Am. 8. 9, Hos. 10. 1, cf. Jer. 40. 2, Ps. 69. 6 ; 73. 18, Job 11. 6. — In later style t> is used in all the senses of DX, e.g. (a) direct obj. 1 Chr. 16. 37; 25. 1 ; 29. 22, Ezr. 8. 16, 24. (b) resumptive (or appos.) 1 Chr. 5. 26, 2 Chr. 2. 12; 23. i, Ps. 136. 19, 20. (c) giving prominence to preposed subj. 4. Verbs with two Ace. of the Object § 74. Many verbs and forms of verbs govern two objects. There are several cases. First, when the two obj. (generally a pers. and a thing) have no relation to one another, and could not stand as subj. and pred. in a simple proposition, as, he showed him the place. Secondly, when the two obj. 108 HEBREW SYNTAX § 75, 76. are so related that in a simple sentence the one might be pred. of the other, as man is dust; he made man (of) dust. Thirdly, in a wider way, when the action is performed upon the main obj. through the medium of some other thing, this means as coming also under the action of the verb is con- sidered a remoter obj., as, they stoned him (with) stones. § 75. To the first class belong — (a) The causatives of verbs transitive in the Kal; Deu. 8. 3 |anT»M ^VpNJH he fed thee with manna ; Jud. 4. 19 D' , !?"tt3?D W^ptCM give me a little water to drink; 4. 22 CJiNnTlN "liON I will show • t v t v : - thee the man. So 5FHin to show, 1 S. 14. 12; !TTin, Pin to show Is. 28. 9; TWH make to inherit, Deu. 3. 29; 31. 7; ■TO7 to teach, Jud. 3. 2, Deu. 4. 5 ; JPOttJn cause to hear, 2 K. 7. 6, Song 2. 14. 2 K. 6. 6; 11. 4. An ex. of three ace. 2 K. 8. 13 showed me thee king, &c. (b) The caus. of verbs of plenty and want (§73 c). Gen. 42. 25 "ll DrpVlp-nN ^n")} they filled their sacks with corn; 26. 15. 1 K. 18. 13 D^l DnS dSs^INI I sup- ported them with £raza? #«k>/ p^p. "Op^fi N 1 ? appoint me not « ra/tfr of a people, 5. 6; 28. 15, Gen. 28. 18, Ex. 32. 4, 1 S. 28. 2, Mic. 4. 13 ; 6. 7. Deu. 1.15 ante ]ftW CttJiO and I made them heads, 1 K. 14. 7, Is. 3. 4. Gen. 15. 6 np"T!J 1? rQttJrTH he counted it righteousness to him. The same consn. occurs with adj. and ptcp., which then forms a predicate ace. (tertiary pred.). Gen. 7. 1 ^nWI ^HN p"H!? thee have I perceived righteous, Deu. 28. 25 P)S3 1 SpjTj IIO HEBREW SYNTAX §77,78. Je. shall make thee defeated, v. 7. Jer. 22. 30, Is. 53. 4; 26. 7. 2 K. 14. 26. § 77. More generally, when in reaching the main obj. the verb brings some other thing under its action, both are put in ace. of obj. Is. 5. 2 p"lto injftS;'! he planted it with choice vines, Jud. 9. 45 TVTft iTSHT^I he sowed it with salt. Mic. 7. 2 hunts ^w brother with « «y make, H33 build, Jru make, put, Jos 9. 27; 11. 6, 1 K. 14. 7. o

"l$N? into a woman ; 12. 2 I will make thee W a nation. With D'tf Is. 14. 23 ; 23. 13 ; 28. 17. So 2BTI to reckon Gen. 38. 15, 1 S. 1. 13, and usually ; to turn into Am. 6. 1 2, &c. And prep, for 2nd ace. is common in other cases, as to satisfy with 3 Is. 58. 11, Lam. 3. 15 ; to smite on the cheek py, Mic. 4. 14 ; to overlay with 3, Jer. 10. 4, 2 K. 19. 1. Rem. 6. Ecc. 7. 25 ?D3 J7BH njTP to know wickedness (to be) folly, is an ex. of verb of the mind. The consn. with *3 that is more usual. Ar. Gr. draws a distinction between verbs like to see, &c. as verbs of sense and as verbs of the mind. In both cases they take 2 ace., but the 2nd ace. differs. I saw him sleeping (verb of sense), sleeping is ace. of condition ; in the other case it is 2nd obj., perceived him (to be) sleeping = that he was sleeping, pred. ace. Rem. 7. Two ace. appear in the phrase i"y3 HE'V to make (to be) a. full end, utterly destroy, Neh. 9. 31 rbs Dn^JJ vb, Nah. 1. 8, Jer. 30. n, though riK seems prep. Jer. 5. 18. Strong consns. occur in poetry, Ps. 21. 13, put them the back D3E', 18. 41 make them the back *Tl$>, i.e. cause them to turn the back (in flight) to one. Ex. 23. 27. Rem. 8. Sentences beginning with '3, ne>K, "IB>°K MX that, how that, after tell, show, &c. form virtually a 2nd obj. § 146. And so words with 3 as, for, Gen. 42. 30 held us DvJnpa spies, Ps. 44. 12. — Unique perhaps is "Wl with 2 ace, Ez. 43. 10. 2 S. 15. 31 rd. 1T\b\; 2 K. 7. 9 fpa is ace. loci; Job 26. 4 'OTIX = by whose help (inspiration), as Gen. 4. i, according to parallel clause. 112 HEBREW SYNTAX §79-82. 5. Construction of the Passive § 79. When one obj. is governed by the act. this may become subj. of the pass., as in other languages. But frequently the pass, is used, as we say, impersonally (3 sing, mas.), and governs in the same way as the act. — the idea being that the pass, expresses an action of which the agent is unknown, or, not named, i K. 2. 21 ittJ^l^TlN JfT 1 let Abishag be given; Jer. 35. 14 l^ii"^ ^ITHM D,?n the commands of Jon. are performed; Gen. 40. 20 FPOTl D^ rtsTjQTlM the day Ph. was born (inf.). Ex. 21. 28 *?3W &h ''ntoS.TIN its flesh shall not be eaten. Gen. 4. 1 8 ; 27. 42, Ex. 10. 8, Deu. 12. 22, Jos. 9. 24, 2 S. 21. 6, 11, 1 K. 18. 13, 2 K. 5. 17, Hos. 10. 6, Am. 4. 2, Jer. 38. 4. § 80. When /to obj. are governed in the act. the nearer of the two usually becomes subj. of the pass., and the more remote is retained in accus. Is. 6. 4 ^iijj Mbs"] rP3,!TI and the house was filled with smoke; Ex. 1. 7, Is. 2. 7, 8; 38. 10. Gen. 31. 15 *h m©™ rrtnpa Nibn are we not counted for strangers by him? Cf. 15. 6, Is. 40. 17. Mic. 3. 12 tthn,n rnto ^2 Zion shall be ploughed into a field; Is. 6. 11; 24. 12. 1 K. 6. 7 the house TOl? mo^© pN was built of unhewn stones, Ezr. 5. 8, cf. Deu. 27. 6. — Gen. 17. 11, Ex. 13. 7; 25. 31, Lev. 6. 9, Jud. 18. 11, 1 K. 7. 14; 14. 6 (cf. Ex. 4. 28); 22. 10, Ps. 80. 11, Pr. 24. 31. So cog. ace. Jer. 14. 17. § 81. The connexion between the real personal agent and pass. vb. is usually expressed by prep. 7. Gen. 14. 19 ]V^ b**b TH| blessed by God; 31. 15 ib mttJTO we are counted by him; Is. 65. 1 ^|pi N 1 ? 1 ? "Tfttttt?} I was to be found by those who sought me not. Gen. 25. 21, Ex. 12. 16, Jos. 17. 16, 1 S. 15. 13, Jer. 8. 3, Neh. 6. 1. More rarely by p {from, of source), Hos. 7. 4 nsfcQ H^2 1*12]} an oven heated by a baker (text doubtful), Lev. 21. 7; cf. Jud. 14. 4, SUBORDINATION OF ONE VERB TO ANOTHER 113 Mai. i. 9, Job 4. 9, 1 Chr. 5. 22. Prep. |J2 is usual of cause or means, not personal. Gen. 9. 1 1 bllTpn ■'fijp rrpl be cut off by the waters of the flood, Ob. 9, Job 7. 14. Prep. 1 {through, of instrum.) is also used of persons, Gen. 9. 6 "nEDtt^ Iftl DTNJl through men shall his blood be shed. Rem. 1. More rarely the remoter obj. becomes subj. of pass., Lev. 13. 49 jribnTlX ntorn and it shall be shown to the priest, cf. Ex. 26. 30. So Ar. can say, 'u'tiya zeid«» dirhamwra, a dirhem was given Zeid, though usually, Zeid was given a dirhem (zeidww dirham««). Rem. 2. It is seldom that both ace. of act. are retained in pass., Nu. 14. 21, Ps. 72. 19. Such impers. use of pass, is easier when the act. governs one ace. and prep., Gen. 2. 23 i"lB?S trjj£ riNTp this shall be called -woman (ace), Is. 1. 26, Nu. 16. 29. Of course all ace. except that of the obj. must be retained in pass. Rem. 3. The exx. given above show that the use of ace. after pass, is classical, though the usage perhaps increased in later style. It is common with "p< to bear, Gen. 4. 18 (J); 21. 5 ; 46. 20, Nu. 26. 60. The consn. of this word in some cases is uncertain, Gen. 35. 26 (Sam. pi.), cf. 36. 5, 1 Chr. 2. 3, 9; 3. 1, 4. Other exx. Gen. 21. 8, Nu. 7. 10. Ex. 25. 28; 27. 7, Lev. 16. 27. Nu. 11. 22; 26. 55 (cf. v. 53); 32. 5. Gen. 17. 5; 35. 10. Gen. 17. 11, 14, 24, 25 (ace. of restriction). In some cases where noun with ns precedes the pass, the riK may merely give definiteness to the subj., Jud. 6. 28; and in other cases JIN may be resumptive, Jos. 7. 15. Rem. 4. The pass, be heard in sense of answered is niph. of my, Job 19. 7, Pr. 21. 13. Pass, of ya& does not seem used in this sense with personal subj. (cf. Del. N.T. Matt. 6. 7). SUBORDINATION OF ONE VERB TO ANOTHER § 82. There are two cases — (a) When the first verb expresses the mode of the action denoted by the second. In this case the second verb expresses the real action, and the first has to be rendered adverbially. Gen. 31. 27 riNSTti 8 114 HEBREW SYNTAX S 83. Ph? 1 ? thou hast fled away secretly ; 2K.2.IO VlNtiJ? H^pfJ thou hast asked a hard thing (lit. done hardly as to asking) ; Ex. 8. 24 lizhh Ip^rnJTtO ye shall not go far away ; Ps. 55. 8. Jer. 13. 18 12tt) I^SttJn sit down low. 1 S. 1. 12; 2. 3; 16. 17, 2 S. 19. 4, 1 K. 14. 9, 2 K. 21. 6, Is. 23. 16; 2 9- J S; 55- 7. J er - I- I2 J l6 - I2 i Hos. 9. 9, Am. 4. 4, Jon. 4. 2, Ezr. 10. 13, 2 Chr. 20. 35. The consn. is common with aittf, *lp; to do again, TTTp, V^H &c (6) When the two verbs express distinct ideas. Gen. 1 1. 8 "Vyft JTiilS ^"irrn and they gave up building the city; 1 S. 18. 2 llffiV S1T& ^7\ he did not allow him to return. 1 S. 17. 39 r ^OWS when thou art done destroying ; 1 S. 3. 2 nirD 1?nn IVJJI his eyes had begun to be dim. 1 S. 16. 16, Hos. 7. 4, Jer. 22. 30, Neh. 10. 29. So probably a noun, Gen. 9. 20, N. began (as) a husbandman (ace). The consn., and N., the husbandman, began and planted (was the first to plant, or, planted for the first time, Gen. 10. 8, 1 S. 14. 35 ; 22. 15), is rather unnatural, though cf. the appos. Gen. 37. 2. In this sense " begin " is usually followed by inf., but cf. Ezr. 3. 8. — " One of them " says — " Or (nae reflection on your lear), Ye may commence a shaver," &c. Rem. 3. The asyndetous consn. § 83 c is very common in Syr., Noeld. § 337. In Ar. the older and classical consn. was with /a, and, Wr. ii. § 140 ; de Lag. Uebersicht, p. 209 seq. , does not alter this fact. Rem. 4. Such words as ^?, i"Qp come, Dip arise, are used almost as interjections though construed regularly, Is. 22. 15 N3"^, 1 K. 1. 13 *«!» ^, v. 12, Gen. 19. 15, 1 S. 9. 5. The mas. nap is even used to a woman, Gen. 19. 32. Both verbs often merely confer liveliness on the real action, Hos. 5. 15; 6. 1, Gen. 19. 35, Ps. 88. n. Some fixed compound Il6 HEBREW SYNTAX §84-86. phrases express only a single idea, as "IB^M JJJM answered andsaid, "Wfl "inni conceived and bore — she bore, Gen. 21. 2. Text 1 S. 1. 20 is probably quite right. Comp. 1 Chr. 4. 17 where inni alone is used for the whole phrase. Rem. 5. In some instances the modifying- verb stands second, Jer. 4. 5 WO ^X*]|5 cry with full voice, cf. 12. 6 nbo isnj?. Is. 53. nj Jo. 2. 26. THE NOMEN ACTIONIS OR INFINITIVE I. Infinitive Absolute § 84. The infin. abs. as an abstract noun expresses the bare idea of the verbal action, apart from the modifications which subject-inflections or tense-forms lend to it. Used along with the inflected form it gives emphasis to the expression of the action, and, when used alone, graphically represents the action in its exercise, continuance, prevalence, and the like, sometimes almost with the force of an exclamation. Construction of inf. abs. — Expressing the bare notion of the verb the inf. abs. refuses to enter into close construction, receiving neither suffixes nor prep. It may, however — (a) Be the subj. in a nominal sent., esp. when the pred. is I'ltO good, or lltO iib (in poet. 2TC3 72) not good, but also otherwise. Pr. 28. 21 2'itt-fcO Qi3S"^|3n to be partial is not good. 1 S. 15. 23, Jer. 10. 5, Pr. 24. 23; 25. 27, Job 25. 2. In Job 6. 25 it is subj. to a verbal sent. {b) Or the obj. of a verb. Is. 1. 17 It^n VTC& learn t0 do well; 42. 24 'tfh'n 12N N7 they willed not to walk. Is. 7. 15; 57. 20, Pr. 15. 12, Job 9. 18; 13. 3. Rarely in gen. Is. 14. 23 "TClipn NtOSUpHjL with the besom of destruction. Pr. 1. 3; 21. 16. Cf. Rem. 1. (c) It may govern like its own finite verb, e.g. ace, Hos. 10. 4 rma, j-i>-|3 making covenants; Is. 22. 13 "^M, Jhpj T 'XT T 1N2 tthttJT killing oxen and slaying sheep. Is. 5. 5; 21. 5; THE NOMEN ACTI0N1S OR INFINITIVE 1 1/ 59. 4, 13, Pr. 25. 4, 5. Or prep., Is. 7. 15 Tinai jni DiMtt aitSS. to refuse *w*/ and choose ^waT. It is not followed by ^■«i. either of noun or pron. Rem. 1. 1 S. 1. 9 is the only ex. of inf. abs. with prep, (text dubious). The inf. abs. tends, however, to become a real noun (Job 25. 2, Lam, 3. 45), and may take prep, when so used, Is. 30. 15, and also when used adverbially, Neh. 5. 18. The inf. cons. hiph. is occasionally pointed like inf. abs., e.g. Deu. 32. 8, Jer. 44. 19, 25, which introduces some uncertainty (Deu. 26. 12, Neh. 10. 39 should perhaps be read pi.). Inf. abs. as obj. seems to occur first in Is. § 85. Use of inf. abs. — The inf. abs. is used first, along with the forms of its own verb, to add emphasis. In this case it stands chiefly before its verb, but also after it. Secondly, it is used adverbially to describe the action of a previous verb. And, thirdly, it is used instead of the finite or other inflected forms of the verb. § 86. Use along with its own verb. — («) When before its verb the kind of emphasis given by inf. abs. may be of various kinds, e.g. that of strong asseveration in promises or threats ; that of antithesis in adversative statements ; the emphasis natural in a supposition or concession ; and that of interrogation, particularly when the speaker is animated, and throws into the question an intonation of surprise, scorn, dislike, &c. Such shades cannot be reproduced in transla- tion. Occasionally such a word as indeed, surely (Gen. 2. \f), forsooth (37. 8), of course (43. 7), at all (Hos. 1. 6), &c, may bring out the sense, but oftenest the kind of emphasis is best expressed by an intonation of the voice. Ex. of asseveration: Gen. 2. 17 filftfi JTiD thou shalt (surely) die! 16. 10; 18. 10, 2 S. 5. 19. Frequently in injunctions; Ex. 21. 28 Tlttjn 7£D? 7ipD the ox shall be stoned, 23. 4, Deu. 12. 2, and often. Antithesis: Jud. 15. 13 TjrTOJ N? nprO TjD$J *>DN ^ Vh nay, we will bind Il8 HEBREW SYNTAX §86. thee, but we will not kill thee. 2 S. 24. 24, Deu. 7. 26; 13. 10; 21. 14, and often, I S. 6. 3, 1 K. n. 22, Am. 9. 8, Is. 28. 28, Jer. 32. 4; 34. 3. Supposition (very common): Ex. 21. 5 niyn "fl?^ "\n« DNT but if the slave should say. Jud. 11. 30, Ex. 22. 3, 11, 12, 16, 22, Jud. 14. 12, 1 S. 1. 11 ; 20. 6, 9, 21, 2 S. 18. 3. So concession: Gen. 31. 30 Iptl nfiSH WpSn rf, thou hast gone off because, &c. (but why steal my gods?). 1 S. 2. 30. In questions: Gen. 24. 5 IttJiTjl ^TIN l^N am I, then, to bring back? 37. 8, 10 ^pOil ^"hy TpO.fi shalt thou rule (forsooth) over us ? 43. 7 ^'"Pil ■"I?2N ,, ^ 5H2 were we (then) to know? Nu. 22. 30, 37, 38, Jud. 11. 25, 1 S. 2. 27, 2 K. 18. 33, Is. 50. 2, Jer. 26. 19, Ez. 14. 3; 18. 23, Zech. 7. 5. The peculiar emphasis of inf. abs. is well felt when a speaker gives a report regarding circumstances, or repeats (directly or indirectly) the words of another, or his own thoughts. Gen. 43. 3, 7, Jud. 9. 8; 15. 2, 1 S. 10. 16; 14. 28, 43 ; 20. 3, 6, 28 ; 23. 22, 2 S. 1. 6. Also when restrictive particles, "TySl, p"l, are used, Gen. 27. 30; 44. 28, Jud. 7. 19. (b) In negative sent. inf. abs. precedes the neg. Is. 30. 19 n|3iri"M7 i33. thou shalt not weep. Jud. 15. 13 above, Ex. 8. 24; 34. 7, Deu. 21. 14, Jud. 1. 28, 1 K. 3. 27, Am. 3. 5, Jer. 6. 15; 13. 12. With 7N, 1 K. 3.26, Mic. 1. 10. Exceptions occur mostly when a denial is given to previous words, Gen. 3. 4, Am. 9. 8, Ps. 49. 8. (c) When placed after its verb inf. abs. has often the same force as when before it. 2 K. 5. 11 N>fi "ON WV3N Ni!P I thought, He will (certainly) come out unto me. Nu. 23. 11, 2 S. 3. 24; 6. 20, Jer. 23. 39, Dan. 11. 10, 13. In this case inf. abs. is sometimes strengthened by OX Gen. 46. 4 TibyaZ THJM ^iUtfl / will also bring thee up; 31. 15, Nu. 16. 13. Inf. abs. always stands after imper. and ptcp., Nu. 11. 15 :hrr N2"0:r5n kill me rather (at once); Jer. 22. 10 THE NOMEN ACTIONIS OR INFINITIVE 119 "tjbfT? ^31 *D|L weep, indeed, for him that is gone away. Jud. 5. 23, Is. 6. 9. With ptcp. Jer. 23. 17, Is. 22. 17, Jud. 11. 25? But inf. abs. after its verb suggests an indefinitely pro- longed state of the action, and therefore expresses con- tinuance, prevalence, &c. Nu. 11. 32 JTilOttJ D!T? inipti^l and they went spreading them out (the quails). Jer. 6. 29. This use is clearer when another inf. abs. is added ; Jud. 14. 9 7iM") ^bn "517*1 he went on, eating as he went; Gen. 8. 7 11t!J1 Nl!^ N2J"! and it went (always) out and back. 1 S. 6. 12, 1 K. 20. 37, 2 K. 2. 11, Is. 19. 22. This use is akin to the adverbial use, cf. 2 K. 21. 13, where rd. probably TJSni TlftO, with larger accent at dish. This inf. before the verb, Is. 3. 16, cf. Ps. 126. 6. Rem. 1. Exx. like Gen. 43. 3, 7, Am. 9. 8 hardly prove that infin. abs. intensifies the action in the same sense as the pi. With 1 S. 20. 6 cf. v. 28. In Gen. 19. 9 the inf. after verb may emphasise the assumption to be judge on the part of one who was a stranger rather than the habit of judging. Jos. 24. 10. Rem. 2. The inf. abs. is oftenest of the same conjug. as the finite, whether before or after it, e.g. Kal Gen. 2. 16, niph. Ex. 22. 3, pi. Gen. 22. 17, pu. 40. 15, hiph. 3. 16, hoph. Ez. 16. 4, hith. Nu. 16. 13. But as the nomen actionis of the Kal expresses the abstract idea of the verb in general, it may be joined with any other conjug., e.g. with niph. Ex. 21. 20; pi. '2 S. 20. 18; pu. Gen. 37. 33; hiph. 1 S. 23. 22, Gen. 46. 4; hoph. Ex. 21. 12 (and always in this phrase shall be put to death) ; hithpo. Is. 24. 19. Other combinations are rarer, e.g. inf. hoph. with niph. 2 K. 3. 23, and with pu. Ez. 16. 4; inf. /«. with hiph. 1 S. 2. 16. Occasionally the inf. is from another verb, cognate and similar in sound, Is. 28. 28, Jer. 8. 13; 48. 9 (Zeph. 1. 2?). If text right in Jer. 42. 10, 3lt5>, the weak yod has fallen away, cf. Jud 19. 11, 2 S. 22. 41. Rem. 3. Instead of inf. abs. the abstract noun is some- 120 HEBREW SYNTAX §86-88. times used ; Is. 35. 2, Jer. 46. 5, Mic. 4. 9, Hab. 3. 9 (last two cognate stems), Job 27. 12, cf. Is. 29. 14, both inf. and noun. — Occasionally the form of inf. cons, is used, Nu. 23. 25, Ru. 2. 16, Jer. 50. 34, Pr. 23. 1 (all due to assonance with following verb), Ps. 50, 21, Neh. 1. 7. — 2 K. 3. 24:113:11 text amiss (but cf. § 96, R. 4), Ez. 11. 7 «/. SPX1K. Cf. however, Jos. 4. 3 ; 7. 7, Ez. 7. 14. Rem. 4. The verb "]bn with its inf. abs. is followed: (a) mostly by another inf. abs. as above in c, e.g. 2 S. 3. 16. nb31 1"bn "l^l, Jos. 6. 9, 2 K. 2. 11 ; but (b) also by ptcp. 2 S. 18. 25 3nj5l 1&1 -|^l, Jer. 41. 6, cf. 2 S. 16. 5 ; and (c) by a finite tense, 2 S. 16. 13 7;>pM "pn "p»l, Jos. 6. 13, 1 S. 19. 23, 2 S. 13. 19, cf. Is. 31. 5. But "jbn is often used in a metaphorical sense to express progress, continuance, &c. in an action or condition, which is expressed by ptcp. or adj. Gen. 26. 13 ^J31 "pri ~pf\ he grew ever greater. Jud. 4. 24, 1 S. 14. 19, 2 S. 5. 10, 1 Chr. 11. 9. In the same sense the ptcp. ^n is used in a predication. 2 S. 3. 1 ptrn 3J?h 1V11 /). waxed stronger and stronger. Ex. 19. 19 always waxed louder. 1 S. 2. 26 (17. 41 in a literal sense), 2 S. 15. 12, 2 Chr. 17. 12, Est. 9. 4, Pr. 4. 18. Used adverbially with inf. abs. of other verbs inf. abs. of *7^>n expresses the same idea of progress or endurance. Gen. 12. 9 SrtWl :|i?n J?D»1 he continued always journeying; 8. 3 always receded more and more, cf. v. 5. § 87. Adverbial use of inf. abs. — The inf. abs. is used to describe adverbially the manner, degree, &c, of the action expressed by a previous verb. This inf. is itself without and, but other inf. may be subjoined to it. Deu. 9. 21 J13W1 V It l^n Tints into and / beat it, grinding it small; 1 S. 3. 12 rhy\ 7nn vn : ri "luJM-Sa n» d^n i win fulfil a n that I have spoken,/>w« beginning to end. Gen. 21. 16; 30. 32, Nu. 6. 23, Jos. 3. 17; 6. 3, 11, 1 S. 17. 16, 2 S. 8. 2, Is. 57. 17, Mic. 6. 13, Zech. 7. 3, Jer. 3. 15; 12. 17; 22. 19. Cf. Gen. 30. 37 Pjtonn. Some inf. abs. (chiefly hiph.) have become THE NOMEN ACTION/S OR INFINITIVE 121 almost simple adverbs, as Ht^H well, very, VOFfrl much, very, PUyj f ar > Gen. 21. i6, Jos. 3. 16. Rem. 1. Here belongs the phrase of Jer., e.g. 7. 13 13"11 DSB'n . . . "i2nN1 I spoke, earnestly speaking, in which inf. of first verb is repeated; 11. 7; 25.4; 29. 19; 32. 33; 35. 14, 15. As adverbial inf. is without and, delete vav in 26. 5. — Instead of inf. of first verb there is finite form, Is. 57. 17, cf. 31. 5. In Hos. 10. 4 the inf. might exegese VP\n lia*!, giving examples of their idle or swelling words ; or they may express actions on the same line as their talk. § 88. Inf. abs. instead of inflected forms. — {a) When circumstances, personal relations, &c, have already been suggested by an inflected verbal form, it is often thought sufficient to subjoin further actions in the bare inf. form. This inf. may follow any inflected form, and, unlike the adverbial inf., is introduced by and. Jud. 7. 19 13?j?rW D'HSil yiD31 MYlErtl&a. they blew with the trumpets, and broke the pitchers; 1 K. 9. 25 "VtOplT) 'ttJ H^iTl and Solomon offered sacrifices (freq.) and burnt incense; Jer. 14. 5 n'fty'l Trh^ rntel nV?M"oa even the hind calves, and for- sakes (her young); Jer. 32.44 Dlfim 1QKL ^HS) 13J7 1 . n"nfc> Q"H57 lyJTl they shall buy fields, and subscribe deeds, and seal them, and take witnesses. The usage becomes more common in later style. Cf. Rem. 1. (b) The bare inf. abs. is used without a preceding inflected form when the verbal action or state in itself, apart from modifications of time, person, &c, is to be forcibly presented, e.g. in injunctions which are general ; in descriptions of pre- vailing conduct or condition of things ; but also in any case where the action in itself, apart from its conditions, is to be vividly expressed. Ex. 20. 8 r&ttJll OV 1 IMS TiDt remember the sabbath day!— Hos. 4. 2 ft&n Ijm rtm BJPD1 rh& false swearings and murder^ and theft y and adultery (they 122 HEBREW SYNTAX §88-90. practise)! — I K. 22. 30 rTOn?135 Nil &&nTyn disguise myself (will I), and go into the battle! 2 K. 4. 43 ")DN ni) "iniiTl TON '"> thus saith Je., Eat (shall ye) and leave over! (c) So in other cases where the action in itself, apart from its circumstances, is to be stated, the inf. abs. is sufficient. Is. 20. 2 t\tTf\ OTi^ "fan \2 foJW he did so, walking naked and barefoot, Is. 5. 5. Particularly when the action is first indicated by this. Jer. 9. 23 7?iirVj TMAX3. *T)te V"T V J 7?ton bv'niyip'n in this let one glory, in under- standing and in knowing me; Is. 58. 6 is not this the fast that I like, y&\ Tt^f\ WIS to loose the bonds of wicked- ness, &c. (three inf., cf. v. 7). Gen. 17. 10; Deu. 15. 2, Is. 37. 30, Zech. 14. 12. Rem. 1. Exx. of a. After perf., 1 S. 2. 27, 28, Hos. 10. 4, Jer. 19. 13; 22. 14, Hag. 1. 6, Zech. 3. 4; 7. 5, 1 Chr. 5. 20, 2 Chr. 28. 19, Ecc. 4. 1, 2; 9. 11, Est. 9. 6, 12, 16, cf. 17, Dan. 9. 5. — After impf., Jer. 32. 44; 36. 23. With is or, Lev. 25. 14, Nu. 30. 3, Deu. 14. 21. — After vav impf., Gen. 41. 43, Ex. 8. 11, Jer. 37. 21, 1 Chr. 16. 36, Neh. 8. 8. — Vav perf., Zech. 12. 10. — Inf., 1 S. 22. 13, Jer. 7. 18, cf. 32. 33. — Ptcp., Hab. 2. 15, Est. 8. 8. Rem. 2. Exx. of b. Inf. abs. as imper., Ex. 12. 48; 13. 3, Deu. 1. 16; 5. 12; 31. 26, Jos. 1. 13, 2 K. 3. 16, Zech. 6. 10. So w^ go! 2 S. 24. 12, 2 K. 5. 10, and often in Jer., 2. 2 ; 3. 12, &c. Is. 14. 31? (J1D3 inf. abs.). — Of prevailing conduct or condition, Is. 21. 5; 22. 13; 59. 4, 13, Jer. 7. 9; 8. 15; 14. 19, Ez. 21. 31, Hag. 1. 9.— Exx. ofc, Jer. 3. 1 (nitPl), Ez. 23. 30, 46, Job 40. 2, Pr. 17. 12; 25- 4. 5- Rem. 3. Like inf. cons. (§ 96), inf. abs. when used for finite may be continued by fin. form, Is. 42. 22 ; 58. 6. Rem. 4. A force akin to that of inf. abs. is sometimes obtained by repeating the verb in another form. Ps. 118. 11, Zeph. 2. 1, Hab. 1. 5, Is. 29. 9 (Hos. 4. 18). But in some of these places text is doubtful. Rem. 5. When inf. abs. is used for finite verb the subj. THE NOMEN ACTIONIS OR INFINITIVE 1 23 is occasionally expressed with it, Deu. 15. 2, Lev. 6. *], Nu - I S- 35> l s - 2 5- 26 > Is - 4 2 - 22 » Ps - J 7- 5» J ob 4°- 2 » Pr - 17. 12, Ecc. 4. 2, Est. 9. 1. Gen. 17. 12, 13 make it prob- able that "Ot"^3 v. 10 is subj. and not ace. after pass. Rem. 6. In § 86 (cf. § 67) and § 87 the inf. abs. is no doubt in ace. ; possibly also in § 88, cf. Kor. 2. 77. 2. The Infinitive Construct § 89. The inf. cons, has the qualities both of noun and verb, being used like a gerund, admitting prepp. and suffixes, and yet having the government of its verb. As nomen verbi it does not of itself express tense; the time is either indefinite or suggested by the context and circumstances. It is too little of a noun to take the art., § 19. § 90. Cases of inf. cons, itself. — («) The inf. cons, may be nom. as subject to a nominal sentence, especially when the pred. is " good " or " not good " (§ 84 a), but also otherwise, Gen. 2. 1 8 *ni7 D*7Nn TtPT\ liCJ \?h man's being alone is -: tt,t v: not good; Is. 7. 13 D^IMN fYlM?!! OS?? t33ft?Pl is wearying men too little for you? Gen. 29. 19; 30. 15, Ex. 14. 12, Jud. 9. 2; 18. 19, 1 S. 15. 22; 23. 20; 29. 6, 2 S. 18. 11, Is. 10. 7, Mic. 3. 1, Ps. 118. 9, Pr. 10. 23; 13. 19; 16. 6, 12, 16, and often. (6) It may be in gen. by a noun or prep. Gen. 2. 4 D^l m!"P JTiiTS? m the day of Jehovah's making; 14. 17 ^HN rriSFlD , il ! )tt) after his returning from smiting. Gen. 2.17; 21. 5; 24. 30; 29. 7, Is. 7. 17, Hos. 2. 5, 17. Also, though rarely, after an adj. or ptcp. in cons., Is. 56. 10, Jer. 13. 23, Ps. 127. 2, Pr. 30. 29. In a few instances 73 all precedes inf. cons., Gen. 30. 41, 1 K. 8. 52, Ps. 132. 1, 1 Chr. 23. 31. (c) It may be in ace. as obj. to an active verb. 1 K. 3. 7 Nil J1N2J 2Hfc$ is? I know not how to go out or come in. Gen. 8. io, Ex. 2. 3, Deu. 2. 25, 2 K. 19. 27, Is. 1. 14; 11. 9, Jer. 15. 15, Am. 3. 10, Ps. 101. 3. The ace. sign ]~IN occurs before inf. 2 K. 19. 27 (Is. 37. 28). The inf. cons, with 124 HEBREW SYNTAX §90,91. prep. 7, which expresses the direction of the action of governing verb, has in usage greatly superseded the simple inf. when obj.\ Gen. 18. 29 -&h Tty ^p'^, ii. 8; 13. 16. This inf. with 7 has become almost a simple verbal form, and appears often as subj. in the nominal sent., 1 S. 15. 22, 2 S. 18. ii, Is. 10. 7 with 28. 19, Mic. 3. 1, Ps. 118. 8, Pr. 21.9 with 25. 24. Cf. Hab. 2. 14. Rem. 1. It is usually the whole clause rather than the mere inf. that is grammatical subj. ; comp. the forcible phrase 2 S. 14. 32. The inf. cons, is too little nominal to be subj. to a verb : in 2 S. 22. 36 rd. with Ps. 18. 36 "jnuyi ; 1 K. 16. 31 ?^l! is ptcp., cf. 1 S. 18. 23. In 2 S. 24. 13 1p3 is loosely appended to preceding words. Is. 37. 29 IMKB* if text right may be an ex., or adj. used substantively (vocalisation varies). Ps. 17. 3 , n'!3T if inf. is scarcely subj. to following verb. On the other hand the fern. inf. tends to be a real noun, and may be subj. to a verb, Pr. 10. 12. — It is rare that the mas. form of inf. is construed as fern, (neut.), 1 S. 18. 23, Jer. 2. 17 with 2. 19. Rem. 2. Deu. 25. 2 nten |3 -worthy of a beating (adjudged the bastinado) is peculiar, cf. 1 S. 20. 31. § 91. Government by inf. cons. — (a) The agent or subj., which usually immediately follows inf., is in the gen. Gen. 2.4 mrP TttVy. Jehovah's making; 19. 16 Y*7y '^ rhftTjS. in Jehovah's pitying him. Gen. 16. 16; 24. 11, Ex. 17. i, Deu. 1. 27, 1 K. 10. 9. So with suff., Gen. 3. 19 ^W ~ty ifOINiTTN until thy returning to the ground, 3. 5 ; 39. 1 8. When separated from inf. by intervening words the subj., with a looser construction, must be supposed to be in the nom. ; Is. 20. 1 ]*l31.D Info HTUJa. when Sargon sent him. Gen. 4. 15, Nu. 24. 23, Deu. 4. 42, Jos. 14. u, Jud. 9. 2, 1 S. 16. 16, 2 S. 18. 29, Is. 5. 24, Jer. 21. i, Ez. 17. io, Ps. Si. 2; 56. 1 ; 76. 10; 142. 4, Pr. 1. 27; 25. 8, Job 34. 22. (b) The in£ cons, puts its obj. in the same case as the verb does from which it is derived, i.e. ace. or gen. through THE NOMEN ACTIONIS OR INFINITIVE 125 a prep, i S. 19. 1 TlTfiM TWlth to kill David; Deu. 10. 15 onto mn«^ to love them; ku. 22. u ta orhrb to fight with him. Gen. 2. 4, Deu. 2. 7, 1 K. 12. 15 ; 15. 4, Gen. 19. 16, Deu. 30. 20, Is. 7. 1. The inf. may take two ace. like its verb, Gen. 41. 39, Deu. 26. 19, Jos. 10. 20. (c) When subj. and obj. are both expressed the usual order is: inf., subj., obj. Gen. 41. 39 ^Jfito N ^^flTl ^Djtf after God's showing- thee; Hos. 3. 1 V 1 "OiTlN '^ J"QDN3 as Je. loveth the children of Israel; and with pron. as subj. Gen. 39. 18 ''yip ^"'"iriS when I lifted up my voice. Gen. 11. ii, 13; 13. 10; 24. 30; 39. 19, 1 K. 11. 24; 13. 23, 31, Is. 10. 15, Am. 1. 3, 6, 9, 11, 13, &c. Rem. 1. The subj., especially when a pron., is often omitted : (a) when clear from the context, Gen. 24. 30 HKIS •when he saw; 19. 29, Deu. 4. 21, 1 K. 20. 12, Ez. 8. 6. (0) When general and indeterminate, Gen. 33. 10 nk"13 as one sees; Jud. 14. 6, 1 S. 2. 13 ; 18. 19, 2 S. 3. 34; 7. 29, Is. 7. 22; 10. 14. — Gen. 25. 26, Ex. 27. 7; 30. 12, Nu. 9. 15 ; 10. 7, Zeph. 2. 2, Zech. 13. 9, Ps. 42. 4 with v. 11, Job 13. 9; 20. 4. The 06/. is also often omitted, when a pron., in the same circumstances. § 73, R. 5. Rem. 2. The subj. is probably nom. in some cases where it is not separated from inf. (a above), e.g. when $> of inf. has pretonic qameg ; 2 S. 19. 20 ty?Bfl DW? with Gen. 16. 3 D-13K rne6, 1 K. 6. 1, Job 37. 7. The inf. hiph. of l'j) verbs is never shortened except with suff. (Gen. 39. 18 inc above), e.g. Is. 10. 15 03B* (|»jn|, 14. 3 '' rwn era, 2 S. 17. 14, Ps. 46. 3. Rem. 3. The obj. of inf. when a noun is probably ace. and not gen. objecti. When inf. has suff. this is clear, Gen. 39. 18, Deu. 9. 28. Also the particle riK is frequently ex- pressed, Gen. 14. 17; 25. 26, Deu. 10. 12, 15; n. 22, 1 S. 18. 19; 25. 2, Zech. 13. 9. Cases in which neither of these marks is present are probably to be decided on the same analogy, e.g. Jud. 14. 6 H5n JfBBO as one rends a kid, Is. 10. 14 as one gathers eggs, 17. 5, I K. 18. 28, Ps. 66. 10 ; 126 HEBREW SYNTAX §92-05. 101. 3, Pr. 21. 3. The fem. inf., while it may take ace, is occasionally construed with gen. obj., Ps. 73. 28 DTIPN J"l3"}i? A> flfazKi near to God, Mic. 6. 8, so Aram. Ezr. 4. 22. So the common *rit*"ljpp to meet me, 1T1 ntOj?p / H- 8 ; l8 - z » 1 S. 2. 25; 19. 11, 1 K. 20. 35, 2 K. 9. 35, Ps. 106. 23, 26, 27. When prep, h precedes inf. the suff. is mostly ace. ; also often when p precedes, and even when other prepp. are prefixed. — Nu. 22. 13 'fin? = 'JWl?, and Jer. 27. 8 'BFi seems used as trans., though cf. Sep. § 92. Usage of inf. cons. — The inf. cons, with prepp. has all the meanings of the finite forms with conjunctions. Gen. 4. 8 rniZEl Oni' 1 !^ when they were in the field ; 3. 19 ^flltp *TJ7 until thou return, cf. Hos. 10. 12 Nfai 1$ until he come, Gen. 39. 16, 2 S. 10. 5. Gen. 39. 18 'typ ^"\ng when I lifted up, cf. 37. 23 NSL "1tt?b$j3 when he came. The prepp. become conjunctions, taking finite forms, by combination with the rel. ItiJN, which, however, is often omitted, as Hos. 10. 12 above, 5. 15. Gen. 18. 12 with Jud. 11. 36, 2 S. 19. 31; Am. 1. 1 1 with 2 S. 3. 30; 2 S. 3. 1 1 with Is. 43. 4. — Gen. 1 3. 10; 34. 7; 35. 1, 1 S. 9. 15, 2 S. 12. 6, Ex. 19. 18. Cf. § 145. § 93. The prep, b, which properly expresses the direction THE NOMEN ACTIONIS OR INFINITIVE. \2J of the action of previous verb, is used with inf. cons, in a weaker sense (like gerund in do) to explain the circum- stances or nature of a preceding action. This gerundial (adverbial) use is very common, i S. 14. 33 D'WtGh D3?!l O'irrbjf 73NI7 the people are sinning in eating with the blood; 1 K. 5. 23 ^| Drt7 T\th TSplJTlM ntojtfl thou wilt do my desire in giving (so as to give) bread for my house. Gen. 18. 25; 19. 19; 29. 26; 34. 7; 43. 6, 1 S. 12. J 7> ! J OD 3°- 6, 2 S. 4. 10. Or in the sense of can be, Jud. 1. 19, 2 S. 14. 19 (tiJN = tt^). — The consn. in Gen. 15. 12, Jos. 2. 5 appears to be as i'S. 7. 10, 2 S. 2. 24, 1 K. 20. 40, 2 K. 2. II, and often, the vb. was being understood. § 95. The negative inf. is formed — (a) Usually by particle ■'fl'pa with 7, as Gen. 3. 11 13$?p _ 75« ^^b ^I?Vt I commanded thee not to eat of it, Deu. 4. 21, 1 K. 11. 10. This particle negatives inf. in its various uses, e.g. when it expresses purpose, Gen. 4. 15; 38. 9, and frequently in its 128 HEBREW SYNTAX §96. gerundial or explicative sense, Gen. 19. 21, Ex. 8. 25, Deu. 3. 3 ; 8. 1 1 ; 17. 12, Jos. 5. 6, Jud. 2. 23 ; 8. 1, Jer. 16. 12 ; 17. 23, 24, 27. (b) The inf. as periphrastic fut. or gerundive (§ 94) is negatived by b ikb or b p«. Am. 6. 10 '1 Dtfo "V?!!^? N7 the name of Je. must not be mentioned; Jud. 1. 19 (could not dispossess), 1 Chr. 5. 1. Est. 4. 2 -"iJ^rr^N MllS fN ■»? the gate must not be gone to. Ezr. 9. 15, 2 Chr. 5. 11 ; 20. 6, 17; 22. 9, Est. 8. 8, Ps. 40. 6, Ecc. 3. 14. There seems no difference in sense between 7 VO and 7 ^N, though the latter is common in the later style; cf. 1 Chr. 15. 2 with 23. 26. Jer. 4. 1 1 does not belong here. § g6. In the progress of the discourse, when new clauses are added with and, the inf. is very generally changed into the finite construction. Gen. 39. 18 N^pW "typ ^ID^ lifted up my voice and cried; 2 K. 18. 32 ^rirTj^Sl ">&«& 1$ OpHN till I come and take you. Gen. 27. 45, Jud. 6. 18, 1 S. 24. 12, Is. 5. 24; 10. 2; 13. 9; 30. 12, 26; 45. 1, Am. 1. 9, n, Ps. 104. 14, 15. This resolution is necessary with a neg. clause, Am. 1. 9. Cf. Rem. 2. Rem. 1. The pleonastic neg. ? 7???? (§ 95) occurs 2 K. 23. 10 (cf. f JVC? Ez. 21. 20), and "wai? Nu. 14. 16 because Je. was not able. — The inf. is sometimes negatived by prep. JD away from, as Is. 5. 6 "VippilD command not to rain. So after to swear Is. 54. 9, cf. Deu. 4. 21 , and to beware Gen. 31. 29 (cf. 7;. 24), 2 K. 6. 9. Occasionally a periphrasis of "ibK? saying and direct speech is employed, Gen. 3. 1 1 with v. 17, Am. 2. 12. Rem. 2. The finite tense consecutive to the inf. (§ 96) will show the nuances of time, relation, &c, in which the inf. was used. Thus Gen. 39. 18, 1 S. 24. 12, the inf. re- ferred to a past act ; 2 K. 18. 32, Jud. 6. 18 to a future one, and Am. 1. 1 1 to a frequentative action. Loose constructions occasionally arise in the process of resolution, e.g. Hos. 9. 7 nail *|tfj> 3T by i.e. nm "IBta-Sijn and because . . . is great; THE NOMEN ACTIONIS OR INFINITIVE. 1 29 so Jer. 30. 14, 15. So perhaps 1 S. 4. 19 riDl . . . ni??n"?K, i.e. rip "lEW (?V)"3 to be weary, Is. 1. 14, Jer. 15. 6. 9 13° HEBREW SYNTAX §97,98. THE NOMEN AGBNTIS OR PARTICIPLE § gy. The ptcp. or nomen agentis partakes of the nature both of the noun (adj.) and the verb. It presents the person or subj. in the continuous exercise or exhibition of the action or condition denoted by the verb. The pass. ptcp. describes the subj. as having the action continuously exercised upon him, or at least differs from the adj. in presenting the state of the subj. as the result of an action. Rem. i. The ptcp. carries the notion of action, opera- tion, like the verb, while the quality expressed by the adj. inheres in the subj.- as a mere motionless characteristic. On the other hand the ptcp. differs from the impf. in that the continuousness of the impf. is not unbroken, but mere repetition of the action. The ptcp. is a line, the impf. a succession of points. It is but natural, however, that act. ptcps. expressing conditions or operations which are habitual should come to be used as nouns, as ans friend, 3"K enemy, t328> judge, 1DB* watchman, ntn seer, &c, and that pass, ptcps. should in usage become adjectives. The ptcp. niph. in particular has the sense of the Lat. gerundive and adj. in bilis, as K*ii3 to be feared, terrible, S'-'ITJ cestimandus, "ion? desirable, 3J?rU detestable, "1333 honourable. Occasionally ptcp. Pu., ??TO laudandus, Ps. 96. 4. Possibly Kal, Ps. 137. 8 (some point il 1^" 1 ?')' J er - 4- 3°' ' s - 2 3- I2 > are rea ^ or imagined pasts. Seels. 2. 22, Ps. 18. 4; 19. 11; 22. 32; 76. 8; 102. 19, Job 15. 16. In like manner the difference between ptcp. and impf. is often scarcely discernible in usage. Gen. 2. 10, Ex. 13. 15, Lev. 11. 47, Nu. 24. 4, 16. Cf. Jud. 4. 22 with 2 K. 6. 19. § 98. Construction of ptcp. — The ptcp. is construed — (a) Verbally, taking the government of its verb, ace. ox prep. Gen. 32. 12 ink "ObN NT I fear him; 25. 28 mrtN Hpin lp5^_-fiN Reb. loved Jacob. Gen. 27. 8; 37. 7, 16; 40. 8, 17; 41. 9; 42. 29, 1 S. 11. 3, 2 S. 14. 18, 1 K. 18. 3, Am. 5. 8,9, i8„ THE NOMEN AGENTIS OR PARTICIPLE 13I With prep. Gen. 16. 13; 26. 11, I S. 17. 19; 23. I, 2 S. 23. 3, Ps. 89. 10. The ptcp. may take any ace. taken by its verb; Deu. 6. 1 1 m0"73 Q"W"?T? full of every good, Am. 2.13; cogn. ace. 1 K. 1. 40; or two ace, 2 S. 1. 24 ^ttj DpttJ^Van who clothed you with crimson. Zeph. 1. 9. (b) Or, nominally, being in cons, with following gen. Gen. 3. 5 J?*i1 2*113 "'JTl'i knowing good and evil; Hos. 2. 7 "WD^ ^PD7 "Oro who give my bread and water. This consn. is very common : the act. ptcp. of verbs governing a direct obj. take this obj. in gen. ; and the pass. ptcp. of such verbs take the subj. of the verbs in the gen. Gen. 22. 12 MiyT' rrfiN 'M NTf? thoufearest God; Hos. 3. 1 JT| milN il#N a woman loved by a paramour. Gen. 19. 14, 25, Ex. 15. 14; 23. 31, Jud. 1. 19; 5. 6, 2 S. 4. 6; 6. 13, 1 K. 2. 7; 12. 21, Is. 5. 18, Hos. 6. 8. So ptcp. of other act. conjugations, Is. 5. 8; 19. 8, 9, 10; 28. 6; 29. 21, Jer. 23. 30, 32, Hos. 5. 10; 11. 4, Ps. 19. 8, 9; cf. 136. 4-7. Pass, ptcp., Gen. 24. 31 blessed by Je., 2 S. 5. 8 hated by, Is. 53. 4, Job 14. 1. Frequently the cause or instrument takes the place of the subj., Is. 1. 7 tt)N JTiD^to burnt with fire. Gen. 20. 3; 41. 6, Deu. 32. 24, Is. 14. 19; 22. 2; 28. 1 stricken down with wine, Jer. 18. 21, Hos. 4. 17. (c) In like manner suff. to ptcp. may be ace. or gen. Deu. 8. 16 VO ^ppNSil who fed thee with manna. Deu. 8. 5 (« demons.); 13. 6, 11 ; 20. 1, Is. 9. 12; 10.20; 47. 10; 63. 11, Jer. 9. 14 (cf. 23. 15), Ps. 18. 33; 81. 11, Job 31. 15; 40. 19. Often in gen. ; Gen. 27. 29 ^p5!PP they who bless thee (thy blessers), 4. 14, Ex. 20. 5, 6, 1 S. 2. 30, Is. 50. 8, Ps. 7. 5 ; 55. 13, Job 7. 8. Rem. 1. The mixed consn., gen. and ace. (for 2 ace), Am. 4. 13 is curious. — The verbs K3 to go into and nv to come out of, may be consd. with ace. (Gen. 44. 4, Deu. 14. 22, 2 K. 20. 4, Lam. 1. 10, Ps. 100. 4), and so their ptcp. with. gen. Gen. 9. 10 ; 23. 10, 18 ; 34. 24 ; 46. 26, 132 HEBREW SYNTAX $90,100. Ex. i. s, Jud. 8. 30. Similarly other kinds of ace, as that of direction, Is. 38. 18 "ta"" v Ty gone down to the pit, 1 Chr. I2> 33> 36> or of respect, Is. 1 30 fading in its leaf. In poetry this brief forcible consn. of gen. represents prose consn. with prep.; Ps. 88. 6 lying in the grave, though cf. 57. 5 ; Mic. 2. 8, Is. 22. 2. Particulary with suff., Ps. 18. 40 V?j5 those rising up against me, cf. Ps. 3. 2. Deu. 33. n, Is. 22. 3, Ps. 53. 6 ; 73. 27 ; 74. 23 ; 102. 9, Pr. 2. 19. Is. 29. 7 who war against her and her stronghold 'is so condensed as to be suspicious. The pass. ptcp. also may retain the ace. of act. verb, as 1 S. 2. 18 "tfB« "lVin girl with an ephod, Jud. 18. 11, Ez. 9. 2, 3, Neh. 4. 12; or take the gen., Is. 3. 3; 51. 21, Joel 1. 8, Ez. 9. 11. Particularly when the gen. explains the extent of application of ptcp. (§ 24 c/). Is. 3. 3. D^S N1B0 he whose face is lifted up. Ps. 32. 1 HSBn ^D3 he whose sin is covered. 2 S. 13. 31, Is. 33. 24, Pr. 14. 2. In 2 S. 15. 32 fclMS yvij ' 3 is not ace. of respect, as to his garment, but subj. to rent, though rent at the same time is ace. of con- dition to Hushai. On the other hand Jud. 1. 7 is rather an ordinary circ. cl., cut off being pred. to thumbs, although elsewhere this word is fern. Ex. 12. 11, Jer. 30. 6. § 99. The ptcp. becomes virtually a noun, as Is. 19. 20 yipiO one who saves, a saviour, and may be subj. or obj. of a sentence. When in apposition with a noun it is used as an adj., Deu. 4. 24 i"D?^ t2JM a devouring fire, 4." 34 an out- stretched arm, Gen. 22. 13, Is. 18. 2, 5, Jud. 1. 24 tt}iN WYH N2J'i ,, they saw a man coming out. Am. 5. 3, Is. 2. 13 ; 10. 22. With the art. the ptcp. may like the adj. designate a class. Am. 5. 13, Is. 14. 8; 28. 16, Mic. 4. 6; or have the sense of he who . . ., whoever, Gen. 26. 1 1 TtVlJ ti^NSL y3!n whoever touches, 2 S. 14. 10; and so with gen., Gen. 9. 6, Ex. 21. 12, 15, 16. When in appos. with a preceding def. subj. the ptcp. with art. has the meaning very much of a relative clause. Gen. 12. 7 V7M PTM-]3n ^ Je. who had appeared to him; 1 S. THE NOMBN AGENTIS OR PARTICIPLE 1 33 1. 26 TOB3PT H^Nil "^N I am the woman who stood, cf. Jud. V v • - x • It • -: ' J 16. 24. This usage is very common: Gen. 13. 5; 27. 33; 35. 3; 43. 12, 18; 48. 15, 16, Ex. 11. s, Jud. 8. 34, 1 S. 4. 8, 2 S. 1. 24, 2 K. 22. 18, Is. 8. 6, 17, 18; 9. 1, Am. 4. 1 ; 5. 3, Mic. 3. 2, 3, 5. With pass, ptcp., Nu. 21. 8, Jud. 6. 28 the altar that had been built, 20. 4 the woman who was murdered, 1 K. 18. 30, Ps. 79. 10. — Ps. 19. 11 resumes v. 10 (they) which are more desirable. Ps. 18. 33 ; 49. 7. Rem. 1 . Of course the ptcp. with art. is not to be used as an ordinary rel. clause after an indef. noun, only after def. words as pron., proper name, or other defined word. In later style exceptions occur, Jer. 27. 3 ; 46. 16, Ez. 2. 3 ; 14. 22, Ps. 119. 21, Dan. 9. 26, though in most of these cases the preceding word is really def. though formally undetermined. In other cases the preceding subj. receives a certain definite- ness from being connected with all, Gen. 1. 21, 28, or a numeral, Jud. 16. 27, cf. 1 S. 25. 10, or from standing in a comparison, Pr. 26. 18 (Ps. 62. 4 rd. perhaps 1 ^T^Oj or from being described by an adj., Is. 65. 2, cf. v. 3. Rem. 2. When another ptcp. follows one with art. it is often without art., as predicate, Is. 5. 20, Am. 6. 4, Job 5. 10. But in vigorous speech the clauses are made parallel and the art. used, Is. 40. 22, 23, Mic. 3. 5. Occasionally the rel. pron. takes the place of the art. as more distinct, Deu. 1. 4, Jer. 38. 16, Ez. 9. 2, Ps. 115. 8. Both are used 1 K. 12. 8; 21. 11. Rem. 3. When the ptcp. as direct pred. receives the art. it becomes coextensive with the subj. Gen. 2. 11 it is that which goeth round. 45. 12 my mouth is that which speaketh. Deu. 3. 2 1 thine eyes were they which saw. Gen. 42. 6, Deu. 3. 22, 1 S. 4. 16, Is. 14. 27. § 100. (a) The ptcp. as pred., unlike the finite verb, does not contain the subj., which must be expressed. 1 S. 19. 11 riOlO ftflN irtO to-morrow thou shalt be slain ; Gen. 38. 25 T T - T T , J JIN^O Nltl she was brought forth ; 1 S. 9. 1 1 D^JT nan they were going up. The pron., however, is often omitted if 134 HEBREW SYNTAX § 100. the subj. has just been mentioned, particularly after 51271 Gen. 24. 30 -raj> miT) t^Nil" 1 ?** &1*1 he came to the man, and, behold, he was standing. Gen. 37. 15 ; 38. 24, 41. 1, 1 S. 30. 3, 16, Am. 7. 1, Is. 29. 8. With DJ Gen. 32. 7. Occasionally the pron. is omitted anomalously, Jos. 8. 6, Ps. 22. 29 (he is ruler), Neh. 9. 3, 5. In 1 S. 6. 3 D£lN has probably dropped out. On ptcp. with general subj. § 108 c. (b) Owing to the emphasis thrown by the idea and usage of ptcp. on the subj. the latter usually precedes. Gen. 2. 10 N^ "IPT21 and a river went forth; 24. 21 rh ilNttt&O tf^m and the man gazed at her, 24. 1 3, 37 (see above in a). This order is usual with Hin and in rel. clauses, 18. 17; 24. 37; 28. 20 ; 31. 43. On the other hand, if emphasis fall on ptcp., and in clauses beginning with ^S for, that, DN if, which give prominence to the pred., the ptcp. precedes the subj. Gen. 30. 1 "O^N Jin?? rW DN1 and if not T die; 3. 5 '« p? 13 for God knoweth, 15. 14; 19. 13; 25. 30; 29. 9; 32. 12; 41. 32. With interrog., Gen. 4. 9 ; 18. 17, Nu. 1 1. 29. After 1JN Jud. 3-24- (c) The ptcp. does not indicate time, its colour in this respect being taken from the connection in which it stands. The pass. ptcp. refers chiefly to the past, though not exclusively. The act. ptcp. is mainly descriptive of some- thing present, i.e. either actually present to the speaker, or present to him in idea, as the fut. instans ; or, as in circums. clauses, present to the main action spoken of, though this may be in the past. Gen. 4. 10 Q^pVIJ ^plTM ^ly^ thy brother's blood crieth. Gen. 19. 13, 14 Ijn^St QWHttJQ "<3 for we are destroying (going to des.). 1 S. I. 12 she prayed long fTErnN *TOU5 ''T'Sn Eli watching her mouth. See exx. in Rem. 1. (d) Owing to its nominal character the ptcp. is negatived by rfcj. The place of the neg. varies. Gen. 41. 8 IfVlQ pN THE NOMEN AGENTIS OR PARTICIPLE 1 35 Onto there was none interpreting them ; cf. different order, 40. 8; 41. 15. Ex. 5. 16 t£l2 PN D£l straw is not given; 1 K. 6. 18 n«")p |1« pM no stone was seen. The pN often takes suff. of subj., Gen. 43. 5 nVttJft ^N DN if thou dost not let go, Ex. 5. 10. — Gen. 20. 7; 39. 23; 41. 24, Ex. 3. 2, Deu. 4. 22 ; 22. 27, Jos. 6. I, Jud. 3. 25, 1 S. 3. 1 ; 22. 8 ; 26. 12, 1 K. 6. 18, Hos. 5. 14, Am. 5. 2, 6, Is. 5. 27 ; 17. 2 ; 22. 22, Jer. 9. 21. See Rem. 3. (e) When additional clauses are joined by and to a participial consn. the, finite tense is usually employed, though not always. Gen. 35. 3 v-jay Vj?1 VlN H2>ft ^NtS the God w&? answered me, and was with me; 27. 33 "P2J Tin Nl^ who hunted venison, and brought it. In animated speech without and, Is. 5. 8 rntol iTTto iTSl JTl ^aM ^Q" 1 "^ who join house to house, lay field to field; cf. Ps. 147. 14-16. — Gen. 7. 4; 17. 19; 48. 4, Deu. 4. 22, 1 S. 2. 6, 8, 31 ; 2 S. 20. 12, Is. 5. 23; 14. 17; 29. 21; 30. 2; 31. 1 ; 44. 25, 26; 48. 1, Am. 5. 7-12, Hos. 2. 16, Jer. 13. 10, Ps. 18. 33. This change to the finite is necessary when the additional clause is neg. See Rem. 4. (/) As the ptcp. presents the subj. as in the continuous exercise of the action, it is greatly employed in describing scenes of a striking kind and in circumstantial clauses (§ 138 £). Much of the picturesqueness of prose historical writing is due to it. So it is used with such particles as n2rT behold, Tiy still, while. 1 K. 22. 10 the kings Cltt^ were sitting, each on his throne, clothed in their robes, and all the prophets were prophesying before them; sn v. 12, 19. 2 S. 15. 30 David's ascent of Olivet, cf. v. 18, 23. Is. 6. 2, 2 S. 12. 19, 1 S. 9. 11, 14, 27, Is. 5. 28, Nu. 11. 27, 1 K. 12. 6, 2 K. 2. n. With TlTl, Gen. 25. 32; 37. 7; 41. 1-3, 1 S. 10. 22; 12. 2, 2 K. 17. 26. With Tiy, Gen. 18. 22, Ex. 9. 136 HEBREW SYNTAX Q .00. 2, 17, i K. i. 14, 22, 42, 2 K. 6. 33, Jer. 33. 1, Job 2. 3. So with tt)i and ^N. Gen. 24. 42, 49; 43. 4, Deu. 29. 14, Jud. 6.36. Rem. 1. The time of ptcp., § 100 c. Exx. of present time: Gen. 16. 8; 19. 15; 32. 12; 37. 16; 43. 18, Deu. 4. 1; 12. 8 and often, Jud. 7. 10; 18. 3, 1 S. 14. 11, Is. 1. 7, Hos. 3. 1. Exx. of past time: Gen. 39. 23 nfety wn "ratal ITpyiO ^ whatever he did Je. prospered, 37. 7, 15; 40. 6; 41. i seq., Ex. 18. 5, 14, Deu. 4. 12, Jud. 4. 22; 14. 4; 19. 27, 1 S. 2. 13; 9. 11, 1 K. 3. 2:4. 20; 6. 27, 2 K. 13. 21. Exx. of fut. time: Gen. 7. 4; 17. 19; 41. 25, 28; 49. 29, Ex. 33. 15, Jud. 11. 9; 15. 3, 1 S. 20. 36, 2 S. 12. 23, 2 K. 4. 16, Ps. 22. 32; 102. 19. Particularly with nan, as Gen. 15. 3; 20. 3; 24. 13 ; 1 S. 3. 11, 1 K. 13. 2, Is. 3. 1 ; 7. 14, Am. 8. 11. The ptcp. with run however may refer to any time, as pres., Gen. 38, 24 is with child, Jud. 9. 36, 1 S. 10. 22, 1 K. 1. 25; 17. 12; or past, Gen. 40. 6; 41. 1, Am. 7. 1, 4, 7. The ptcp., even without copula, may express juss. sense; Gen. 3. 14 nnts nvix cursed be thou, 9. 26 ; 24. 27, 1 K. 2. 45, cf. Ru. 2. 19. Rem. 2. In order to express more distinctly the idea of duration, particularly in past, the verb n'n is sometimes used with the ptcp., generally in a clause of circumstance explicative of the main narrative, but also in an independent statement. Gen. 37. 2 njJn rpn e)Di'' Jos. was herding-; Jud. 16. 21 D'^DKn rv?3 |niD Wand he continued to grind; 1 S. 211 ''TIK rnt^p rpri "lj/ani and the child continued to minister. Gen. 4. 17; 39. 22, Ex. 3. 1, Deu. 9. 7, 22, 24; 28. 29, Jud. 1. 7, 1 S. 18. 29, 2 S. 3. 6, 17; 7. 6, 2 K. 17. 25-41 ; 18. 4, Is. 2. 2; 59. 2, Jer. 26. 18, 20, Hos. 9. 17, Ps. 122. 2, Job 1. 14. Pass. ptcp. Lev. 13. 45, 1 K. 22. 35, Jer. 14. 16 ; 36. 30, Zech. 3. 3. The usage is more common in the later style (occurring sometimes with almost no emphasis). Neh. 1. 4; 2. 13. 15, 1 Chr. 6. 17; 18. 14, 2 Chr. 30. 10; 36. 16, Est. 2. 15, Dan. 1. 16; 5. 19; 10. 9. Rem. 3. The ptcp. is negatived by t6 when an attributive. Jer. 2. 2 njaij to pK a land not sown (cf. adj. Deu. 32. 6, THE NOMEN AGENT IS OR PARTICIPLE 1 37 Hos. 13. 13). Jer. 18. 15, Hab. 1. 14 in an attributive clause, Job 29. 12. Cf. 2 S. 1. 21, Hos. 7. 8. But also in a number of cases when pred., perhaps with rather more force, Nu. 35. 23 (= Deu. 19. 4), Deu. 28. 61, 2 S. 3. 34, Jer. 4. 22, Ez. 4. 14 ; 22. 24, Zeph. 3. 5, Ps. 38. 15, Job 12. 3. The double neg. of 1 K. 10. 21 is wanting in 2 Chr. 9. 20. The accents show Is. 62. 12, Jer. 6. 8, to be perf. ; Zeph. 2. 1 is doubtful. Of course norn t6 Hos. 1. 6, nom *6 Is. 54. 11, are perfs. Rem. 4. The finite tense which continues ptcp. will vary (cf. on inf. § 96, R. 2). It will be vav conv. impf. when ptcp. referred to a fact in the past, Gen. 27. 33 ; 35. 3, or was equivalent to a perf. of experience, Am. 5. 7, 8 ; 9. 5. It will be simple impf. or vav conv. perf. when ptcp. ex- pressed a thing habitual or general, 2 S. 20. 12, Am. 8. 14, Is. 5. 8, Mic. 3. 5, 9, or referred to fut., 1 K. 13. 2, 3. Rem. 5. The ptcp. being of weaker force than finite tense, sometimes uses prep. *? instead of ace. to convey the action, particularly when obj. precedes. Is. 11. 9 D'M? D T V waters covering the sea. Nu. 10. 25, Deu. 4. 42, Am. 6. 3 (cf. Is. 66. 5), Is. 14. 2. So in Ar., limalihi fiha muhina, making light of his money, Am. b. Keith, v. 4. Rem. 6. The ptcp. without subj. tends to be used in later style for 3rd pers. like finite verb. Jos. 8. 6, Neh. 6. 6 ; 9. 3. s, Is. 13. 5, and in Psalms. So occasionally for inf., Jer. 2. 17 ^]3piD nj? the time when he led thee. Gen. 38. 29 (comp. Mai. 1. 7 with 8; 1. 12; 2. 17 ; also 2. 15). In Ez. 27. 34 rd. fn?$M FiV. Both uses are common in post- biblical Heb. Rem. 7. The pass. ptcp. appears in some cases to express a state which is the result of the subject's own action. Is. 26. 3 n>it33 trusting, Ps. 103. 14 "K3J mindful, Is. 53. 3 JWT acquainted with. Cf. 1 S. 2. 18, Jud. 18. 11, Ez. 9. 2, 3, Song 3. 8. 138 HEBREW SYNTAX §101. SUBORDINATION OF NOUNS TO THE VERB BY MEANS OF PREPOSITIONS §101. The action of the verb often reaches the obj. through the medium of a prep. The prepp. may be assumed to be — i. Words expressing locality. 2. Then they are transferred to the sphere of time. 3. And, finally, they are used to express relations which are intellectual or ideal. When several words are coupled together under the regimen of the same prep, it is often repeated before each, as Hos. 2. 21 Diprp^ "'PO?' 1 BEHjfayi p-p®. Gen. 12. 1 ; 40. 2, 2 S. 6. 5, Hos. 1. 7. But usage varies, Hos. 2. 20; 3. 2. Sometimes, in poetry especially, the prep, exerts its influence over a second clause without being repeated, Is. 28. 6 for ^tt^pV. Job 15. 3 for cVrplI, Is. 30. I from my spirit, 48. 9 for the sake of my praise. Certain prepp. of motion, chiefly 7N and YI2, are used with verbs that do not express motion, and, on the other hand, a prep, of rest such as 2 may be used with a verb of motion. This pregnant consn., as it has been called, permits the ellipse of a verb. 1 S. 7. 8 1313D tiTlDp-^N be not silent (turning away) from us. Ps. 22. 22 '•jllTay D" 1 ?"?. "'in?*? heard (and delivered) me from the horns. 1 S. 24. 16 JTgO ^tt?^, cf. 2 S. 18. 19. Is. 38. 17, Ez. 28. 16 profane (and cast) thee from the mount, Ps. 28. 1; 18. 22; 73. 27, Ezr. 2. 62.— Gen. 19. 27 D'ipan-^N . . . BSttJ*! he rose early (and went) unto the place, Song 7. 13. Gen. 42. 28 Vnrp'l YTlNvM ttJ'W they trembled (and looked) unto one another ; and often with verbs of fear, wonder, &c, Gen. 43. 33, Is. 13. 8, Hos. 3. S come trembling unto, Mic. 7. 17, cf. Is. 41. 1. Ps. 89. 40 profaned (and cast) to the ground, 74. 7. Is. 14. 17, Gen. 14. 3. With 1 S. 21. 3 (if text VljnV right) cf. Gen. 46. 28. 1 S. 13. 7 rd. prob. ^rjNQ trembled from after him SUBORDINATION OF NOUNS BY PREPP. 1 39 (left him from fear). So the brief language, 1 S. 15. 23, rejected thee "HyQlp from (being) king, cf. v. 26 '& fVPiTO ; 1 K. 15. 13 removed her TVF2S$Q from being queen-mother. Is. 7. 8; 17. i, Hos. 9. 12, Jer. 48. 2, Ps. 83. 5. Ps. 55. 19 d'i/ttJS, ms redeemed (so as to be) in peace, Ps. 23. 6? 1 S. 22. 4 n 1J7P ^QTIM DTOn /«/ */&«« (so that they were) in the presence of the king of Moab. Rem. 1. The prepp. are either, (a) of rest in, as 3; (b) of motion in the direction of, as ta, b, IV, (c) of motion away from, as JD ; or (d) of the expression of other relations, as ?J? over, above, upon, nnn under, &c. In addition there are compound prepp., mostly with ^s or )D as first element. See the Lexx. Only a few points can be noticed. (a) Prep. 3 is either in, within (Ar.fi), or, at, on of contact (Ar. bi). Most of its uses are reducible to these two senses, e.g. IVaa in the house, P.??> "^f in, on the mountain ; of time, 1p'33. Hence its use with verbs to touch Vii, to cleave to PJM, to holdWR, =II?FI. From the sense of in (in the sphere of, em- bodied in) comes its use with pred. (beth essentice), as Ps. 68. 5 tof W3 (in) f ah is his name, Ex. 18. 4 God ^tJB is (in) my help, Ps. 35. 2. And otherwise, Ex. 6. 3 I appeared ?N3 *W as El shaddai, Is. 40. 10 PJI13 as a strong one, Ps. 39. 7 ay an image ; Ps. 37. 20 ; 146. 5, Pr. 3. 26, Job 23. 13, Lev. 17. 11. With ptcp. the plur. is used, though ref. be to a single person, Jud. 11. 35 ^V 3 among my troublers = my troubler, Ps. 54. 6 ; 118. 7 ; 99. 6 as (being) his priests, cf. Hos. 11. 4. So other allied senses, e.g. where we use with, 133 7(13 w ith a great army (in, in the element of; less naturally of contact, and so accompaniment), vi?03 with my staff, Gen. 32. 11 ; so with of instrument, Mic. 4. 14 t23t5>3 •wz'/A Me ratf, Is. 10. 24, 34 ; of persons, in, through, Hos. 1. 7 i"lliT3 through fe., Gen. 9. 6. Similar is 3 of price, Gen. 30. 16, 'J? WVl? ycf (with) the mandrakes, v. 26, 33. 19; 37. 28, 1 K. 10. 29. Finally 3 has partitive sense, Job 7. 13 my bed , n , ?0 Ntf 1 will bear of (in) my complaint, Nu. 11. 17, Ez. 18. 20. On 3 with obj., § 73, R. 6. (b) Prep, ta expresses motion towards, in the direction of, 140 HEBREW SYNTAX § 101. whether the goal be reached or not. Gen. 2. 19 brought them D"1Krr?K unto the man, 3. 19 unto the dust, 6. 18 into the ark, 19. 3, 2 S. 5. 8. Then less literally, Gen, 39. 7 lifted up her eyes c lpi , "7S towards (upon) Jos., Deu. 24. 15; Gen. 32. 31 D'OS'PS D'jlB face to face, Nu. 12. 8 mouth to mouth. So after verbs to speak, ?K "^\ (mostly with this verb). After verbs of speaking, in the sense of of, in reference to, Gen. 20. 2, 1 S. 1. 27 ; 3. 12, 2 S. 7. 19, Is. 29. 22, Ps. 2. 7. Naturally unto may mean in addition to, 1 S. 14. 34 eat D^1T"7K with the blood, Lev. 18. 18, 1 K. 10. 7, Lam. 3. 41, Ez. 7. 26 (pil is more common in this sense, and the two prepp. are often confounded). The verb may give to unto the complexion of hostility, Gen. 4. 8 rose up ??f1"?X against Abel, Gen. 22. 12, Jud. 1. 10, Is. 2. 4 ; 3. 8. Prep. ^ to may like ?s imply motion to, Gen. 24. 54 ; 27- J 4» 2 5> 1 S. 25. 35, Is. 53. 7, Jer. 12. 15 (perhaps oftener in later style, 2 Chr. 1. 13), but oftenest expresses direction to, and greatly in an ideal sense. Hence with verb to say "IBX; and after verbs of speaking, remembering, &c, in the sense of in reference to, Gen. 20. 13 v^lON say of me, Ps. 3- 31 !3 2 - i» J er - 2 - 2 > Ez - !8. 22; 33. 16, 1 K. 2. 4; 20. 7, Gen. 17. 20; 19. 21; 27. 8; 42. 9; 45. 1, Is. 5. 1. So Is. 8. 1 1[tOp, though the $> is not to be translated. In particular, ^ is used to introduce the indirect obj. (dat.), Jud. *• x 3 fr"W gave him, and in the various senses of the dat., Gen. 24. 29 ns nj53"ipi R. Aarfa brother, 13. 5. The so-called flfatf. commodi (or, incommodi, Jer. 2. 21, Mic. 2. 4, Ez. 37. 11, Ps. 137. 7), Is. 6. 8 uHfe 'D, Jud. 1. 1, Deu. 30. 12, 13 ; particularly in the form of the ethical dat., when the action is reflected back upon the agent and done for him. Mostly with imper. : Gen. 12. 1 1?"^I? get thee, 22. 5 D3in3B> sit you here, 21. 16 ft? ^BWI she sat her down ; Deu. 1, 7, 40 ; 2 - 3 ; 5- 2 7. J os - 7- '°; 22 - i9> x K - i7- 3. Is. 2. 22 ; 36. 9; 40. 9, Am. 2. 13; 7. 12, Ps. 120. 6; 12.-. 3; 123. 4. On use of i> to express second obj. after to make, put, &c, § 78, R. 5; with agent of pass., §81; to circumscribe the gen., § 28, R. 5.— Prep. i> also expresses the norm, according to (perh. allied to in ref to), Is. 11. 3 Wj; HJOD^ according to the sight of his eyes, Gen. 33. 14 ; 13. 3, 1 s. SUBORDINATION OF NOUNS BY PREPP. 141 25. 42, Hos. 10. 12? Comp. such phrases as 1 S. 1. 18 •^Tlr Mi 1 ? went her way, 1. ifUXytft 'DP go in peace ; to smite ^C 1 '?? w ith the edge, Is. 1. 5 "fyrh, 50. 11. On ^ with obj. rf- § 73. R- 7- The prep. IV unto, as far as to, often includes the limit, 1 S. 17. 52 ; esp. the form ("W.) !{?...!», Gen. 31. 24 3itsp V^TS good or evil (from g. to e.), 14. 23; 19. n, Ex. 22. 3, 1 K. 6. 24, Is. 1. 6. The form ip? is common, Deu. 4. 32, Jud. 19. 30, 2 S. 7. 6, cf. Is. 7. 17, Am. 6. 14. In later style the compound ? "W is common, 2 Chr. 28. 9 ; 29. 28, cf. 1 K. 18. 29; Jud. 3. 3 in the phrase "unto the entering in of Hamath," 1 Chr. 13. 5, cf. 5. 9. The sense up to becomes = even (cf. Ar. hatta), Nu. 8. 4, 1 S. 2. 5, Hag. 2. 19, Job 25. 5, cf. Ex. 9. 7, Deu. 2. 5. (c) Prep. J» may be a noun = a part. Its various senses follow from this, e.g. (1) the partitive, Gen. 30. 14 "i\12 *K"WID some of thy son's mandrakes, 28. 1 1 ; 45. 23, Ex. 4. 9 ; 6. 25 ; 16. 27; 17. 5, Lev. 5. 9, 1 K. i. 6, Job 27. 6, Neh. 5. 5, Ps. 137. 3 (§ n, R. 1 a). So perhaps such passages as Lev. 4. 2, Deu. 15. 7 (§ 35, R. 2), 1 S. 14. 45, 2 S. 14. 11, Ex. 12. 4, unless such cases belong to (3) below, e.g. 1 S. 14. 45 from (beginning with, starting from) a hair. Cases like Gen. 6. 2; 7. 22; 9. 10; 17. 12, where ]a seems to particularise, are explainable in the same way. (2) The sense from, away from, naturally follows. Hence use of |o in comparison, Ex. 12. 4, 1 S. 15. 22, 2 S. 20. 6, Hos. 6. 6 (§ 33 seq.). Hence also privative sense, away from, without, Gen. 27. 39 ?t3D away from the dew, Job 11. 15 DV3D without spot, 19. 26; 21. 9, Is. 22. 3, Hos. 9. 11, Jer. 10. 14; 48. 45, Mic. 3. 6, Zech. 7. 11, Ps. 109. 24, Pr. 20. 3. So after verbs of delivering, saving, redeeming from, re- straining, ceasing from, fearing and being ashamed to do, &c. And in pregnant consns. (§ 101 above) ; Gen. 27. 1, 1 S. 8. 7; 15. 23, 1 K. 15. 13, Is. 7. 8, Hos. 4. 6; 9. 12, Ps. 102. 5, cf. 1 S. 25. 17 so that there is no speaking to him. (3) The sense from may refer to source, point of start- ing from, e.g. frequently in the local (and temporal) sense, Gen. 12. 1; 13. 11; 15. 4, Ex. 15. 22, 1 S. 17. 33; 20. 1; 142 HEBREW SYNTAX §101. but then, naturally, in a causative sense (influence coming from), from, because of, by, as Gen. 48. 10 his eyes were set Jpip from old age, Is. 53. 5 pierced W'VB'sp because of our transgressions. Gen. 9. 11 ; 16. 10; 49. 12, Ex. 6. 9, Deu. 7. 7, 1 S. 1. 16, 1 K. 14. 4, Is. 28. 7; 40. 26, Ob. 9, 10, Hos. 11. 6. Cf. §81. (rf) Prep. ?y has the meaning above, over, upon; e.g. locally whether of motion or rest, as Gen. 2. 5 had not rained P.Krr5>y upon the earth, 2 K. 4. 34 he laid himself "ijjn-^JJ w/o« the child, Gen. 24. 30 he saw the bracelets inhs , 1)"?V upon the hands of his sister, Gen. 1. 20 let fowl fly pKn'iaj; above the earth. And in a figurative sense, Gen. 16. 5 T;?y ,D !? n . my wrong- be upon thee, 41. 33 set him pxn"by »ww the land, Jud. 3. 10, 1 S. 15. 17. From these senses comes the use of hv with verbs to cover, as HD3, to pity, spare Din, 7DI1, #> burden, as Is. 1. 14 n-]bp vj? Vn they are a burden upon me, 2 S. 15. 33, Job 7. 20. So to express obligation, 2 S. 18. 1 1 v n W W ^ wou ^ have lain upon me to give thee, Gen. 30. 28, Jud. 19. 20, Pr. 7. 14. With words expressing the idea of addition, Gen. 31. 50 if thou take wives 'rtQ-py in addition to my daughters, 32. 12 D'OJfpy DK mother with children, Gen. 28. 9 ; 48. 22, Hos. 10. 14, Am. 3. 15. Other uses of by are similar, as Jud. 9. 17 MyV ED?? fought for you (over, protecting), but also in a hostile sense against, Gen. 43. 18 to fall upon, Gen. 34. 30 to gather themselves against, 50. 20 plot against, Nu. 10. 9, Am. 7. 9, Is. 7. 5, Ps. 2. 2. From the sense over (being higher) comes the meaning beside, by after to stand, sit, &c. Ps. 1. 3 D;c _, J?a"?y by the rivers- of water, 2 S. 9. 10 'JnpBOJ) atf my table (also ^s), Gen. 18. 2 standing beside him, 16. 7; 29. 2; 41. 1 ; Ex. 14. 2, Is. 6. 2. From the sense upon comes the use of hy to express the condition, circumstances in which an action is performed, on which it rests or which underlie it. Here |jy seems more general than 3 and has such meanings as amidst, although, notwithstanding, according to, &c. Jer. 8. 18 flJJ y$? amidst trouble, Job 10 7 IWOp though thou knowest, Is. 53. 9 nfc'V DDrrN? ?J? notwithstanding that he had done no evil, Job 16. 17. 2 K. 24. 3, Ps. 31. 24, Jer. 6. 14, Is. 38. 15 ; 60. 7. SUBORDINATION OF NOUNS BY PREPP. 143 Ps. 50. 5. So perhaps Ex. 12. 8 Dnhp'PJ? with bitter herbs (the idea in addition to is less expressive), Nu. 9. 11. Prep. Dy is with of accompaniment. Hence the sense of beside, near locally, Gen. 25. 11 ; 35. 4, Jud. 9. 6, 1 S. 10. 2. So its use in comparisons, Job 9. 26 HDN ntatCDy like ships of reed, Ps. 88. 5 ; and in the sense as well as, 1 Chr. 25. 8, Ecc. 2. 16. In 1 S. 16. 12; 17. 42 DV seems used adverbi- ally, unless nB* be employed nominally, along with beauty or eyes. Prep, nnn under, below ; hence such usage as 1 S. 14. 9 y'nnn where we stand (under us), on the spot, Jos. 3. 8; 6. 5, Jud. 7. 21, 2S. 2, 23. So the sense instead; and "l^K 'n because. The particle 3 like, as, is either a prep, or an undeveloped noun, instar. If the latter, it may be in appos. with a previous word or in ace. of condition. If a prep, it is used in a pregnant sense ; in either case it governs the gen. Ps. 95. 8 harden not your hearts nTiDS as at M., 83. 10 do to them S<'lp , p3 as to S., Gen. 34. 31 njiTan as with a harlot ? Hos. 2. 5 ITlptfl DV3 as owthe day. Is. 1. 25 ; 5. 17 ; 10. 26; 23. 15; 28. 21; 51. 9, Hos. 2. 17; 9. 9; 12. 10, Am. 9. 11, Ps. 35. 14, Job 28. 5 ; 29. 2. The first element of the compound prepp. is chiefly p or ^K. The form ^SB in earlier writings is mostly a prep, in- commodi ; in later style it is used for because of, for the sake of, even in a favourable sense. 1 From the sense upon comes the general use of pj) as a prep, incommodi, opposed to ■). Particularly in the expression of feelings and mental states with such words as heart, soul, spirit, the prep, suggests the pressure upon the subject of the feeling or state. Jer. 8. 18 "V\ '3? vj? my heart is sick upon me, Hos. 11. 8, Lam. 3. 20, Job 10 1 ; 14. 22 ; 30. 16, Ps. 42. 6, 7, 12 ; 43. 5 ; 131. 2 ; 142. 4 j 143. 4, Jon. 2. 8. In translation in must often be used, and sometimes the prep, is almost untranslatable, e.g. Gen. 48. 7 Rachel died vS?, cf. Nu. n. 13, Jud. 14. 16, The primary sense may become weakened in usage, Neh. 5. 7, ■ 44 HEBREW SYNTAX § 102-104. SYNTAX OF THE SENTENCE THE SENTENCE ITSELF § 102. A sent, consists of a subj. and pred. The subj. may be expressed separately, as t)0V ''pN / am Jos., or in the case of the verbal sent, contained in the form, as OfnDP ye sold. Besides the mere subj. and pred. sentences usually contain additional elements, such as an obj. under the regimen of the pred., or some amplifications descriptive either of subj. or pred. The subj. may be a pron., or a noun, or anything equiva- lent to a noun as an adj. or adverb used nominally, or a clause. Gen. 39. 9 'ifitiJN fiN thou art his wife ; 3. 3 "HON QvrfjN God has said; 2. 18 ^iS DINM HiTI ifa K 1 ? • ' v: - : t t it v: that man be alone is not good. So 2 K. 9. 33 PTto'TO T*T some of her blood spirted. Ex. 16. 27, 2 S. 1. 4; 11. 17, 2 K. 10. 10. The pred. may be a pron., Jud. 9. 28 DDttJ "'E who is Shechem? A noun, Gen. 39. 9 (above), an adj. or ptcp., Gen. 2. 10 NS" 1 1HJ a river went out. Is. 6. % miT ttJilD "XT " l x holy is Je. ; a finite verb, Gen. 3. 3 (above) ; or an adverbial or prepositional phrase, Gen. 2. 12 nTllin DttJ there is bdolach; Ps. 11. 4 'iNDS O^QEfo. *'« heaven is his throne. The noun as pred. is very common, because the adj. is little developed in the earlier stages of the Shemitic languages. See Nom. Appos. § 29 e. The simple sent, is either nominal or verbal. A verbal sent, is one whose pred. is a finite verb. All other sentences 144 THE SENTENCE ITSELF 14$ are nominal. — This definition, though only partially exact, is sufficient. I. The Nominal Sentence § 103. In the nominal sent, which expresses a constant and enduring condition, the subj. is the most prominent element. In general the emphatic word is placed first, hence in this sent, the order is — subj., pred. The subj. in the nominal sent, is very generally definite, but not always. Gen. 2. 12 Ito W7\7\ V"!StH liYfi and the gold of that land is good; 13. 13 D^n tilp "'tj&lNI. and the men of S. were wicked; 2. 10 N^ inS") and a river went forth; 29. 17 rri3"5 Tivb ^371. the eyes of L. were tender, 12. 6; 13. 7. Esp. after PlSt!, and when ptcp. is pred., 16. 6 Ijrinpttj TfSil "TjTil thy maid is in thy hand. 20. 15, 16; 27. 42; 28. 12; 41. 3, 5,6; 48. 1. § 104. This order is not invariable. There is considerable freedom in the disposition of the parts of the sent., and emphasis on the pred. may give it the first place, (a) A simple adj. when pred. often stands first, particularly if the subj. be also simple, though when the subj. is of some heaviness the adj. may be put at the end, cf. Gen. 2. 12 above. Jer. 12. 1 ffirP flflN p" n f$ righteous art thou, Je. Particularly if the adj. be in the comparative, 1 S. 24. 18 12120 nn^i p^tS thou art more righteous than I ; Gen. 29. 19 "H7 PTfito ^T\T\ SitO it is better that I give her to thee. Gen. ' T T ' * 4. 13, Hos. 13. 12, Ps. in. 2,4; 116. 5; 118. 8,9. (b) In dependent sentences, e.g. after ^ that, for, the pred. has a certain emphasis, and stands first. Gen. 3. 5 OTTW SH* 1 "D for God knows, 3. 6; 22. 12. Esp. if subj. be a pron. ; 3. 10 ^N D'"!"^ ^ because I was naked; 3. 19; 20. 7; 25. 30; 29. 9; 42. 33, Am. 7. 13. And in general the pronominal subj. is without emphasis, 24. 34; 26. 9; 30. 1, Am. 7. 14 ; though, of course, it may be otherwise, as when 10 146 HEBREW SYNTAX § 104, 105. God speaks solemnly of Himself, Gen. 15. 1 ; 26. 24; 28. 13- After nom. pendens the resumptive pron. with indef. pred. is unemphatic; 34. 21 ; 40. 12, 18; 41. 25-27; 42. 11. (c) Naturally the pred. is emphatic in interrogative sentences of whatever kind. Gen. 24. 65 Ttt vT! ttj^n "^O ^ J V T - . • T who (pred.) is yonder man? 1 S. 17. 43 "OjSI 275D am I a dog? Gen. 18. 17. "0$ PFppJprr shall I hide? Gen. 4. 9, Jud. 2. 22, 1 S. 16. 4; though emphasis may alter this order, Ex. 16. 7, 8 HE 13£T3"l what are we? In answers the order of question is generally retained ; Gen. 29. 4 . . . D£lN PNO liTO^ pn?2 from where are ye ? from Haran we, 24. 23, 24, 2 K. 10. 13. But great variety appears in use of the pron.; cf. Gen. 24. 65. The prep, h with noun or pron. when meaning to be to, to have, often stands first ; Gen. 26. 20 D^QH 13 v the water is ours; 29. 16 n*l32 ^P!0 EpSl and L. had two daughters. 19. 8; 31. 16; 48. S, Ex. 2. 16, Jud. 3. 16, 1 S. 1. 2; 17. 12; 25. 2, 2 S. 14. 6. And so adverbial expressions, Gen. 2. 12. In the nominal sentences above the predication is expressed by the mere juxtaposition of subj. and pred. without any copula. The time also to which the predica- tion belongs is left unexpressed. 2. The Verbal Sentence § 105. In the verbal sent, the idea expressed by the verb is the emphatic element, and in ordinary calm discourse the order is — pred., subj. Gen. 4. 26 |2."1 ?^ ntpSl a son was born. And with the conversive tenses universally, which must stand at the head of the clause, Gen. 3. 2 IQ^fTl !"TONn and the woman said. This kind of sentence is far t ■ It the most common in prose narrative. When, however, any emphasis falls on the subj. it may precede the verbal pred. This emphasis may be of various kinds, though generally due to some kind of antithesis, THE SENTENCE ITSELF 147 latent or expressed. Gen. 3. 13 "ON^n tifrlSil the serpent beguiled me; 37. 33 inn^M XVT\ iTT! m Ttirti it is : t t -: tt t- •: v : my son's coat, an evil beast hath devoured him; 37. 27 fa'VT^T^N ^3^1. but let not our hand be upon him. Often the antithesis is expressed: Is. 1. 3 7Snto? IHJp TittJ JHJ yT fcO the ox knoweth his owner, Israel does not know; Gen. 4. 2 Abel was a shepherd n»"T« 72)} HVJ pjTl £«* Ctf2» was a tiller of the ground ; 1 S. 1. 22 . . . tt^NH 7JW TWOV \fih illiyy the man went up, but Hannah did not go up. Gen. 6.8; 18. 33 ; 33. 17 ; 35.18; 37. 1 1, Hos. 2. 23, 24 ; Is. 1. 2 and //& *0 WPI fQjfiil miDl? incense (sacrificial smoke) is an abomination to me. Jer. 12. 6 "-p Vial naiTQa . . . THN'Da. even thy brethren have acted treacherously. Gen. 14. 24; 22. 24; 30. 33; 31. 16; THE SENTENCE ITSELF 1 49 34. 21 ; 41. 25 ; 44. 17 ; 45. 20, Ex. 12. 16, Jud. 4. 4, 2 S. 5. 1, Deu. 1. 30, 38, 39. (b) Gen.— Jud. 17. 5 '« Tt% "h TlTX) ttfWiTj the man Micak had a house of God. 2 K. 1. 4 pfb}! "IttJN ntSSn i"!2T3p TirrfcO D$ from the bed which thou hast gone up into thou shalt not come down. Is. 4. 3 t^lp . . . INttJjm » w 't t : • - : 1? T?NH he that is left shall be called holy. The prep, is sometimes placed before the main subj., and repeated with the pron. Gen. 2. 17 Vmz ^NM N 1 ? . . . TiT^ Y^ but thou shalt not eat of the tree of knowledge. 2 S. 6. 23. — Gen. 17-4. 15; 48. 7. 1 S. 12. 23, 1 K. 1. 20; 12. 17, Is. 3. 12; 9. 1 ; 11. 10, Hos. 9. 8, 11, Ps. 10. 5; 11. 4; 125. 2, Jon. 2. 7. (c) Ace— Gen. 24. 27 '1 ^m TTiJI "^ft Je. led me in the way. Gen. 28. 13 n33flN X\? . . . VI^Il *>&« land on which thou liest will I give thee. Is. 1. 7 O^Tt MrWIN nn& Q^bpto your land strangers devour in your sight. The main subj. may be ace, which is resumed: Gen. 47. 21 "info "V?3?i7 DyrvrMl. and the people he removed. Gen. 13. IS ; 49. 8, Nu. 22. 35, Jud. 11. 24, 1 S. 9. 13; 25. 29, 1 K. 15. 13; 22. 14, 2 K. 9. 27, Is. 8. 13, Ps. 125. 5, Deu. 13. 1 ; 14. 6. (d) In the verbal sent, the expression of the resumptive pron. throws emphasis upon the subj., the place of which at the head gives it prominence. The same is the case in the nominal sent, when the pred. is definite, as 1 K. 18. 39 D^Nn tWl TWiV* Jehovah is God ! Deu. 18. 2 NVT TV\7V "i]-|bn3 Jehovak is his inheritance. In this case the pron. precedes the pred. Gen. 2. 14; 9. 18; 42. 6, Deu. 10. 17; 12. 23; 31. 6, 8, Is. 9. 14; 33. 6, 1 S. 17. 14. When the pred. of the nominal sent, is indefinite the pron. usually follows the pred., and there is a balance of emphasis on subj. and pred., the resumptive pron. sinking almost to the rank of a copula. Gen. 41. 25 njP")3 CiVn *W7 inN the dream of Ph. is one; 47. 6 Wish d'nSE Y"M I SO HEBREW SYNTAX § 106, 107. NIPT. Gen. 34. 21 ; 45. 20, Ex. 3. 5 ; 32. 16, Nu. 11. 7, Deu. 1. 17; 4. 24, Jos. 5. 15, 2 S. 21. 2, 1 K. 20. 31, Mic. 7. 3. Cf. Ps. 76. 8. The sent, is also compound when cas. pend. is resumed by convers. tenses, e.g. 1 K. 12. 17. Rem. 1. When the cas. pend. is to be resumed in ace. (e above) it may be put in ace. also in Ar. And in other languages — Den Konig Wiswamitra, Den treibt's ohne Rast und Ruh . . Rem. 2. The fact that the pron. agrees with subj. in gend. and numb., e.g. tstesn Kin D'nn, seems to show that properly it is a resumption of the subj. and not an anticipa- tion of the pred. Its occasional agreement with pred. (e.g. in Eth. &c.) is a familiar case of attraction, cf. Jer. 10. 3. The consn. is probably different when the pron. stands after apron, of 1st or 2nd pers., as 2 S. 7. 28 DVPKil tnn ilFlK. Here the 3rd pers. pron. strengthens the other, thou art God. 1 Is. 37. 16, Jer. 14. 22, Ps. 44. 5, Neh. 9. 6, 2 Chr. 20. 6, cf. Is. 51. 9, 10, and with 1st pers. Is. 43. 25 ; 51. 12; 52. 6. So 1 Chr. 21. 17 /am he-who (itfot) has sinned, Ez. 38. 17, cf. Jer. 49. 12. Others (Ew. Dr.) regard sin in these cases as pred., 2 S. 7. 28 thou art he — God. The same seems the consn. with Mil fit Ecc. 1. 17, 1 Chr. 22. 1, and DH n?K Gen. 25. 16, Lev. 23. 2, Nu. 3. 20, 21, 27, 33, &c, though the emphasis here is very slight. In some cases Kin appears to be pred., Is. 41 4 NW 'JN I am he (43. 10, 13 ; 46. 4 ; 48. 12, Ps. 102. 28), where he (it) expresses the divine consciousness of himself, cf. the 1 This use of the third pers. pron. seems secondary. Naturally it would be used to strengthen only words in the 3rd pers., e.g. Is. 7. 14, Nu. 18. 23, Ex. 12. 42, Ezr. 7. 6, 2 Chr. 32. 30. The same use of 3rd pers. pron. appears in the so-called Ar. " pron. of separation " (a mere empirical phrase). This 3rd pers. pron. should properly be used only after a subj. in 3rd pers. , its use after I, thou, &c. , is no doubt secondary and analogical, and is less classical. E.g. John 14. 6 ana hua elfariq (van Dyck), / am the way, in the more classical trans, of the Jesuits is ana eltariq, ana elbab, / am the door, &c. EXPRESSION OF SUBJECT IN VERBAL SENTENCE 151 beginning of 43. 11 and end of 43. 12. In sense, it is 1, or / am (what I am) is nearly the same. When the sent, is transposed with pred. first the pron. anticipates the subj., Lam. 1. 18 nirP Kin p^X ; Song 6. 8, 9 VBf J NVl nnN one is she, my dove ; Pr. 30. 24, 29. Cf. Pr. 6. 16 ; 30. 15, 18. Peculiar is 1 S. 20. 29 VJK '6 1W K1.11 (Sep. otherwise), cf. Ps. 87. 5. EXPRESSION OF SUBJECT IN VERBAL SENTENCE § 107. In the verbal sent, the subj. is expressed by the inflectional element of the form, except in 3rd pers., as "'^ljn' 1 / know, DJVIpEi ye sold (where tern and ti express the subj.). In the nominal sent, the subj. has to be expressed. On its omission with ptcp. cf. § 100. I. Emphasis on Subject When emphasis falls on the pronom. subj. in verbal sent. it is expressed separately, being then placed chiefly before, but also after, the verb. The emphasis is often slight, and due to contrast. Gen. 42. 8 1iT}3n VO OJTt but they did not recognise him; 33. 3; 42. 23, Jud. 4. 3; 13. 5, Is. 1. 2, Hos. 2. 10, Am. 2. 9. After the verb, Jud. 8. 23 SfeN'N 1 ? 023. ^t? ^ w ^ not riue over y° u - Gen. 24. 60, Ex. 18. 19, 1 S. 20. 8; 23. 22, 2 S. 12. 28; 17. 15, 2 K. 10. 4, Is. 20. 6, Jer. 17. 18. The pron. is often strengthened by D3 whether before the verb or after. Gen. 20. 6; 38. 11 ; 48. 19, Jud. 1. 3, 22; 3. 31, Hos. 4. 6. Rem. 1. These additional exx. of pron. may be turned up. Gen. 30. 26; 31. 6; 42. 19; 43. 9; 45. 8, Ex. 20. 19, Deu. 3. 28; 5. 24, Jud. 8. 21 ; 15. 12. In many cases, however, the emphasis is not on the mere pron. ; the expression of the pron. gives force or solemnity to the whole phrase, which is emphatic. Particularly in responses to preceding statements or requests, as Gen. 21. 24 I -will swear, 38. 17 ; 47. 30, Jud. 6. 18 (11. 9), 2 S. 3. 13; 21. 6, 1 K. 2. 18; 152 HEBREW SYNTAX §108,109. 5. 22, 2 K. 6. 3. But also in other cases, Jud. 5. 3 / sing, I will sing to the Lord. Pr. 24. 32. And in prayers the thou is merely part of the solemnity of the sentiment, 1 K. 3. 6. And so in earnest appeals, as in the phrases thou knowest, ye know, the emphasis is not on the mere pron. but belongs to the whole expression. Gen. 44. 27, Jos. 14. 6, 1 S. 28. 9, 2 S. 17. 8, 1 K. 2. 5, 15 ; 5. 17, 20 (2 K. 9. 11), 2 K. 4. 1, cf. 2 K. 19. n. Many languages whose inflected verb does not need the pron. show a tendency to express 1st and 2nd pron. So Moab. St. 1. 21 seq. Pleonastic expression of ^ after verb is a peculiarity of Eccles., e.g. 1. 16; 2. 1, 11, 15, &c, cf. Song 5. 5. 2. The Indefinite Subject § 108. The indefinite, unnamed subj. (Eng. they, one) is expressed in various ways, (a) By 3 pers. sing, of verb, e.g. in the phrase they called the name, &c. Gen. 11. 9 723. PTOttJ fc^D D~7J? they called its name Babel. Gen. V T T : t't I " - 16. 14; 21. 31, Ex. 15. 23. The 3 plur. is also used, 1 S. 23. 28, 1 Chr. 11. 7; 14. 11. But in other cases 3 sing, is of frequent use. Is. 7. 24 nQttJ N3> fitt?j?5/l D^Sna with arrows and bow shall one go there; Ex. 10. 5 731"' k7\ Y"]|Hn nto"^7 so that one shall not be able to see the earth. Gen. 38. 28; 48. 1, Deu. 15. 2, 1 S. 16. 4; 23. 22; 26. 20, 2 S. 15. 31 ; 16. 23, 1 K. 18. 26, 2 K. 5. 4, Is. 6. 10; 8. 4; 14. 32, Am. 6. 12, Mic. 2. 4. (b) By 3 plur. Gen. 29. 2 D^n^rf Spt£ NIHil IfcSliTp? from that well they watered the flocks ; 1 S. 27. 5 '•T^J-V DipQ let them give me a place. Gen. 41. 14; 49. 31, 1 S. 1. 25, 1 K. 1. 2; 15. 8, Hos. 11. 2, 7; 12. 9, Jer. 8. 4; 16. 6 (sing, and pi.), Job 6. 2, 2 Chr. 25. 16. (c) By ptcp., in plur. Gen. 39. 22 Q^y "Itt^" 1 ?! JWl n©V !"Pn b^n Dllj and whatever /fey did there. Is. 32. 12, Jer. 38. 23, Ez. 13. 7, Neh. 6. 10, 2 Chr. 9. 28. More rarely sing., Is. 21. 11 W\p vpN one calleth unto me from Seir. SUBJECT IN THE VERBAL SENTENCE I S3 Rem. i. The 3 sing. fern, seems used Num. 26. 59, 1 K. 1. 6. The real subject in a, b is the ptcp. sing, or plur., K^J5 tt~}P a caller, or X7.PD the caller, called. The ptcp. is often expressed : Is. 28. 4 PinN HNhn PINT "IB>K which one (the seer) sees ; v. 24. Nu. 6. 9, Deu. 22. 8, 2 S. 17. 9, Is. 16. 10, Jer. 9. 23 ; 31. 5, Ez. 33. 4, Am. 9. 1, Mic. 5. 2, Nah. 2. 3, Ps. 129. 3. In 2 K. 12. 10 B^S is used for one, cf. 23. 8. Am. 6. 10 "i[®V "ril>n are there a»j/ still beside thee? the subj. is rather understood. Rem. 2. The 3 plur. is sometimes used where human agents cannot be supposed, in the sense of pass. Job 7. 3 and wearisome nights v 13D are appointed me ; 6. 2 ; 1 9. 26 ; 34. 20, Ez. 32, 25, Pr. 9. ii. The usage is common in Aram., Dan. 2. 30; 4. 22. So ptcp. 4. 28, 29. Peculiar ptcp. sing., Jud. 13. 19 ni^P tyBDl and something marvel- lous was done. Rem. 3. The use of 2nd person for the indeterminate subj. is rare, except in the phrase 1N3, ^K3"iy (H3K3) till thou contest = as far as, 1 K. 18. 46, Gen. 10. 19,30; 13. 10. Apparently, Is. 7. 25 HBE' Ni3n KP thou shalt not come there. In the injunctions of the Law thou is the community per- sonified or each person, and in Prov. thou is the pupil of the Wiseman, though cf. Pr. 19. 25 ; 26. 12 ; 30. 28. 3. Impersonal Construction § 109. The verb is also used impersonally in 3 sing., perf. and impf., chiefly mas. but also fem. Jud. 2. 15 ")2*1 itop DPn they were greatly distressed; Gen. 32. 8. 1 S. 30. 6 "TN£ ivh "titfn, Jud. 10. 9. So mas. in "TF) and it was, rP!Tl and it shall be. So many words followed by prep. 7; as 7 JH to be amiss to, Nu. 22. 34, Gen. 21. 12, 2 S. 19. 8; Jer. 7. 6. 7 S'ilO 1 S. 16. 16, Hos. 10. i, Jer. 7. 23. 7 "113 bitter, Ru. I. 13, Lam. 1. 4. 7 DPI to have heat, 1 K. I. 1, 2, Hag. 1. 6. Job 3. 13 ^ PW| tSl / should have had rest, Is. 23. 12, Neh. 9. 28. Cf. Gen. 4. 5, 1 S. 16. 23. The fem. seems used in reference to the phenomena of 154 HEBREW SYNTAX §109-111. nature. Job n. 17 ilC^f! (cohort.) should it be dark. Am. 4. 7 "VttDFl it rained (freq.). Mic. 3. 6 it shall be dark, Ps. 50. 3; 68. 15. (But cf. I S. 29. 10 when it is light (mas.), 2 S. 2. 32, see Gen. 44. 3, Jer. 13. 16.) And of an unseen power, Job 18. 14 it brings him (he is brought) to the king of terrors. The pass, is also used impersonally in the mas. Gen. 4. 26 fcO|?7 vfflU tN then it was begun to invoke; Ez. 16. 34 ilSW fc*? "SfinN"! there was no whoring after thee. The pass, in this case often governs like the act. (§ 79), Am. 4. 2 DpfW NiWl _y« shall be taken away. Nu. 16. 29, Deu. 21. 3, 4, 2 S. 17. 16, Is. 14. 3 ; 16. 10; 27. 13 ; 53. 5, Jer. 16. 6, Am. 9. 9, Mai. 1. n (ptcp.), Ps. 87. 3. Rem. 1. The forms 3to, in, "110, &c., might be adjectives, but the use of impf. and inf. makes it more probable that they are perfs. Peculiar is Prov. 13. 10, by pride HSD \pp there comes strife (es giebt). Rarely with suff., Job 6. 17 1t3ri3 when it is hot. Rem. 2. It is scarcely impersonal use of fem. when it is employed of a subject suggested by some statement pre- ceding, where we say it. Is. 7. 7 Mpn JO it shall not stand (the purpose); 14. 24, Jud. 11. 39, 1 S. 10. 12. The fem. is often, however, used for neut. — Comp. these cases of fem.: Gen. 24. 14 [thereby), 1 S. n. 2 iTnOB 1 ! {it, putting out their eye), Gen. 15. 6 counted it (the fact that he believed) Ex.30. 21, Jos. 11. 20 nnVl, 2S. 2. 26; 3. 37, 1 K. 2. 15, 2 K. 19. 25; 24. 3, 20, Is. 22. 11 ; 30. 8, Mic. 1. 9, Jer. 4. 28; 5. 31 ; 7. 31 ; 10. 7 ; 19. 5, Ez. 33. 33, Job 4. 5 ; 18. 15. Rem. 3. In poetry a peculiar consn. occurs in which the verb seems to have a double subj., one personal and the other the organ or member, &c, by which the action is actually performed. This neuter subj. has always a suff. of the same person as the personal subj., and may precede or follow the verb. Ps. 3. 5 K^pN 'wN yip my voice, I cried, i.e. I cried aloud ; Is. 10. 30 "rffip y^i shout aloud ! Is. 26. 9, Hab. 3. 15, Ps. 17. 10, 13, 14 ; 32. 8 ; 44. 3 ; 60. 7 ; 66. 17 ; 69. 1 1 ; 108. 2, 7 ; 142. 2. In a nominal sent. Ps. 83. 19. COMPLEMENT OF THE VERBAL SENTENCE 155 — Others consider fyp, &c, to be ace, but the presence of the suff. distinguishes the present case from that in § 67, R. 3. COMPLEMENT OF THE VERBAL SENTENCE §110. The sent, does not usually consist of mere subj. and pred. ; the verbal sent, has usually an obj., and all sentences may have additional elements which are the complements of the two chief parts of the sentence. These complements usually follow the parts, subj. or pred., which they amplify. The order of the verbal sentence is : verb, subj., obj., or complement of the verb. But emphasis may alter this order. Gen. 3. 14 ^fl -iSjrj IJ^ri ^nfSy on thy belly shalt thou go, and dust shalt thou eat. 1 S. 20. 8 riWnil ntTfE) 1 ? Tpntp:^ but why bring me to thy father! 1 K. 2. 26 TJ7 fii"tij? to Anathoth with you! Gen. iq. 10; 20. 4; 38. 9, Deu. 5. 3, Jos. 2. 16, Is. 6. 5, Hos. 5. 6, Job 1. 12; 34. 31. The adverb usually follows the verb, except negatives; and so longer designations of time. But short words of time, like tN then, T\P$ now, rPttJN^SL at first, &c, precede. § in. Out of this principle of emphasis may arise a variety of order, e.g. — (a) Obj., verb, subj. 1 S. 2. 19 "ra« ^Tlto^ |to|? ^W> and a little robe his mother used to make him. Gen. 42. 4, 1 S. 17. 36, 1 K. 14. 11. And very often when subj. is con- tained in the verb. Jud. 14. 3, 2 K. 22. 8, Is. 4. 1, Hos. 1. 7 ; 10. 6. (b) Verb, obj., subj. 1 S. 15. 33 D^3 ftauJ itiM ^f!3."]n as thy sword has bereaved women. Gen. 21. 7, Nu. 19. 7, 18, 1 K. 8. 63 ; 19. 10, Is. 19. 13. (c) Subj., obj., verb. Is. 1. 15 IN^El DW Q3^\ This collocation brings the subj. and obj. into very close relation. Jud. 17. 6 every man what was right in his own sight used to 156 HEBREW SYNTAX §112,113. do. Jer. 32. 4 and his eyes his eyes shall see, cf. 34. 3. Is. 11. 8; 32.8. Rem. 1. Other forms are occasional, asobj., subj., verb. 2 K. 5. 13, Is. 5. 17 ; 28. 17. This order is usual in nominal sent, with participial pred. Gen. 41. 9 "VSTO '?K 'StOpTlS my faults I call to remembrance. Gen. 37. 16, Jud. 9. 36; 14. 4, 2 K. 6. 22, Jer. 1. 11. Rem. 2. Aramaic shows a liking for placing the verb at the end of the clause, the obj. and complement of the verb preceding it, as in c. Dan. 2. 16, 18 13. 16 ; 4. 15. Cf. inf. Is. 49. 6. Jud. 6. 25. 2 Chr. 31. 7, 10. Rem. 3. It is a point of style, however, particularly in prophetic and poetic parallelism, to vary the order of words. So even in ordinary prose. Ex. 3. 7 'WTlX WKT vijfflB* Dnjjgra-nw . . . -m, is. 5. 24; u. 8; 31. 1. Cf. 1 k. 20. 18 the double take them alive. AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE IN RESPECT OF GENDER AND NUMBER § 1 1 2. There is less precision in the matter of agreement than there is in classical or other languages. Several general peculiarities appear — 1. When the pred. stands first the speaker's mind is fixed on the act in itself, and clear consciousness of the coming subj. is not yet present to him, and he puts the pred. in the most general form, mas. sing. 1 2. There is a great tendency to construe according to the sense rather than strict grammatical law, hence gramm. singulars, such as collectives and words that suggest a plurality, are often joined with plur. pred., especially when they refer to persons. 3. On the other hand, there is a tendency to group things that resemble one another, or belong to the same class, under one conception, and construe them with a sing. verb. 1 Ar. grammarians have a more ingenious explanation of this usage. AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 1 57 The plur. of lifeless objects and living creatures, not persons, may be treated as gramm. collect., and joined with sing. fem. I. Agreement of Simple Subject § 113. (a) When subj. precedes the pred. there is in general agreement in gend. and numb., whether the subj. be person or thing. Gen. 15. 12 JTTM HO'Tini and a sleep fell; v. 17 nN3. tifoltfpl the sun was gone down; 16. 1. But exceptions occur; Mai. 2. 6 N2?pyN7 VyT\H evil was not found. Gen. 15. 17, Ex. 12. 49, Jer. 50. 46, Zech. 6. 14, cf. v. 7, Job 20. 26. (b) When pred. precedes, while agreement in gend. and numb, is usual, esp. when subj. is personal, the verb is often in 3 sing, mas., even though the subj. be plur. or fem. This is common with TVTl to be. The subj. having once been mentioned, however, following verbs are in proper agree- ment. Gen. 1. 14 1VT) n^Nfp '•PP. let there be lights, and let them be signs. Is. 17. 6 rVPTty ^"^Mtpjl there shall be left gleanings ; 2 K. 3. 26 nornS!! ^Efl? pjn the battle was too strong for him, cf. v. 18. Deu. 32. 35, Is. 13. 22; 24. 12, Jer. 36. 32. Nu. 9. 6 WT "lttfcj D^$ Vn, 1 K. 11. 3 fiYlfc? Q^i 'iT'TPl he had wives, princesses, 700. The t ■ t • : _ mas. is apt to be used for 3 pi. fem. impf.; 1 K. 11. 3 ^1 "ii^-f^ VtM his wives perverted his mind ; 2 S. 4. 1 1ST»T • T T •'" •pf his hands were paralysed (cf. Zeph. 3. 16), Jud. 21. 21, Jos. 11. 11, Is. 19. 18, Jer. 13. 16, Ez. 23. 42, Hos. 14. 7. Gen. 20. 17; 30. 39. Song 6. 9. Imper., Is. 32. 11, Hos. 10. 8, Zeph. 3. 16. — I S. 1. 2, Jud. 20. 46, Gen. 35. 5, 1 Chr. 2. 22; 23. 17, 22. (c) Subjects in dual are necessarily joined with plur pred., verb or ptcp. Gen. 48. 10 ]j>tt? 1113 'feP iyi$ the eyes of Israel were dim from age. 2 K. 21. 12; 22. 20. Is. 1. 15, Mic. 7. 10. Ptcp., 1 S. 1. 13, 2 S. 24. 3, Is. 30. 20, Hos. I5 8 HEBREW SYNTAX §114,115. g. 14, 2 Chr. 16. 9. Cf. § 31, and on 1 S. 4. 15, Mic. 4. 11. § 116. 2. Agreement of Compound Subject § 1 14. When the subj. is compound, consisting of several elements joined by and. — (a) When subj. is first the verb is usually plur., and so the pred. in nominal sent. 2 S. 16. 15 1N3. OyrT^I D'&tthNI Abs. and all the people came; Gen. 8. 22; 18. 11. But sometimes the verb is sing., agreeing either with the word next it or with the chief element of the complex subj., or the several parts of subj. all forming one conception: 2 S. 20. IO Joab and Abishai his brother f|T1 pursued. Hos. 4. 1 1 whoredom and wine and new wine 27"nj?' 1 # take away the understanding. Hos. 9. 2, Deu. 8. 1 3. Neh. 5. 14 Vl^3H tib ^m) "^N. 2 S. 3. 22, Est. 4. 16. 1 If parts of the subj. be of different genders pred. is usually mas., Gen. 18. 11, but cf. Jer. 44. 25. (&) When the pred. is first it perhaps oftenest agrees in gend. and numb, with the element of the subj. which is next it; but it may be in plur. When the subj. has once been mentioned following verbs are in plur. Gen. 31. 14 TPPh iiyya^Pn PINT} Til R. and L. answered and said; Nu. 12. 1 mi?«J! . . . prjNI. O^a ISnJill Mir. and Aaron spoke and said; Gen. 3. 8 'i.HttJN'l DTNil Na,nfi*l hid themselves. : ■ : t t It ..-;.- Gen. 7. 7 ; 9. 23 ; 21. 32 ; 24. 50, 55 ; 33. 7 ; 44. 14, Jud. 5. 1 ; 8. 21, 1 S. 11. 15; 18. 3; 27. 8, 1 K. 1. 34, 41. — PI. Gen. 40. 1, Nu. 20. 10; 31. 13, Ex. 5. 1 ; 7. 20. Or it may be mas. sing. (§ 113 b), Joel 1. 13. (c) When the subj. is a pron. and noun, the pron. must be expressed whether verb be sing, or plur. Gen. 7. 1 T tn' 1 ja"731 ilJW'WS, go thou and all thy house, Jud. 7. 10, 11. Jud. 11. 38 rprfiy^l fcOn "n/^O s ^ e an d her companions 1 The and before "maids," Est. 4. 16, and before "brethren," Neh. 5. 14, recalls Ar. inaw of concomitance. AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 159 went, i K. i. 21 "Oil ^N "TV^m. / and my son shall be. Gen. 14. 15 ; 20. 7; 24. 54 (pi.); 31. 21 ; 1 S. 20. 31 ; 28. 8, 2 S. 19. 15. In I S. 29. 10 JtfiN is missed before servants. Even when two nouns are subj. a pron. referring to the first must be expressed if any words separate it from the second, unless the words be a mere apposition. Gen. 1 3. 1 ; 35. 6; 38. 12; 50. 14, 22, Jud. 9. 48, Neh. 2. 12, cf. Jos. 22. 32. The pron. may be expressed in any case, 1 S. 29. 11; 30. 9. When compound subj. is of different persons 1st pers. precedes 2nd and 2nd the 3rd. 1 K. 1. 21 above, I and my son. 1 S. 14. 40; 20. 23, Nu. 20. 8, Gen. 43. 8. 3. Agreement of Collectives § 115. With sing, nouns having a collective meaning the pred. is often construed in the plur. according to sense : particularly when the collective term refers to persons, but sometimes also when it refers to lower creatures, or even to things. Grammatical agreement in sing, is also common, and the two consns. often interchange. When the pred. is first it may be in sing, while following verbs are in plur. Hos. 4. 6 ilpy 1ET2 mv people are destroyed, cf. Is. 5. 13 "*£& PHS is gone away ; Is. 9. 8 V?£ D^Jl Vljl the people shall know all of it. I K. 18. 39 ^SV| Byri J 73 N - )^ Ex. I. 20; 4. 31, Jud. 2. 10. Gen. 41. 57 INI ^SirrTOI all the world came; 1 S. 14. 25; 17. 46, 2 S. 15. 23. Nu. 14. 35 CHjfiSn JlMtil tTTjfil this congregation that are met together. With creatures : Gen. 30. 38 ]&5fi} !~r2fctafl the flock used to come, Ps. 144. 13. So fern. pi. with 1p3, Job 1. 14; mas. pi. 1 Chr. 27. 29, cf. 1 K. 8. 5. With things: Jer. 48. 36 VflN nto^ rnr>1 the gain he has made is lost. Is. 15. 7, Hos. 9. 6, Hag. 2. 7, Ps. 119. 103. Comp. 1 S. 2. 33 increase in a personal ref. — Ex. 15. 4, Jud. 9. 36, 37 people sing, and pi., so 1 S. 13. 6, cf. vv. 15, 16. Jud. 1. 22; 9. 55, l6o HEBREW SYNTAX §116. 2 K. 2?. 5, Am. i. 5, Hos. io. 5 ; u. 7, Is. 16. 4; 19. 13. Gen. 34. 24. Nu. 20. 1 1 ; 21. 7, Job 8. 19. § 116. On the other hand, plur. of inanimate objects that may be grouped under one conception, of the lower creatures, and abstract plurals are frequently construed with fern. sing, of pred. 1 S. 4. 1 5 TV2ip Y^ST! an ^ his e y es were set, Mk. 4. 11. jo. 1. 20 ?pS« ih^0 rrfo ntorn the beasts of the field pant unto thee. Ps. 103. 5 "lttJ33 tifanrill "O'HV? thy youth is renewed like the eagle. Gen. 49. 22, Is. 34. 13; 59. 12, Jer. 4. 14; 12. 4, Mic. 1. 9, Ps. 18. 35; 37. 31, Neh. 13. 10, Job 12. 7; 14. 19; 20. 11. Cf. 2 S. 24. 13. 2 K. 3. 3 n3QD {sins of Jeroboam); 13. 11, Is. 59. 8. There is no reason for K'ri Ps. 73. 2, TOSUJ. Deu. 21. 7 is more unusual. — Sometimes when subj. precedes it is treated almost as casus pendens, and its general idea becomes subj.; Gen. 47. 24 the four fifths ("PIT it shall be. Ex. 12. 49, Ecc. 2. 7. Cf. Is. 16. 8, Hab. 3. 17. Rem. 1. General plurals are sometimes construed with sing. pred. from a tendency to individualise and distribute over every individual, or apply it to any individual supposed. Gen. 27. 29 ins I'v-'? they that curse thee shall be cursed. Nu. 24. 9, Jer. 22. 4. Ex. 31. 14, Lev, 17. 14 ; 19. 8, Zech. ii. 5, Ps. 64. 9, Pr. 3. 18, 35 ; 14. 9 ; 27. 16 ; 28. 1, 2 Chr. 10. 8 {rd. ir W). In particular a sing. suff. frequently refers back to a plur. Is. 2. 20 i-HEW "IPX which they made each for himself ', Hos. 4. 8. Deu. 21. 10; 28. 48, Is. 1. 23; 2. 8; 5. 23; 8. 20, Jos. 2. 4, Ex. 28. 3, Zech. 14. 12, Or sing, and plur. interchange, Is. 30. 22 ; 56. 5, Ps. 62. 5 ; 141. 10. Cf. Deu. 4. 37 ; 7. 3, Jud. 1. 34, 2 K. 19. 14. Sometimes sing. pron. refers back to plur. as a collective unity, Is. 17- l 3> J er - 3 1 - J S ,3 ?''" ( of Rachel's children), 2 S. 24. 13, Jos. 13. 14, and perhaps some of the exx. above. Or the pron. expresses a generalised it, Jud. 11. 34 |3 «B!3 firpx DTiK he had not besides it (her) son or daughter. Ex. 1 1. 6 like it. Rem. 2. When the compound subj. is a noun with its AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE l6l gen. agreement may be with gen. as expressing the main idea of the phrase ; or pred. being next gen. may agree with it by a kind of attraction, i K. 17. 16 Ipn *6 |D# nriBXI the cruse of oil did not fail. Is. 2. u, 1 S. 2. 4, Lev. 13.9; Job 21. 21; 29. 10; 38. 21. Attraction of gend. Jer. 10. 3, Lev. 25. 33 ; in the case of verb to be attraction by pred. Gen. 31.8, Pr. 14. 35. The pred. usually agrees with gen. after ^3 all, Hos. 9. 4, Gen. 5. 5, Ex. 15. 20, but not uni- versally, Hos. 10. 14, Is. 64. 10. Rem. 3. In nominal sent, the pred. adj. when first is sometimes uninflected, Ps. 119. 1 37 I'tpSB'D ItJ^ upright are thy judgments, cf. v. 155 ; but this is rare, except with the word ato ; Jud. 8. 2, Gen. 49. 15, 1 S. 19. 4, 2 K. 5. 12, Ps. 73. 28; 119. 72; 147. 1, Pr. 17. 1 ; 20. 23. — Gen. 47. 3 HJjft is collec, cf. Deu. 14. 7, Ezr. 3. 9, Neh. 2. 16. Rem. 4. Plurals of Eminence such as Qirbn God, D'ilK DyV3 lord, owner, when referring to a single person, are usually in concord with sing., Ex. 21. 29 TW V9JQ its owner shall be killed, Is. 19. 4 i"lB>j3 DtflK a cruel lord. When DTI^S means gods it is construed with pi., and in a few cases even when it is God, Gen. 20. 13 ; 35. 7, Ex. 22. 8, Jos. 24. 19 (E.), and sometimes in the phrase living God, Deu. 5. 23, 1 S. 17. 26, Jer. 10. 10 ; 23. 36. Words only used in pi. are occasionally joined to sing., e.g. 2 S. 10. 9 1MB as fern, sing., cf. Job 16. 16. Rem. 5. Names of nations are construed in three ways : (a) with mas. sing., the name being that of the personal ancestor, Ex. 17. 11, Is. 19. 16, Am. 1. 11, 1 Chr. 18. 5; 19. 15, 16, 18, 19. (b) Or with plur., 2 S. 10. 17, 1 K. 20. 20, 2 K. 6. 9, 1 Chr. 18. 2, 13. (c) Or with fern, sing., when the ref. is to the country or when the population is treated as a collective, often personified ; 2 S. 8. 2, 5, 6 ; 10. 11 ; 24. 9, Is. 7. 2, Jer. 13. 19, 1 Chr. 19. 12, Job 1. 15. The consns. a, b, c may interchange in the same passage. Jer. 48. 15, Am. 2. 2, 3, Hos. 14. 1, Mai. 2. n. Peculiar, Is. 18. 1, 2. Rem. 6. When there are several predicates one may be in agreement and the other left uninflected. Is. 33. 9, Mic. 1. 9, Zech. 5. 11 ; cf. on adj. § 32, R. 4. But irregularity 1 62 HEBREW SYNTAX § 117. in gend. and numb, is common, e.g. Jer. 31. 9 na . . . "IB* ^l, Zech. 6. 7. Sometimes text may be at fault, Jud. 4. 20 Toy, inf. abs. ? 1 S. 2. 20 n* W; 25. 27 nsun, c f. v. 35. In particular, vowel terminations of verbs were not always expressed in ancient texts, and are sometimes given or omitted wrongly by Mass. Ez. 18. 29 U3FP as v. 25. With 20. 38 Sia' cf. Is. 45. 24. In Lam. 5. 10 V1MJ may be due to plur. suff. in our skin, cf. 1 Chr. 24. 19, 2 Chr. 17. 14, Jer. 2. 34. Exx. of mas. for 2 fern, impf., Is. 57. 8, Jer. 3. 5, Ez. 22. 4; 23. 32; 26. 14. PARTICULAR KINDS OF SENTENCE INTERACTIONAL SENTENCE § 117. Words in direct address (the voc.) are of the form of interj. as Tj^ari king ! TjSlSri ^N my lord the king! and such phrases of entreaty as 'O'TN *%. But any words may be uttered as exclamations, 2 K. 4. 19 itpNI iffi^T my head! 11. 14 Ittjp "Ittjp treason! treason! Jer. 4. 19 my bowels! 37. 14 "ij?tt5 it's « /?V! 2 K. 9. 12. Is. 29. 16 D?3Dn your perversity ! Jer. 49. 16. Hab. 2. 19 rnV> WH it reveal! Hos. 8. 1 to thy mouth the trumpet! 2 S. 13. 12 TIn?N don't ! my brother ! Gen. 49. 4. So adverbs : tin no ! Yn well, yes ! I'itO good! well! Also the imper. of some verbs, as nin 0*V)gv to! Gen. 38. 16, Ex. 1. 10; T\h, np^ (even to a woman, Gen. 19. 32) come! More strict interjections are DH hush ! silence ! Jud. 3. 19, Am. 6. 10, Zeph. 1. 7, Hab. 2. 20, Zech. 2. 17. A verb riDH is denom. from DPI Neh. 8. 11, Nu. 13. 30. — "-JIN how ! in the Elegy, 2 S. 1. 25, 27, Hos. 11. 8 (elegiac measure), more commonly PCPltf Is. 1. 21, Lam. 1. 1. — iiN woe! with prep, h Is. 6. 5 V?-^N, 3. 9, 11, Jer. 4. 31 ; without prep. Ez. 24. 6. INTER JECTIONAL SENTENCE 1 63 In Ps. 120. 5 -h PPiN, so -h "hhto Mic. 7. i, Job 10. 15 — '•'in «w/ «/«j/ in lament for the dead, i K. 13. 30 TIN "Hn; fuller form for the king, Jer. 22. 18. In the form "in Am. 5. 16. In a more general sense, Jer. 48. 1 ; 50. 27. Also in threatening remonstrance, Is. 1. 4 NtOP! ^H '■'in Ha! sinful nation, and often in Is. — Other forms, Jo. 1. 15 D'iV? nnfr$ alas! for the day. Ez. 30. 2 Dw nn, 6. 11 HN. — An exclamation of delight, HSn Is. 44. 16; by the horse in battle, Job 39. 25 ; of malicious delight, Ps. 35. 21 ; 40. 16; 70. 4, Ez. 25. 3 ; 26. 2. The pron. 7V2 how ! what ! is used in the expression of a variety of feelings, as wonder, awe, Gen. 28. 17 ; scorn, sarcasm, 2 S. 6. 20; dislike, Mai. 1. 13 nN7flO n2n Oh what a bore ! And so % who ! Mic. 7. 1 8, &c. The particle 7XT\ also, as ^23n here I am! Gen. 18. 9 ^ntoi nan ^*r«/ *» ^ tent (is she). 16. 11 mn "nan T *■ " T T T " see thou art with child! Very passionately Job 9. 19, is it a question of strength ? n3n ! perhaps, of course ! (he is irresistible). Rem. 1. The adj. Twbnprofane (absit) ! is construed with |j of person and }D of the act repudiated. The full phrase is found 1 S. 26. u-nVp m.TD ■h rbbn, 24. 7, 1 K. 21. 3 (so rd. 2 S. 23. 17), but oftener without ''B, Gen. 44. 7, 17. The phrase acquires the force of an oath, and may be fol- lowed by DX (§ 120). 1 S. 24. 7, 2 S. 20. 20, Job 27. 5. Cf. Jos. 22. 29; 24. 16. Rem. 2. In Gen. 16. 11, &c, the consn. is mn PiK "]jn. So in Ar. with def. pred., Kor. 2. n, 12, 122. Rem. 3. In exclamatory sentences there is omission of subj. as Gen. 18. 9, or of pred. as Hos. 8. 1, to the mouth the trumpet (set ye !), 1 K. 22. 36 every man to his city (get ye !), Hos. 5. 8 T 1 ?^? T10.*? perhaps, thy rear I Benj. (sc. guard !), or behind thee B. (is the danger). The word itfp voice, sound of, is nearly hark\ Is. 13. 4; 66. 6. 164 HEBREW SYNTAX §118-120. AFFIRMATIVE SENTENCE § 1 1 8. Affirmative force is given in various ways, eg. — (i) By casus pendens, Gen. 3. 12 the woman . . . she gave me, 42. 11 (§ 106). (2) By expression of pron. either alone or with vav, D3i &c. Gen. 4. 4; 20. 5, Is. 14. 10. (3) By inf. abs. (§ 86). (4) By repetition of words, Is. 38. 19, the living, the living. Ecc. 7. 24 deep, deep, who shall find it ? Is. 6. 3, Jer. 7. 4. Affirmative particles are 71N /;-«/j/, Gen. 42. 21 73>N *tirei$ D^tttiJN z>m/j> we are guilty; 2 S. 14. 5, I K. I. 43; later a particle of contrast, Dan. 10. 7, 21. — "ijN truly, surely, Gen. 26. 9 N1H ^fltpN 1yN z'# truth she is thy wife. 1 S. 16. 6, Hos. 12. 9. So pN, Ex. 2. 14 -Q-iri 3Hi3 |3« verily the thing is known. Gen. 28. 16, 1 S. 15. 32, Is. 53. 4. Rem. 1. Also various derivatives of ps, e.^-. WON verily, in truth, 2 K. 19. 17 ; ironically Job 9. 2 ; 12. 2 verily ye are the people. Also DJDX id. (always with interrog.), Nu. 22. 37, Gen. 18. 13, 1 K. 8. 27. So H3»N, Gen. 20. 12, Jos. 7. 20. The word ^3 often strengthens. Gen. 18. 20 the cry of Sodom rf2.~) "VS (surely) it is great. Particularly in antithesis after neg. : Gen. 18. 15 £lpTO ^3 N7 nay, thou didst laugh. 1 K. 3. 22 inn ^5 ""S fcO no ! wy child is the live one. And so usually, Jos. 5. 14; 24. 21, Jud. 15. 13, 1 S. 2. 16 (^ = N^), 2 S. 16. 18 (N^V? last cl.), 1 K. 2. 30, 2 K. 3. 13 Vltf; 20. 10, Is. 30. 16, Ps. 49. II. § 1 19. The oath.— ^N, mm, OTT^M, ^« Tl « / //w, «j GW, Je. liveth ; but H'SHD, ^tt$D3 ^n tf.f //y .mm/, Phar., &c, /zWA. With pron. / and divine names the form is Tl» otherwise ^n, cf. the curious ]"! ^prpNl ^Pl Am. 8. 14 «j /Ay god, O Dan, ZtWA. — Jud. 8. 19 mrP TI. 2 S. 2. 27 DTlbNn. "TJ, Jer. 44. 26 '"» *tf7^ ^H, Job 27. 2 b^n, 1 K. AFFIRMATIVE SENTENCE l6$ 18. 10, 15. — Nu. 14. 21, 28 "ON TJ; usually this shorter form (Deu. 32. 40 ^SiN) and invariably so pointed. — 1 S. 20. 3 3$D3 TO '" , ^n, 25. 26; Gen. 42. 15, 2 S. 15. 21. § 120. The oath of denial is made by ON if —that not ; of affirmation by N7 ON if not = that, or ^S //to. 1 S. 19. 6 JTOV DM '' 1 ''Pi >^ J^a// « TJ 'wN UNIM Di^H /" will show myself to him to-day ; Is. 45. 23 T&" 1 ?? 5H?fi ll ? ^ ^3^ ^ I have sworn by myself that to me every knee shall bow. 1 S. 14. 44; 20. 3 ; 29. 6. Job 1. 11 T^'W M7 DM (I swear) he will disavow thee. Jos. 14. 9, 2 K. 9. 26. Rem. 1. The word f\K has also restrictive force, only, Gen. 18. 32 ora/y this once, 1 S. 18. 8 only the kingdom. So in sense of utterly with adj. Deu. 16. 15, Is. 16. 7. Similarly i"-> § r 53- Rem. 2. nriK TJ is not said ; 1?n fly rffcy /£/e, 2 S. n. 11, if text right. Cf. Dr. or Well, in loc. Rem. 3. Exx. of DX Gen. 21. 23, Nu. 14. 23, 1 S. 3. 14, 17; 14. 45; 17. 55; 28. 10, 2S. n. 11 ; 14. 11, 2 K. 2. 2; 3. 14; 6. 31, Is. 22. 14, Ps. 89, 36; 132. 3, 4. Of '3 1 S. 14. 39 ; 26. 16 ; 29. 6, 2 S. 3. 9, 1 K. 18. 15, 2 K. 5. 20, Jer. 22. 5. Of s6 DS Nu. 14. 28, 2 S. 19. 14, 1 K. 20. 23, Is. 5. 9; 14. 24, Jer. 15. 11. — In many cases there is no formal oath, and the particles merely express strong denial or affirmation. Ps. 131. 2. Rem. 4. The full formula DTlfo Vflfc]£ H3 GW do 50 to me, &c, occurs only in 1, 2 S., 1, 2 K., and Ru., e.£\ 1 S. 3. 17; 14. 44, 1 K. 2. 23, 2 K. 6. 31, Ru. 1. 17. The formula is followed by pos. or neg. statement. Usually V or the speaker's own name is used (1 S. 20. 13, 2 S. 3. 9) ; therefore in 1 S. 25. 22 rd. W with Sep., and possibly ^ has fallen out 1 S. 14. 44 (Sep.), but cf. 1 K. 19. 2. In 1 S. 3. 17 "1^ of person adjured. Rem. 5. When a clause intervenes before the thing 1 66 HEBREW SYNTAX §121-124. sworn »3 is often repeated, 2 S. 2. 27; 3. 9; 15. 21, 1 K. 1. 30, Jer. 22. 24, Gen. 22. 16. In DK '3 the DS is some- times merely conditional, that, if, 1 S. 14. 39, Jer. 22. 24, cf. Deu. 32. 40. In other cases the use of DN '3 is peculiar. (1) 2 S. 3. 35 with 2 K. 3. 14 seems to show that the use of 13 in the oath was customary without ref. to the pos. or neg. nature of the thing sworn (apod.). The '3, which may be repeated, merely adds force to the whole statement. (2) On the other hand, in such passages as Jud. 15. 7, 1 K. 20. 6, 2 S. 15. 21, the DK seems pleonastic. Its idiomatic use may in some way add force to the 13, though the origin of the idiom is difficult to trace. It can scarcely be the same use of DK as occurs after a neg. or exception, but ( = " yes, if"). INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE § 121. The interrog. sent, may be nominal or verbal. See exx. below. — The interrogation may be made without any particle, by the mere tone of voice. 2 S. 18. 29 1J72 7 D'ibttJ is the child well f 2 S. 11. 11 VPSL"7N fctfSN "ONT and shall 1 go to my house} 1 S. 21. 16 "ON D^SUJQ "Ipn am I in want of madmen? Gen. 18. 12; 27. 24, Jud. 14. 16, 1 S. 16.4; 22.7, 15; 25. n, 2 S. 9. 6; 16. 17; 19. 23; 23. 5, 1 K. I. 24; 2i. 7, Jon. 4. 11, Song 3. 3. Less frequently in neg. sent, 1 S. 20. 9, 2 K. 5. 26, Job 2. 10. Omission of the particle is most common in animated speech, as when any idea is repudiated, and particularly when pron. is expressed ; cf. Jud. 14. 16, 2 S. 11. 11, 2 K. 19. 11, Jer. 25. 29, Ez. 20. 31, Jon. 4. 11. § 122. When a particle is used it is generally put at the head of the clause, Gen. 3. 11. The simple question is oftenest made by n (Gr. § 49). Gen. 4. 9 "OJN TIN "TOtJJn -: • 1 T • t » -. am I my brothers keeper f 24. 58 XWT\ tl^NM Q^ ^VAlI wilt thou go with this man? Gen. 18. 17; 43. 27, 29; 45. 3, 2 S. 7. 5. — So before UP and pfc ; Gen. 24. 23 TplN jri itiYJ Y7~> 137 D'ipQ is there room for us to lodge in the house of INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE 167 thy father? Jud. 14. 3 fitfN SpHN Hlim pNft m //w*? «T\l njn^ to know whether Je. had prospered his way or not. Gen. 42. 16; 43. 7, 22, Jud. 3. 4 ; 13. 6, 1 S. 14. 17, 1 K. 1. 20. Exx. of disjunctive sent., Gen. 37. 32, Ex. 16. 4, Nu. 1 1. 23, Deu. 8. 2, Jud. 2. 22. — In the simple indirect sent. DM occurs (after to see, inquire, &c), 2 K. 1. 2, Jer. 5. 1 ; 30. 6, Mai. 3. 10, Lam. 1. 12, Ezr. 2. 59, Song 7. 13. § 126. The answer is usually made by repeating part of the question, or by the use of some word suggested by it. Gen. 29. 6 D^ttJ . . . *h DibttJrr is he well! . . . well. 24. 58 Tl|?M . . . h ?^pD wilt thou gof ...I will go. 1 S. 26. 17 ""Tip . . . *<25 i"?J TjTIprj is it thy voice, my son? it is my voice. Gen. 27. 24 13 M . . . ^3. iff HAM art thou my son ? • It ■ : v t - J I am! 2 S. 9. 2 ?pTiy . . . N2^ ftF\t*7l art thou Ziba? : : - t • t - 1- thy servant! Jud. 13. n, 1 S. 17. 58; 23. n, 12, 2 S. 2. 20; 9. 6; 12. 19, 1 K. 21. 20. To fijTT w there f &c, the pos. reply is $\ 2 K. 10. 15 (ttfn begins the next clause, § 132, R. 2), Jer. 37. 17; and the ne S- ]?«> J ud - 4- 20. The neg. reply to Ityn « afe^ ^ more? is DDM »o Traorc, Am. 6. 10, cf. 2 S. 9. 3. The neg. reply to a simple question may be W? no, Jud. 12. 5, Hag. 2. 12, 13. In Jos. 2. 4 ]3 = y«, and Gen. 30. 34 rn = well, yes (cf. Ar. 'inna in the story Kos. Aghani, pp. 13, 14). I n INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE 1 69 the reply the word that takes up the point of the question usually stands first, being emphatic. Gen. 24. 23; 27. 19, 32; 29. 4, 1 S. 17. 58. Interrog. sentences are made also by interr. pron. (§ 7, and the exx.), and by various particles. See Rem. 6. Rem. 1. The disjunctive question very rarely has n in second clause, Nu. 13. 18; sometimes Ik Job 16. 3 ; 38. 28, 31, Mai. 1. 8, Ecc. 2. 19 ; and sometimes simple ] Job 13. 7; 38. 32. Rem. 2. In animated questions particles of interr. are sometimes accumulated, Gen. 17. 17 or shall Sarah — shall one 90 years old bear? Jud. 14. 15, Ps. 94. 9; or repeated 1 S. 14. 37; 23. 11 ; 30. 8, 2 S. 5. 19. In Job 6. 13, Nu. 17. 28 the double DKH seems = nonne? In Nu. 5W ^pri means we are finished dying = are all dead (Jos. 4. 11, 1 S. 16. 11, 2 S. 15. 24), therefore : are we not dead to a man? (cf. v. 27). If Dxn were a stronger form of n, the sense would be : are we to die (have died) to a man ? but such a meaning of DKn does not suit Job 6. 13. Rem. 3. In the forms '^n is it that? ^ &OH is it not that? <3 adds force to the question. 2 S. 9. 1 ; 13. 28, Job 6. 22, cf. Deu. 32. 30. Sometimes W vividly posits a fact as ground for a real or supposed inference. Gen. 27. 36 is it that they called his name Jacob ? = well has he been called, &c. ; 29. 15, cf. 1 S. 2. 27, 1 K. 22. 3. Rem. 4. The interrogation often co-ordinates clauses when other languages would subordinate ; Is. 50. 2 why am I come and there is no man? = why, when I am come, is there, &c. 2 S. 12. 18, 2 K. 5. 12, Is. 5. 4, Am. 9. 7, Job 4. 2, 21 ; 38. 35. Rem. 5. The form of question is much used as a strong expression of declinature, repudiation of an idea, or depre- cation of a consequence. Gen. 27. 45, 1 S. 19. 17, 2 S. 2. 22; 20. 19, 1 K. 16. 31, 2 Chr. 25. 16, Ecc. 5. 5. Rem. 6. Some other interrog. particles : (a) Why? wherefore? HE)!?, ne^l, TVcb ; JWTO, ynDI ; why not? *b ns£, *b yiio.— 1 S. 19. 17 wen roa nub why hast I70 HEBREW SYNTAX §126,127. thou cheated me thus? Gen. 12. 18 7> WISH S? ITO? wAjy a^rf thou not tell me ? 1 S. 26. 15, 2 S. 16. 17; 19. 26. Ex. of JTHD Gen. 26. 27 ; 40. 7, Ex. 2. 18, 1 S. 20. 2 ; with neg. 2 S. 18. 11, Job 21. 4. — Ex. of no? why? Gen. 27. 45, Ex. 32. 11, Nu. 20. 4, Jud. 12. 3, 1 K. 2. 22. See Rem. 7. Like the pronouns, PIB7 is often strengthened by PIT (but not JTHD). Gen. 18. 13 't? PlPJnx PIT PIB7 wherefore did Sarah laugh? Gen. 25. 22, 32, Ex. 5. 22, 2 S. 18. 22; 19. 43, Job 27. 12, cf. Jud. 18. 24, 1 K. 21. 5, 2 K. 1. 5. See Rem. 8. — The simple no or PID ?y and the like are often used in the same sense, Nu. 22. 32, Is. 1. 5, Jer. 9. 11, Job 13. 14, and all these interr. particles are used as words of remonstrance, surprise, &c, and as interjections. (b) Where? ** (cons, of '»), Pl«K, PIT "K, r\b% &c; whither? ™*, '1 ^; -whence? ft??, fty? 'K. Gen. 4. 9 TPIS !>3n ^K where is Abel? Deu. 32. 37, 1 S. 26. 16. With sufF. Ex. 2. 20 i'N where is he? &c. Gen. 3. 9, Is. 19. 12, Mic. 7. 10, Nah. 3. 17. — Gen. 19. 5 D'tWKPl n>K where are the men? 18. 9; 22. 7; 38. 21, Jud. 9. 38, 2 S. 17. 20, 2 K. 2. 14. — Ex. of nb , N where? Gen. 37. 16, 2 S. 9. 4, Is. 49. 21. — Ex. of 1^0 whence? Gen. 42. 7 ; 29. 4, Nu. 11. 13, Jos. 2. 4, Jud. 17. 9, Is. 39. 3, Job 1. 7, Ps. 121. 1. — Ex. of fljD '« whence? Gen. 16. 8, Jud. 13. 6, 1 S. 25. 11, 2 S. 1. 3, 13. — Ex. of PI3X whither? Gen. 16. 8; 37. 30, 2 S. 2. 1, Is. 10. 3; cf. 1 K. 22. 24. (c) Bow? TS, n ? H *?; PIB3 (3j/ what? Gen. 15. 8); Aoto not? & T«, 2 S. 1.5 'v Picna rijn; ^k Aora dost thou know that Saul is dead? 2 S. 1. 14^020 »o^? Deu. 18. 21, Jud. 20. 3, 1 K. 12. 6, 2 K. 17. 28, Ru. 3. 18. These particles are used in remonstrance, Gen. 26. 9, Jer. 2. 23 ; repudiation or refusal, Gen. 39. 9 ; 44. 8, 34, Jos. 9. 7 ; the expression of hopelessness, &c, Is. 20. 6. The form ro^K how! usually raises the elegy, Is. 1. 21, Lam. 2. 1 ; 4. 1 ; but also yx, 2 S. 1. 19, 25, 27. (d) How many? PIB3. 2 S. 19. 35 "'fl \)£>* W PID3. Gen. 47. 8, 1 K. 22. 16, Zech. 7. 3, Job 13. 23. Also how much? Zech. 2. 6; how long? Job 7. 19, Ps. 35. 17; how often? Job 21. 17, Ps. 78. 40, 2 Chr. 18. 15. Rem. 7. The form nc6 is generally used before words NEGATIVE SENTENCE 171 beginning with any of the letters jjriN, in order to avoid the hiatus, see the ex. Rem. 6 a. There are some exceptions, e.g. 1 S. 28. 15, 2 S. 2. 22; 14. 31, Jer. 15. 18, Ps. 49. 6. Rem. 8. The particle ^K is likewise used to strengthen the question who ? or where ? &c. Gen. 27. 33, Ex. 33. 16, Jud. 9. 38, Hos. 13. 10, Is. 19. 12 ; 22. 1, Job 17. 15 ; 19. 23. NEGATIVE SENTENCE § 127. The neg. particles are ^7, 7M not, PN there is, was, not, VB lest, that not, D"U3 not yet, DDN no more, '"•£17:17 not (with infin.)j and some others, chiefly poetical. (a) The neg. N7 is used in objective statements and in commands. Gen. 45. 1 pSHrUT? ^D^ 73" 1 N7"l and J. was unable to restrain himself. 3. 1 \Xl ^ 73Q I^S^Jl fc*7 ye shall eat of no tree of the garden. On neg. interrog. fcOtl cf. § 123. — The particle 7N is the subjective neg., used sometimes in commands, oftener in dissuasion, deprecation, expression of a wish, &c. (see Juss. § 63). Gen. 19. 7 N2"7N IJTlfl ^HN do not my brethren do wrong, cf. v. 8. Gen. 43. 23, 1 S. 17. 32; 26. 20, 2 K. 18. 31, Jer. 7. 4; 9. 22, Ps. Si- 13- The usual place of the neg. is before the verb, but it may be placed before the emphatic word in the neg. clause. Gen. 45. 8 *T\to DXnnbip 0£lN N7 it was not you that sent me. Gen. 32. 29, Ex. 16". 8, 1 S. 2. 9; 8. 7, Nu. 16. 29, Neh. 6. 12, 1 Chr. 17. 4. Both \V7 and 7N are used only with perf. and impf., cf. e.g. Is. 5. 27. On imper. with neg. § 60; ptcp. § \ood; infin. § 95. On mode of expressing no, none, cf. § 11, R. 1 b. (b) The particle pM is a noun which embraces the idea of to be, being, meaning therefore not-being (opposite of ffi^ being), i.e. there is, was, not. Its natural place is before the word (noun or pron.) which it denies, and in cons, state. 172 -HEBREW SYNTAX §127,128. Gen. 20. 1 1 rrtrr D'ipaa '« mnt. V*? there is mt the f ea7 of God, &c. Gen. 37. 29; 39. 11; 41. 8, Nu. 14. 42, Jud. 21. 25. The word denied may stand for emphasis before pN, in which case the neg. is properly in the abs. in apposi- tion. Gen. 2. 5 725H PN tHNT and man was not to till. 2 K. 19 3 17177 PN nil. /^k is not strength to bring forth, Nu. 20. 5. But the cons, form, being now habitual, mostly remains in any place except at the end of a clause. Gen. 40. 8 into PN "Iflb't there is no interpreter of it ; 37. 24 ; 47. 13, Jer. 30. 13, Pr. 30. 27.— Mic. 7. 2 pM D"I«2 Ittft one upright among men there is not. Ex. 17. 7 ; 32. 32, Lev. 26. 37, Jud. 4. 20; 9. 15, 1 S. 10. 14, 1 K. 18. 10. When pers. pron. is subj. it appears as suff. Ex. 5. 10 DM Oi'? If?!) "^Sl T will not give you straw. 2 K. 17. 26 Cy? 1 WN ^^ ^ ""' know. Gen. 20. 7 ; 31. 2 ; 39. 9, Jud. 3. 25, Jer. 14. 12. So when existence is denied absolutely, Gen. 5. 24 ^^Nfi and he was not, Jer. 31. 15 ; but a subst. is put in casus pendens, and resumed by suff., Gen. 42. 36 ^p^ la^N J. is not; cf. v. 13 ; 37. 30. With a clause, Gen. 37. 29 "YiM. *pV PN Jos. was not in the pit. 44. 31, Nu. 14. 42. (c) The telic neg. IB that not, lest, is usually joined to impf. and prefixed immediately to the verb. It expresses the motive of action in previous clause, and hence is much used: 1. After imper. (juss., coh.) and neg. clause. Gen. 3. 3 VinnJTiS fa WSn toS ye shall not touch it lest ye die. 19. 17; 38. 23, Ex. 5. 3, Jud. 18. 25, 2 S. 1. 20, Is. 6. 10. 2. After words of fearing, expressed or understood. Gen. 32. 12 I fear him "<33m Wil^lS lest he come and smite me, 26. 7, 9. Gen. 3. 22 *fV nSttJ^S iinjn, 19. 19. Frequently in this sense after *W2N to say, think. Gen. 38. 1 1 "VpN ""S fcWl DH fYlO' r '|E) for he thought, Lest he die too, 31. 31 ; 42. 4, Nu. 16. 34, Deu. 32. 27. — Also after beware, Gen. 31. 24 ISpJTlQ ?!/ ~Vp^rr beware not to speak; 24. 6, Deu. 4. 23, NEGATIVE SENTENCE 173 and often in Deu. — Sometimes in the sense of Lat. ne in an independent sent., Ex. 34. 1 5 HH5, n^S^"]? 1 ne ineas pactum. Is. 36. 1 8, Jer. 51. 46, Job 32. 13 say not! (d) The neg. D")t3 not yet is usually joined to impf. even when referring to the past. Gen. 19. 4 113^ DltO they were not yet lain down. Gen. 2. 5 ; 24. 45, Ex. 10. 7, Jos. 2. 8, 1 S. 3. 3 (in v. 7 rd. perhaps yV). — The word DDM (DDN to be done) means ceasing, being done, no more, nothing. Is. 5. 8 D'lpft Dp Si 1^ till there be no more place. 2 S. 9. 3 ti^N Ti37 DD^n is there none still remaining? Am. 6. 10 DEN . . . "nQ^ Ti^H are there any still there? no more! With prep. Is. 52. 4 for nothing, 40. 17 of nothing. Cf. Is. 45. 14 ; 46. 9, Pr. 26. 20 (prep.). In Zeph. 2. 15, Is. 47. 8, 10 "'DON has junctive vowel (not suff.), I am, and none besides (me). § 1 28. The double neg. adds force to the negation. Zeph. 2. 2 N'il 1 '^? D"}??^ before it does not come. Ex. 14. 11 Qvpp pN ■'blDi! is it because there are no graves (Vo is causative), 2 K. 1. 3, 6, 16. The prep. ]p away from, so as not to be, &c, has neg. force, and is often joined with pleonastic pM. Is. 6. 1 1 Ittfii pN?p so that there shall be no (= without) inhabitant, Is. 5. 9; Jer. 4. 7. Cases like Is. SO. 2 D?E p«£. Jer. 7. 32 dipfp pfctt? are different : from there being (because there is) no water, &c, comp. Rem. 5. The text of 1 K. 10. 21 is not above suspicion, owing to use of Hth with ptcp. (2 Chr. 9. 20 omits N~>). Rem. 1. The neg. t^> is used as privative in forming compounds : (a) with nouns, ?N k? a no-god, Deu. 32. 21, cf. v. 17; fc^S? *& (one) not-man, Is. 31. 8; J*V vb (what is) not-wood, Is. 10. 15 ; 13"! K? a no-thing, Am. 6. 13, cf. Hos. 1. 9 ; 2. 25. (5) With adj., as D3H t6 unwise, Hos. 13. 13, Tpn xi> impious, Ps. 43. I, cf. Pr. 30. 25 not-strong, 2 K. 7. 9 . — With prep. SOS without, Nu. 35. 22, 23 (inf.), Ez. 22. 29, cf. Isa. 55. i, 2, Lev. 15. 25. — Job 26. 2 nb &6? 174 HEBREW SYNTAX § 128, 129. the not-strenglh, strengthless, abstract noun for adj. (or to be resolved into ft rfc-*6 "W^), Is. 5. 14. Rem. 2. Theneg. ?N withjuss. &c, sometimes expresses merely the subjective feeling and sympathy of the speaker with the act. Is. 2. 9 D[6 K&PT7&0 and thou canst not forgive them. Jer. 46. 6, Ps. 41, 3; 50. 3; 121. 3; 141. 5, Job 5. 22 ; 20. 17, Pr. 3. 25, Song 7. 3, cf. the strong ex. Ps. 34. 6. In strong deprecation with ?N the verb is occasion- ally suppressed or deferred to a second clause, 2 S. 13. 12 'ntOS don't ! my brother, v. 25 , ?3"?K nay ! my son. Gen. 19. 18, Jud. 19. 23, 2 S. 1. 21, 2 K. 4. 16, Ru. 1. 13, Is. 62. 6. In other cases the verb has to be supplied from the previous clause, Am. 5. 14 seek good JH vW and not evil ! Jo. 2. 13, Pr. 8. 10 ; 17. 12. The word is used absolutely, in deprecation of something said, 2 K. 3. 13, Gen. 33. 10. —2 K. 6. 27 s W&l&X perhaps, ifje. help thee not! For $X 1 S. 27. 10 rd. 'P - ?** (Sep.) or JK whither? — In com- position bti is little used, Pr. 12. 28 A]?"- 5 ^ not-death, immortality. Rem. 3. The particle ps frequently forms abbreviated circums. clauses, as 1BDD pN (there is) no number, without number, countless, § 140. In this sense «!> in poetry, 2 S. 23. 4 ni3V K? "IJ3j1 a morning without clouds ; Job 10. 22 without order, 12. 24; 38. 26, Ps. 59. 4; in prose, 1 Chr. 2. 30, 32 D'33 SO childless. — Ps. 135. 17 the stronger B* T?, 1 S. 21. 9, cf. Job 9. 33. — From the semiverbal force of pN a late writer can say D?ns px, Hag. 2. 17. In two passages, Jer. 38. 5, Job 35. 15, p« seems used with finite verb. — A contracted form is *K in composition, 1 S. 4. 21 Itor'N not-glory, inglorious, Job 22. 30 , i?J" , 8< not innocent. This is the usual form of neg. in Eth. On ^ p« with inf. §95- Rem. 4. The form E'. , ."]| occurs owing to the verbal force of E», Deu. 29. 17, 2 K. 10. 23. With perf. JB expresses what is feared may have happened, 2 K. 2. 16 ; 10. 23, 2 S. 20. 6. Rem. 5. In Poetry, fe = t6 not, Hos. 7. 2 Vtt?# b» ffwrf they say not. 9. 16, Is. 14. 21; 26. 10, 11, 14, 18. Often with niph. of QID, Ps. 10. 6 ; 16. 8 ; 21. 8, &c. With inf. THE CONDITIONAL SENTENCE 175 Ps. 32. 9 3i"ip 73 (when) there is not coming nigh (they do not come)— ^3 = i6 or pK. With finite vb. Is. 14. 6, Hos. 8. 7; 9. 16 (Cod. Petrop. $>3), Job 41. 18 (once in prose, Gen. 31. 20). With adj. 2 S. 1. 21, 5 D| (DM Da rare, Eccl. 8. 17). § 130. («) When the supposition expresses a real con- tingency of any degree of possibility, the most common form is impf. in prot. and vav conv. perf. or simple impf. in apod., the impf. having any of the shades of sense proper to it (§ 43 seg.). The impf. must be used in apod, when the verbal form cannot stand first in the clause, as in a neg. sent., or when apod, precedes the protasis, cf. Am. 9. 2-4. — Jud. 4- 8 ^M M7 "oVp M7-DM] ITC^m "«By ^b$ DM if tkou wilt go with me / will go, but if thou wilt not go with me [will not go. 2 K. 4. 29 12p^jl]p M7 tt^M"MS)?n "»? *//&w meetest anyone thou shalt not salute him. Gen. 18. 28 MSDMIDM rvntiJN M7 /" wz'// w/ destroy if I find. 13. 16 TOE'' ^3Trt Da . . . ni3D7 ttf'M ^ DM if one could count the dust, thy seed also might be counted. Of course a ptcp. may take the place of impf., Gen. 43. 4, 5 nVttJQ TJttJ^DM TO M7 nVttJD WWDNI ima ?/ ^ 5°\ 57 shows that the use of perf. or impf. is merely a matter of mental conception. Comp. Lev. 17. 4 with 9, Num. 30. 6 with 9. Job 17. 13, 14. Probably the difference of use had become a mere matter of style, although the perf. has in it something more forcible and lively. Cf. Job 31 throughout. In many cases the supposition refers to an actual past fact anterior to the speaker's position, or to the main action spoken of; or refers to something which shall have come to light through inquiry or inspection. In all such cases theflerf will be used in the protasis. 1 S. 26. 19 fry ^rVpn 'i DM nrtJQ if Je- has set thee on, let him smell an offering ( = if it be je. that has); Jud. 9. 19 Vflpto DJTto^ riDM£ DM if ye have dealt justly, rejoice. Ex. 22. 1, 2 DM . . . 23Sil M2Q^ DM UJDCjn nrpt if the thief be found in the act . . . if the sun have risen, &c. Deu. 17. 2, 3 . . . HtoJ£ "IttJM UPM MSB? "0 If"?*"! if a man be found who does evil . . . and has gone and served (having gone). With Ex. 22. 2 cf. 21. 36 (iM). Lev. 4. 23; 5. 1, Nu. 5. 19, 20, 27; 15. 24; 22. 20, Deu. 22. 20, 2i, 1 S. 21. S, Is. 28. 25, Am. 3. 3, 4; 7. 2, Ps. 41. 7; 44. 21 ; 50. 18, Job 8.4; 9. 15, 16; 31. S,9»2i, 24, 33; 34. 32. Narratives of past frequentative actions are also often introduced by DM with perf. (§ 54, R. 1). Gen. 38. 9, Nu. 21. 9, Jud. 2. 18 ; 6. 3. More rarely DM and impf., Gen. 31. 8, Ex. 40. 37. 12 173 HEBREW SYNTAX § 130, 181. (c) The protasis is often of considerable length, and has a tense-secution within itself which must be distinguished from the apod, of the whole sentence. This tense-secution is the usual one. Gen. 28. 20 irjDttft "HOy '« rPiTj dN "• rP!Tl . . . VUlttJ 1 ) irOl if God will be with me, and keep me, and give me, and I return . . . then shall J e. be my God. Deu. 13. 2 yatpn vh . . . rrtMn mm rrtM jni] traa nip; •*> «y # prophet shall arise and give a sign, and the sign come true . . . thou shalt not listen. Nu. 5. 27 75ft?Wl !1N??B3 dN 1N3.1 . . . if she has been defiled and trespassed . . . then shall come, &c. Gen. 43. 9 (secution of fut. perf. of imagination is that of impf., § 51, R. 2); 46. 33, 34, Jud. 4. 20, 1 S. 1. 11 ; 12. 14, 15; 17.9, 2 S. 15. 34. 1 K. 9. 6; 11. 38; 12.7. Rem. 1. Additional exx. — DX and impf. in prot., with vav perf. in apod. : Gen. 24. 8; 32. 9, Ex. 13. 13 ; 21. 5, 6; 21. 11, Nu. 21. 2, Jud. 14. 12, 13; 21. 21, 1 S. 12. 15; 20. 6, 1 K. 6. 12 ; coh. after nx Job 16. 6. With impf. in apod.: Gen. 30. 31; 42. 37, Ex. 20. 25, 1 S. 12. 25, 1 K. I. 52, Is. 1. 18-20; 7. 9; 10. 22, Am. 5. 22; 9. 2-4, Ps. 50. 12. With '3 in prot. : Gen. 32. 18 ; 46. 33, Ex. 21. 2, 7, 20, 22, 26, 28; 22. 4, 6, 9, Deu. 13. 13; 15. 16; 19. 16 5^., Josh. 8. 5, 1 S. 20. 13, 2 S. 7. i2, 1 K. 8. 46, 2 K. 18. 22, Jer. 23. 33, Hos. 9. 16, Ps. 23. 4; 37. 24; 75. 3, Job 7. 13. With ncx, Lev. 4. 22, Josh. 4. 21, 1 K. 8. 31. — Various forms of apod. : Gen. 4. 7 ; 24. 49 ; 27. 46 ; 30. 1 ; 31. 50, Ex. 8. 17; 10. 4; 33. 15, Jud. 9. 15, 1 S. 19. 11; 20. 7, 21 ; 21. 10, Is. 1. 15 ; 43. 2, Jer. 26. 15, Ps. 139. 8. Ex. 8. 22 (p in prot.). Rem. 2. Impf. with simple vav in apod, is less common, Gen. 13. 9, Josh. 20. 5. Rem. 3. The prot. is often strengthened by inf. abs., but only with DK and impf., not with >3 nor with perf. Ex. 2i. 5; 22. 3, 11, 12, 16, Nu. 21. 2, Deu. 8. 19, Jud. II. 30, 1 S. 1. n; 20. 6, 7, 9, 21 (§ 86). So with |n Is. 54. 15. The DN may be strengthened by <3. — Inf. abs. THE CONDITIONAL SENTENCE 179 with perf. after sif> 1 S. 14. 30. — The apod, is also many times strengthened by 13, Is. 7. 9, Jer. 22. 24. Rem. 4. Instead of the natural calm apod, with vav perf. or impf. the more animated perf. (of certainty, § 41) may occur, expressing the immediateness or certainty of the result; 1 S. 2 16 ^n^ &6"DN1 and if not, I -will take it. Nu. 32. 23, Jud. 15. 7, Job 20. 14, Ps. 127. 1. Comp. vav conv. impf., Ps. 59. 16, Job 19. 18. Two perfs. Pr. 9. 12 ; with "lE'SS Gen. 43. 14, Est. 4. 16 ; cf. Mic. 7. 8. — Cases like Nu. 16. 29, 1 S. 6. 9, 1 K. 22. 28 are different, being- elliptical. 1 S. 6. 9 if it go up by Beth. 1Tl"1? Sin he has done it = ye shall know that he, &c. ; cf. next clause. Rem. 5. The conditional particle usually stands first, the order being, particle, verb, subj. ; but words may come between part, and verb if emphatic, and oftener with DX than 13. In the casuistry of the Law (P) the subj. curiously precedes the particle in the principal clause. Lev. 4. 2 NDnrpa ty'W, Lev. 5. 1, 4, 15; 7. 21; 12. 2; 13. 2 and often; Num. 9. 10; 27. 8; 30. 3, 4; cf. Ez. 14. 9, 13; 18. 5, 18 ; 33. 2, 6, 9. In subordinate clauses the usual order is found, Lev. 13. 42, &c. Comp. the older order Ex. 22. 4, 5, 6, 9, 13, and often; but cf. Is. 28. 15, 18, 1 K. 8. 37, Ps. 62. 11. In the group of Laws Ex. 21 seq. the principal supposition is made by 13 and the subordinate details follow with DX or tlKl, Ex. 21. 2-5, 7— 11, &c. § 131. Hypothetical sent. — Actions not realised in the past, or considered not realisable (or unlikely) in the pres. or fut. may be made the subject of supposition. In this case *|~> (yO) if and \?h (NTD) if not, unless, are used. (a) In the case of past actions the perf. stands both in prot. and apod. (§ 39 d). Jud. 13. 23 n^S i*7 WTOD^ V?0 ^ *f he had wished to kill us he would not have taken, 8. 19; Gen. 31. 42 vtfinVaJ nny ^ h rr»n na tt^n hh unless the God of my father had been for me, surely thou hadst sent me away empty, 43. 10. — Nu. 22. 33 (rd. 'h'Si), Jud. 14. 18, 1 S. 14. 30 (apod, interrog.); 25. 34, 2 S. 2. 27, Is. 1. 9, Ps. l80 HEBREW SYNTAX § 181, 132. 94. 17; 119. 92 (both nominal prot.); 106. 23. Nu. 22. 29 may be opt., or, if there had been . . . I would have slain. See Opt. sent. (b) When supposition refers to pres. or fut. the apod, is usually impf., 2 S. 18. 12 i"P nVtpN'N 1 ? . . . ^U5 ^N *h if I weighed 1000 shekels on my palms / would not put forth my hand, 2 K. 3. 14 ; Deu. 32. 29 ifasfep lOpjl iS */ /fey zew£ wise they would perceive this, Job 16. 4; Mic. 2. 11, Ps. 81. 14. 2 S. 19. 7 (nominal prot. and apod.). Rem. 1. Ez. 14. 1 5 lf> = DN, just as DK = i$> Ps. 73. 15. — Ps. 44. 21 perhaps, if we forgot -mould he not search? Job 10. 14. Gen. 50. 15 lb impf., ot action feared but depre- cated. Deu. 32. 27 'hb impf. in prot. may be action generalised in past, or extending into pres. Ps. 124. 1, 2 seems to approach the Ar. laula, but for with a noun ; at anyrate the rel. here is not a conj. as in Aram, ellu lo d, unless that. Rem. 2. The TK, nny in the apod., originally temporal, have become often merely logical. Both are good, Gen. 31. 42; 43. 10, 2 S. 2. 27, cf. Job 11. 15. 16, Pr. 2. 5. The ^3 strengthens, Job 8. 6; but in some cases this <3 seems resumption of O of oath, 1 S. 25. 34, 2 S. 2. 27. This kind of apod, occurs with no formal prot., the prot. having to be supplied from the connection ; e.g. after neg., 1 S. 13. 13 thou hast not kept; (if thou hadst) then he •mould have estab- lished; or an interr., Job 3. 13 why breasts that 1 should suck? (if not) then I should have lain down ; or a gerundive inf., 2 K. 13. 19 percutiendum erat sexies, then thou wouldst have smitten Aram. Ex. 9. 15, Job. 13. 19. This kind of apod. with tx, fK "O, nnj; *3 is common in Job. § 132. What is equivalent to a cond. sent, often occurs without any cond. particle, {a) An idiomatic sent, of this kind is made by vav conv. perf. both in prot. and apod. This is chiefly in subordinate clauses. Gen. 44. 22 1T5H fiDl VINTM if he leave his father he will die (lit., and he THE CONDITIONAL SENTENCE 151 will leave, and he will die). Ex. 4. 14 i^ n^O\ ^fcO"! when he sees thee he will be glad in his heart. Gen. 33. 13 ; 42. 38; 44.4, 29, Ex. 16. 2i, Nu. 14. 1$; 23. 20, 1 S. 16. 2; 19- 3 5 25. 31, 2 S. 13. S, 1 K. 8. 30; 18. 10 (if they said No, he took an oath of them), 2 K. 7. 9, Is. 21. 7, Jer. 18. 4, 8; 20. 9, Pr. 3. 24. This vav perf. may have any of the senses proper to it, e.g. frequentative, Ex. 16. 21 ; 33. 10, 1 S. 14. 52, 1 K. 18. 10, Jer. 20. 9. — Of course if vav cannot be joined to the verb, impf. will be used in either clause, Nu. 23. 20 ^"}^\ TlEPVJitL H7T if he blesses I cannot reverse it; 2 K. 18. 21 Nil fOif ti^N 'TOD -1 ^ttfN on which if one lean it goes into T T T * ' " T • his hand. Deu. 22. 3, 1 S. 20. 13, Jos. 22. 18, Is. 29. 11, 12, Prov. 6. 22 (no and in apod.). More vigorously an imper. for second perf., 1 S. 29. 10. (Ji) Two corresponding imper. often form a virtual cond. sent., Gen. 42. 18 VHT < W% f\NT this do and -live (if ye do, ye shall), Is. 8. 9 ^firn VTfNrin though ye gird yourselves ye shall be broken. Juss. or coh. may take place of imp., Gen. 30. 28, Is. 8. 10. Two juss. are less usual, Ps. 104. 20: 147. 18, Job 10. 16; 11. 17, cf. Is. 41. 28. Rem. 1. In the case of two imper. of course both are expressions of the will of the speaker ; he wills the first and he wills the second as the consequence of the first. Similarly in the case of two jussives (§ 64 seq.). It is only to our different manner of thought that a condition seems expressed. Rem. 2. Such words as IK'S he - who, whoever, *&, 1K/K 'O -whoever, and similar phrases form virtually con- ditional sentences, Jud. 1. 12; 6. 31, Mic. 3. 5. And the conj. and without any particle may introduce a cond. sent., e.g. with £?., &, ^H, &c. Jud. 6. 13 WBJ? '' m if then Je. be with us. So 2 K. 10. 15 B^J if it be (a larger accent should be on first B><). Similarly the neg. SO) if not, 2 S. 13. 26, 2 K. 5. 17. — Is. 6. 13 P13 IVfl. if there be still in it a tenth. 2 K. 7. 9 DWD «rU(N. Cf. 2 S. 19. 8 N^ 13"N , 3. But in lively speech aided by intonation almost any direct 1 82 HEBREW SYNTAX §132-135. form of expression without particles may be equivalent to what in other languages would be a conditional, i. Impf. — Hos. 8. 12 '3BTU . . . arns though I wrote . . . they would be considered; so Is. 26. 10. Ps. 139. 18 cnst?? w« I to count them; 141. 5 should the righteous smite ; 104. 22, 27— 30, Jud. 13. 12, Pr. 26. 26 ; two impf. Song 8. 1. Coh., Ps. 40. 6 HTaX if I would declare, Ps. 139. 8, 9, Job 19. 18. With run, i S. 9. 7 behold we will, go (= if we go), Ex 8. 22. — Cf. Ps. 46. 4 ; 109. 25 ; 146. 4, Is. 40. 30. 2. Perf. — Am. 3. 8 JKB> nns z/ Me /zb« raara. Job 7. 20 ■TlKtpn &? it I have sinned. Ps. 139. 18 if I awake. Pr. 26. 12 ITS"! seest thou. Nu. 12. 14, Ps. 39. 12, Job 3; 25 ; 19. 4 ; 23. 10. With run, 2 S. 18. 1 1, Hos. 9. 6, Ez. 13. 12 ; 14. 22; 15. 4. And if perf. naturally also vav impf., Jer. 5. 22, Ps. 139. 11. Ex. 20. 25, Job 23. 13, Pr. 11. 2. Two perf., Pr. 18. 22, Mic. 7. 8. 3. The ptcp. — Is. 48. 13 '3K N?.p if I call they stand up. 2 S. 19. 8. Ptcp. with art. (or in consn.) whoever, 2 S. 14. 10, Gen. 9. 6, Ex. 21. 12, 16 and often. Frequently in Prov., e.g. 17. 13 ; 18. 13 ; 27. 14 ; 29. 21, &c. Particularly ptcp. with i>3 all; 1 S. 2. 13, Ex. 19. 12, Nu. 21. 8, Jud. 19. 30, 2 S. 2. 23, 2 K. 21. 12. With run 1 K. 20. 36, 2 K 7. 2, Ex. 3. 13. 4. Inf. abs. — Pr. 25. 4, 5 D'J'B '^ if dross be removed, 12. 7. Inf. cons, with prep., Pr. 10. 25 (2 S. 7. 14, 1 K. 8. 33, 35). Ps. 62. 10 ni?y? D^fKDa /o go up (or, at going up = if they are put) upon the balance. THE OPTATIVE SENTENCE § 133. The wish may be expressed by impf. (juss., coh.), 2 S. 18. 32 ''inN "O^ "l$T33 1V£ way the enemies of my lord be as that young man. With or without N2, 2 S. 24. 14 MaTlSa? let us fall; 1 S. 1. 23 S~S2?) '•» Qj£ may Je. establish. By imper., or part, (without cop.), Gen. 3. 14 HfiN THN may est thou be cursed, Is. 12. 5 il^f ,H3H^E! may this be known. With omission of verb, Gen. 27. 13 on me be thy curse ! 1 S. 25. 24, Ps, 3. 9. THE OPTATIVE SENTENCE 1 83 § 134. Opt. particles. — The common opt. part, is t7, less usually QX. The perf. or impf. will be used according to reference. Nu. 14. 2 ft Y^Nl 13EV5 1? would we had died in the land of Egypt ; Nu. 20. 3, Jos. 7. 7. Is. 63. 19 D^ftttJ frjnS NV? would thou hadst rent (i.e. wouldst rend, — • - x T : —It perf. caused by the importunity. So 48. 18 — hardly a real past).— With impf., Gen. 17. 18 TNtf. 'tth *b O that Ishmael might live ; Job 6. 2 itoya h$&] Tipltf V? O that my trouble were weighed (apod. T\P!$ ^). With imper., Gen. 23. 13; ptcp., Ps. 81. 14.— Ps. 139. 19 ytth ^tDpfi DN that thou wouldst kill the wicked. Ps. 81.9; 95. 7 ; Pr. 24. 1 1. § 135. An interrog. sent, with ift who? expresses a wish. 2 S. 23. 15 D^ft "OpJiP ^0 that I had water to drink! (lit., who will let me drink !). Ps. 4. 7 2il3 *DNT ift that we saw some success! Nu. 11. 4, 2 S. 15. 4, cf. Mai. 1. 10. — Particularly the phrase Mrp "ift ze^W !* JW , D that God woidd speak (anomalous order perhaps due to emph. on God). (4) Simple impf., Job 6. 8 ; 13.5; 14. 13; impf. with vav, Job 19. 23 ; vav conv. perf., Deu. 5. 26 1 84 HEBREW SYNTAX §136,137. O that this mind of theirs might be to them (always), to fear, &c. With perf. Job 23. 3 (stative v.). CONJUNCTIVE SENTENCE § 136. The uses of the conjunction and are various. On vav conv., § 46 seq. On vav of purpose after imper. &c, § 64 seq. On vav apod, in conditional sent., § 1 30 seq. ; after casus pendens, &c, § 50, 56. On various senses of vav in circumstantial cl., § 137. On vav of equation, § 151. The conjunc. vav, used to connect words, sometimes stands before each when there is a number of them : Gen. 20. 14; 24. 35, Deu. 12. 18; 14. 5, Jos. 7. 24, 1 S. 13. 20, Hos. 2. 20, 2i, Jer. 42. 1 ; or only with the concluding words of a series, Gen. 13. 2, 2 K. 23. 5, e.g. with the last of three; or only with second, Deu. 29. 22, Job 42. 9 ; or sometimes the words are disposed in pairs, Hos. 2. 7. Both . . . and is expressed by DJl . . . D3 or Ml . . . DH. Gen. 24. 25 WlE3pQ"D2 JIJTDS both straw and provender. Or with several words, 43. 8 12SB DS PFflN"Da 13tf2N _ D:i both we and thou and our children. Jud. 8. 22. — 1 S. 2. 26 '" r Dy D3 D^JN'Oy 0X[ both with Je. and with men. — Gen. 44. 16; 47. 3, 19, Nu. 18. 3, Zeph. 2. 14. — Gen. 24. 44, 1 S. 12. 14; 26. 25. When influenced by a « "> B*l If J e . be with us, Why . . .? Ex. 2. 20 i'KI Where is he ? Nu. 12. 14; 20. 3, 1 S. 10. 12; 15. 14, 2 S. 18. 11, 12, 23; 24. 3, 1 K. 2. 22, 2 K. 1. 10; 2. 9 ; 7. 19. Peculiar 2 S. 15. 34 *13J> TNO *JR1 1'3K thy father's servant — Afcatf was /formerly, &c. In the specimens of letters preserved, the salutation and compliments appear omitted, and the letter begins nnvi. and now, 2 K. 5.6; 10. 2, as Ar. 'amma ba'du. CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSE § 137. The cir. cl. expresses some circumstance or con- comitant of the principal action or statement. Such a circumstance will generally be concerning the chief subject (whether gramm. subj. or obj.) of the main action, but the subj. of cir. cl. may be different, provided what is said of it be circumstantial of the main action — whether modal of it or contemporaneous with it. 1 86 HEBREW SYNTAX §138,139. The cir. cl. differs from ace. of condition (§ 70) in being a proposition. It forms a real predication, subordinate to the principal sent, in meaning but co-ordinate in construction. Though often corresponding to the classical absolute cases the construction is different. The cir. cl. may be nominal or verbal, though it is chiefly nominal, and even when verbal the order of words is that of the nominal sent. (§ 103). In such a clause the subj. is naturally prominent, hence it stands first, the order being — vav, subj., pred. This simple vav may need to be rendered variously, as if, while, when, seeing; though, with a verb, or with before a noun. Besides the and a pron. referring back to the subj. of the principal sent, usually connects the clauses (see exx. below). Occasionally the subj. is repeated from the main clause, Deu. 9. 15 and the mountain, Gen. 18. 17, 18, Jud. 8. 11, 1 K. 8. 14. § 138. (a) The cir. cl. may be nominal. Gen. 11. 4 n312 D^nttJl 'ittfN-n blSO let us build a tower with its head in - t- : t: • the heavens. 24. 1 5 behold Rebecca tTO5ffi"7y iTTSI MN2 S coming out with her pitcher on her shoulder (lit. and her pitcher was, &c). I S. 18. 23 ipJN") Ij^Ql \TT\T\7\ Jl^n ttJTUW is it a light thing to be son-in-law of the king when I am a poor man ? Jer. 2. 37 Tjtt)fcO"7y TT^) *$¥$ ^ ou shalt come out with thy hands upon thy kead. Gen. 18. 12, 27; 20. 3; 24. 10; 37. 2; 44. 26, 30, Jos. 17. 14, Jud. 19. 27, Hos. 6. 4, Jer, 2. 11, Am. 3. 4-6. [b) Naturally the graphic ptcp. is much used in such descriptive clauses. Is. 6. 1 I saw Adonai sitting VvlttJl SaTTpTIN D^nSt? with his train filling the temple. 1 S. 4. 12 D^jnj? YHD1 ttm Y"Yn there ran a man with his garments rent. Gen. 15. 2 vyi-jjj *^?\T\ "OSNl ^"JflfrTTO seeing T go childless? Is. 53. 7 rnjtt fcWT] t?M he was oppressed, though he was submissive ; cf. v. 1 2 though (while) he bore. Is. 11. 6 a little child leading them. Gen. 14. 13; CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSE 1 87 18. I, 8, 10; 19. i ; 25. 26; 28. 12; 32. 32; 44. 14, Jud. 3. 20; 4. 1 ; 6. 11 ; 13. 9, 20, 1 S. 10. 5; 22. 6, 1 K. 1. 48; 22. 10, Is. 49. 21 ; 60. 11, Nah. 2. 8. (c) The cir. cl. may be verbal with subj. first. Gen. 24. 56 "T-n/n D^n Hlrf,! "Tift Virj^Jr^N delay me not wkenje. has prospered my journey. I K. 1. 41 the guests heard 73^7 'I ?3 Dm. as they had just finished dinner. Gen. 26. 27 why are ye come to me *>ni$ OfifcWlp OfiNl when ye hate me? Ru. 1. 21. Jud. 16. 31 he having judged. — Gen. 18. 13; 24. 31, Ex. 33. 12, Jud. 4. 21 ; 8. 11, Jer. 14. 15. Gen. 34. 5, Am. 3. 4-6. § 1 39. Small emphatic words like negatives may precede the subj., e.g. in the frequent y$T NTl unawares (lit. and they, &c, do not know), Is. 47. 11, Job 9. 5, cf. 24. 22, Ps. 35. 8, Pr. 5.6. So frequently with pN, Is. 17. 2 Tnrjp pW) 133^1 they shall lie down, none making them afraid, Lev. 26. 6. Is. 13. 14 yaj3$ ptf], Jer. 9. 21 *)DM? fW, 4- 4. 2 K. 9. 10, Pr. 28. 1, Is. 45. 4, 5, cf. Pr. 3. 28. In particular, it is characteristic to place the pred., when a prep, with suff., or a prep, with its complement, before the subj. Jud. 3. 16 JTi^D ^y0 Pr?"! 3"}H toJVH he made a dagger having two edges. 2 S. 16. 1 a pair of saddled asses O^lND EiTbjft □n^ with WO loaves upon them. Is. 6. 6 "]n "rnN *)J?V} ns!H iTll D-'Q'li&n there flew one of the S. with a hot stone in his hand. 2 S. 20. 8, Ez. 40. 2, Am. 7. 7, Zech. 2. 5. But also in other cases, Ps. 60. 13 DIM rCflttJfl fcrjUft /or vain is the help of man. But cf. Ps. 149. 6. Rem. 1. The nominal sent, seems in certain cases in- verted, pred. standing first, particularly in statements of, weight, measure, &c. Gen. 24. 22 he took a nose ring \?\M>1? yp3 its weight a beka. Jud. 3. 16 he made a dagger rl3"}N ipb its length a cubit. The general rule in the nominal sent, is that the determined word is subj. ; if both be de- termined the more fully determined is subj. Cf. § 103. 1 88 HEBREW SYNTAX § 140, 141. The view of pred. and subj. was perhaps not always the same as ours, cf. Amr, Mu'all. 1. 31. § 140. The cir. cl., however, is frequently introduced without and. Ex. 12. 11 D^an D^TO info ^5^Jjl ye shall eat it with your loins girt. Jer. 30. 6 ^JYWT V*\TO V27IT7V VT 1 "122T7D why see I every man with his hands upon his loins} Gen. 12. 8 D"Q 7NTPa !l7n« CI he pitched his tent, Bethel being on the west. 32. 12 NiH^'jS QV&"~)y DSt "^SiTI l est ne come and smite me, mother with children. Deu. 5. 4 ll"! D" , 2Q!3. D^S /«« &> /«« he spoke. Gen. 32. 31, Jud. 6. 22, Nu. 12. 8 mouth to mouth, Jer. 32. 4, 1 S. 26. 13, Jud. 15. 8, Is. 30. 33 ; 59. 19. Especially with shortened expressions. 2 S. 1 8. 14 1711 VT 13"rt3J 2N into the heart of Absalom when still alive. Ex. 22. 9, 13 STNh PSS . . . r>D1 and it die, none seeing it, Am. 5. 2, and often, as Ex. 21. 11 F)p3 V'SI without money. Is. 47. 1 throneless, Jer. 2. 32 numberless. Hos. 3. 4; 7. 11. Ps. 88. 5. Gen. 43. 3, 5. Rem. 1. It is possible that such phrases as face to face, nyitjt D*3K with face to the ground Gen. 19 1, mouth to mouth and the like, may now be adverbial ace. Originally at any rate they were real propositions, face was to face, faces were groundwards, &c. So Ar. says, I spoke to him_/iihu (nom.) 'ila fiyya, his mouth (was) to my mouth ; but alsoyizhu (ace.) 'ila fiyya, with his mouth to my mouth. Similarly in Gen. 43. 3 D3ns da^nt? w3, w3 is a conj., not a prep., except your brother be, &c. § 141. The subordinate character of the cir. cl. is generally shown by its place after the principal sent. In some cases, however, the concomitant event is placed first, with the effect of greater vividness. Gen. 42. 35 ilSIT) . . . O^THl? Oil TTl and it was, they were emptying their sacks, and behold, &c, i.e. as they were emptying, behold. 15. 17 JfNJi BJftttJn "'IT;! CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSE 1 89 nsrn and it was, the sun had gone down, and behold, i.e. the sun having gone down. 2 K. 2. 1 1 ; 8. 5 ; 13.21; 1 9. 37 ; 20. 4, 1 s. 23. 26; 25. 20 (rpm = vpi, so 2 s. 6. 16), 1 k. 18. 7; 20. 39, 40. In ref. to fut. I K. 1 8. 12. The relation of the two events (concomitant and principal) to one another is still more vividly expressed when the clauses containing them are placed parallel to one another, with no introductory formula like and it was. Gen. 44. 3 *in yty D^tpiNrfj TIN "IJI&PT the morning broke, and the men were let go, i.e. when the morning broke (had broken) the men, &c. 1 S. 9. 27 -\DN ^NIDttft DT^ rTOH as they were coming doivn S. said. Gen. 29. 9 JIMS, vlTVl "filTip 13*Tiy as he was still speaking R. came. Particularly when the subj. of both clauses is the same. Jud. 18. 3 PETO fT'jl'Dy nan VY^n rroiTI as they were at the house of Mic. they recognised. Gen. 38. 25, 1 S. 9. 11. Rem. 1. In some cases the accentuation wrongly makes the following noun or pron. subj. to the introductory TPI, e.g. 2 K. 20. 4, 1 K. 20. 40, Gen. 24. 15, 1 S. 7. 10, 1 K. 18. 7 ; other passages show that TP1 is impersonal, 1 S. 25. 20, 2 K. 13. 20, 21, cf. 19. 37 ; 2 S. 13. 30. Rem. 2. The construction is the same with or without the introductory formula. The second clause in the balanced sent, always begins with vav, the first most commonly without. It is the first cl. that to our modes of thought appears circumstantial. 1. When the first cl. has a perf. the two events were contemporaneous or the circumstance had just occurred when the main event happened. 2. When the first has a ptcp. or a nominal sent, equivalent, the main event occurred during the action expressed by the ptcp. 3. When both clauses have ptcp. the two actions, main and subordinate, were going on simultaneously. Some ex. of perf. in first cl. : Gen. 19. 23, cf. 27. 30 for a more precise way of stating that the circumstance had just happened (cf. Jud. 7. 19). Gen. 24. 15; 44. 3, 4, Ex. 10. 13, Jos. I90 HEBREW SYNTAX § 142, 143. 2. 8 (DIB with impf. =perf., Gen. 24. 15), Jud. 3. 24; 15. 14 ; 18. 22, 1 S. 9. 5 ; 20. 36, 41, 2 S. 2. 24; 6. 16; 17. 24, 2 K. 20. 4. Some ex. of ptcp. in first cl. : Jud. 19. 22 (11), 1 S. 7. 10 ; 9. 14, 27 ; 17. 23 ; 23. 26 ; 25. 20, 2 S. 13. 30 ; 20.8, 1 K. 1. 14, 22; 14. 17 (? or, ptcp. = perf.); 18.7; 20. 39, 40, 2 K. 2. 1 1, 23 ; 4. 5 ; 8. 5 ; 9. 25 ; 13. 21 ; 19. 37. With nij? Gen. 29. 9, 1 K. 1. 14, 22, 42, 2 K. 6. 33, cf. Job 1. 16-18. — In 1 K. 13. 20theconsn. is unusual D'aE* Djl Wl "■ "OT 'iTl, cf. the usual one 2 K. 20. 4. Rem. 3. On the use of perf. in attributive and circ. clauses where other languages would use ptcp. cf. § 41, R. 3 ; on similar use of impf. § 44, R. 3. The impf. is much used in circ. cl., cf. Nu. 14. 3, 1 S. 18. 5 went out prospering, Is. 3. 26 sitting on the ground, 5. n wine in- flaming them, Jer. 4. 30 beautifying thyself, Ps. 50. 20 sattest speaking, Job 16. 8 answering to my face. The finite tense must be used with neg., Lev. 1. 17 not dividing, Job 29. 24; 31. 34 not going out. In Ar. the circumstantial impf. may express an accompanying action of the subj. or one purposed by him, and Job 24. 14 'iJTPBp^ seems = to kill, lit. he will kill. Perhaps 30. 28 is rather, I stand up crying out, cf. Ps. 88. 11 ; 102. 14. See § 82. Obs. — The use of this and of circumstance is common in language. And shall the figure of God's majesty Be judged, and he himself not present I How can ye chaunt, ye little birds, An' I sae weary, fu' o' care! Played me sic a trick, An' me the El'r's dochterl RELATIVE SENTENCE § 142. The rel. sent, may be nominal or verbal, e.g. Deu. 1. 4 the Amorite platpnp, IttJ^ IIEN who dwelt. The Engl, relative sentence embraces various kinds of sentences, as — (a) the proper rel. sent., Gen. 18. 8 he took "MJN "iKimi v -: 'tt " |v Pftoy the calf which he had made ready, in which the ante- RELATIVE SENTENCE 1 91 cedent is determined ; and (b) the attributive or descriptive sent., as Gen. 49. 27 Benj. is fptp? 2W a wolf which ravins (a ravining w.), in which the antecedent is indefinite. In the former class of sentences the word "lllJN is expressed, in the descriptive and circumstantial sentences it is omitted. But the language does not strictly adhere to either side of the rule, e.g. Jer. 13. 20 Ip"jri3 "Vjyrt f"PN where is the flock that was committed to thee ? Ex. 1 8. 20. The omission of "IttJN where it should stand occurs mostly in poetry and elevated style. On omission of retrospective pron. cf. § 9 seq. In the following cases of omission of ~ltt)N it can be noted whether the omission be according to the rule a, b, above, or not. § 143. When the antecedent is expressed. — The ""itTN may be omitted — (a) When the retrospective pron. is subj., and whether this pron. be expressed (implied in the verb) or not. Deu. 32. 15 IPJtoV Tvhi* tt5t3 !, 1 he forsook God who made him; v. 17 new gods which had lately come. Jer. 13. 20; 20. 11; 31. 25, Is. 10. 3, 24; 30. 5,6; 40. 20; 55. 13; 56. 2, and often in second half of Is., Mic. 2. 10, Song 1. 3, Zeph. 3. 17, Job 31. 12. Particularly in comparisons, Jer. 14. 8, 9; 23. 29; 31. 18, Hos. 6. 3; 11. 10, Ps. 38. 14; 42. 2; 49- I 3'> 83. 15; 125. 1, Job 7. 2; 11. 16, Lam. 3. 1, Hab. 2. 14. — So in nominal sent., Jer. 5. 15 N*in ]r^\A ^ a nation which is ancient. Gen. 15. 13 QPTv fc^v Y^NS. in a land which is not theirs. Gen. 39. 4, cf. v. 5, Hab. 1. 6, Ps. 58. 5, Pr. 26. 17. (b) When the retrosp. pron. is obj., whether it be expressed or not. Deu. 32. 17 D^T 1 . N7 DT17N gods whom they knew not, cf. Jer. 44. 3. Is. 42. 16 Ijrp VO TH5. in a way which they know not. Mic. 7. 1, Is. 6. 6; 15. 7; 55. 5, Ps. 9. 16; 18. 44; 118. 22, Job 21. 27. And in comparisons; Nu. 24. 6 rn!T 2?tt2 Q^IIN^ like aloes which Je. has planted, Jer. 23. 9, Ps. 109. 19, Job 13. 28. 192 HEBREW SYNTAX § 144, 145. (c) When the retrosp. pron. is gen. by noun or prep. ; Jer. 5- IS 'ii'iU?/ SHlTtO ''iil a people whose speech thou shalt not understand. 2. 6 tt^N Pill "O^ S 1 ? ?!$?■ through which no one passed. Ps. 49. 14 *\"cb 7D3 D|")T Ht this is their fate who are confident. Deu. 32. 37, Ex. 18. 20, Ps. 32. 2 with Jer. 17. 7, Job 3. 15. With omission of retrosp. pron., Is. 51. 1 Ofll^n ""fiiiil the rock out of which ye were hewn, cf. Job 38. 26. § 144. When "^ttJN means he-who, &c, § 10. — In this case -IttJN may also be omitted. Is. 41. 24 D3| iHy. ni#W an abomination is he-who chooses you. Nu. 23. 8 1JJN !1D 7N niap tib how shall I curse him-whom God has not cursed ! (next clause without pron.). Ps. 1 2. 6 yttfr?. JT'BJN 1? ^PB' , I will set in safety him-whom they snort at, Is. 41. 2, 25. — Jer. 2. 8 13^11 l^yi^N 1 ? "nn« after those-which profit not they have gone, cf. v. 11. Ex. 4. 13 "PI FnDJ n^tpjjl send through (by the hand of) him-whom thou wilt send. Is. 65. 1 ^Nltf V^h VlttTVU I was to be inquired it t :•:-:• of by them-that asked not, Jer. 2. 1 1. — Ps. 35. 15 ; 65. 5 ; 8i.6, Job 24. 19; 34. 32, 1 Chr. 15. 12, 2 Chr. 1. 4, Jer. 8. 13, 2 Chr. 16. 9, Ps. 144. 2, Song 8. S she that bore. Lam. 1. 14 ikb ^V 1 ! Dip 751N the hands of those-whom I cannot withstand. Rem. 1. Such cases as 1 S. 10. 11 H*n nrflD, 1 K. 13. 12 ■jpn ^Tin flPK are probably to be construed : what is this •which has happened ? which is the way that he went ? but in usage -|E>K is omitted; cf. Jud. 8. 1, Gen. 3. 13, 2 K. 3. 8. So usually Ar. ma dha what? The same consn. also in tWI 'D, &c, with omission of 1B*K, cf. 1 S. 26. 14, Job 4. 7 ; r 3- l 9> Is - 5°- 9- Rem. 2. Words of time, place, and occasionally of manner, are apt to be put in cons, state before a clause, which takes the place ofagen., 1B>K being frequently omitted. See the exx. § 25. Rem. 3. Phrases like : a man, whose name was Job, are TEMPORAL SENTENCE 193 usually made thus : 3i s K toB>» B*N i S. I. I ; 9. 1. 2 ; 17. 12, 2 S. 3. 7, &c. ; but occasionally 1BB* 3i s K, a transposed descriptive sentence ; Job 1. 1, 1 S. 17. 4, 23, 2 S. 20, 21. 1 K. 13. 2, Zech. 6. 12. The antecedent is indefinite (1 S. 17. 4, 23 is doubtful owing to the obscurity of D^an B"K), and new seems nowhere expressed, though after a def. ante- , cedent it might be, cf. Dan. 10. 1, and in Aram. 2. 26; 4. 5. — In cases of identification, as Gen. 14. 2, 8 Bela, which is Zoar, the usage is "lyJrKVI ypa, cf. w. 3, 17, and often. Similarly with persons, Jud. 7. 1, &c. — On the other hand, in giving the geographical position of a place ib>x is used. Gen. 33. 18; 50. 10, n, Jud. 18. 28, 1 S. 17. 1, 1 K. 15. 27, 1 Chr. 13. 6. Rem. 4. The "ICK is sometimes omitted with and and a verb. Mai. 2. 16 !"IB31 and (I hate) him-who covers. Is. 57- 3 tyWl (seed of an adulterer) and of her-who committed whoredom. Am. 6. 1 'itU? and they-to-whom the house of Is. comes (freq.). Rem. 5. Some instances of omission of 1K ! N in later prose are, Ezr. 1. 5, Neh. 8. 10, 1 Chr. 15. 12 ; 29. 3, 2 Chr. 1. 4; 16. 9; 20. 22; 30. 19. — In 2 K. 25. 10 rd. prep. riN before 3"l with Jer. 52. 14 ; and 2 Chr. 34. 22 rd. ION after rel. Rem. 6. The text Zeph. 3. 18 reads : those sorrowing far away from the assembly will I gather, which (they) are of thee, (thou) on whom reproach lay heavy (lit. was a burden). Well, suggests nsin . . . fiS^D so that no reproach be taken up against her. TEMPORAL SENTENCE § 145. I. The prep, (many of which are nouns in cons, state), e.g. 2, 2, b, p, ^th, "Hn^, 1%, &c, are joined with the nominal form of the verb, the inf. cons. 2. These prep, become conjunctions when the rel. "1U?X, ^, is added to them, and are then joined with the finite forms of the verb. 3. The rel. element ItpW, however, is often omitted, though not usually after strict cons, forms like ^JDb, &c. 13 194 HEBREW SYNTAX §145. (a) When may be expressed by 2, 3, with inf., or by ^5, -ittJNJS with finite. Gen. 39. 18 "h^p "p'HDS. when l lifted up, 24. 30. — 4. 8 iTTtoa. Dn^ria, when they were in the field, 45. 1. — Hos. 11. 1 'to" 1 "#3 "*5 when Isr. ze/Np because thou art dear. 2 S. 3. 30 n'Dn -|E>K 7$ because he slew. Deu. 29. 24, 1 K. 9. 9; neg., tO IB'K ?y 2 K. 18. 12; 22. 13. So ''S ?V Jud. 3. 12, Deu. 31. 17 (nominal sent.), Ps. 139. 14. With rel. omitted in neg. sent., Gen. 31. 20, Ps. 119. 136. Often ?V with inf., Am. 1. 3, 6, 9, 11, &c— So w nnn, Deu. 28. 47 *6 m nm FH3JJ because thou hast not served. 1 S. 26. 21, 2 K. 22. 17, Is. 53. 12. So '3 nnn, Deu. 4. 37. — Of the same meaning is "W* 3i $> Gen< 22 - l8 > a6> 5» 2 S. 12. 6 (-«5>ts !>j; in next clause). So *3 3pi>, Am. 4. 12, 2 S. 12. 10. Without rel., Nu. 14. 24. For other forms cf. Deu. 23. 5, Jer. 3. 8. Rem. 2. Repetition of Wl for emphasis, Lev. 26. 43, Ez. 13. io, cf. 36. 3. FINAL OR PURPOSE SENTENCE 199 FINAL OR PURPOSE SENTENCE § 148. Lighter ways of expressing purpose are — (a) The use of "I (simple vav) with juss., coh., e.g. after an imper., or Anything with the meaning of imper., as juss., cohort. (Jen. 24. 14 n.nttJN') 105 W'lpn let down thy pitcher that I. may drink. Cf. Is. 5. 19 after |5ft2T> in first clause. Similarly after optative, neg., and interrog. sentences. See §§ 62,, 63. In this case the neg. purpose is expressed by fc^Tl with impf., or sometimes tin simply (bl in poetry, Is. 14. 21). (b) The inf. cons, with 7- Jud. 3. 1 'fcPTW DSL rtfW 1 ? in order to prove Israel by them. The neg. purpose in this case is expressed by ^Ty^T). Gen. 4. 1 5 'intoYYiSn "tfl?!? ■lN2fo~73 that whoever found him might not kill him. Gen. 38/9. Cf. §95- § 149. More formal telic particles are — "l$Sl IVEr? with impf., Jer. 42. 6 'oHritt'w 1tt)N Wish that it may be well with us ; oftener Xtfy? simply, with impf. or inf. Cons., Gen. 27. 25 *itt?Q3 ^5^$ ]Vu? i n order that ~my soul may bless thee. Jud. 2. 22 Dl fTTDi ]V^7 in order to prove by them, cf. simple 7 inf., Jud. 3. I (in b above)., Jud. 3. 2, Jos. 11. 20. — Gen. 18. 19, Lev. 17. 5, 2 S. 13. 5. — Gen. 12. 13, Ex. 4. 5, Deu. 4. 1, Hos. 8. 4, Is. 41. 20. — Gen. 37. 22, 1 K. 11. 36, Am. 2. 7, &c. The simple "lipN is also common, Deu. 4. 10 Tito rWY 1 ? piP?? ""!$&$ that they may learn to fear me. Nu. 23. 13, Deu. 4. 40; 6. 3 (cf. v. 2); 32. 46. The neg. clause is best made by N~> IttJN, Gen. 11. 7, Ex. 20. 26; but also by N7 "MEN p>E7, Deu. 20. 18, Nu. 17. 5, and by vh ipvh, Ez. 19. 9; 26. 20, Ps. 119. 11, 80; 125. 3, Zech. 12. 7. In the same sense "tflJN *VO$J|L with impf., Gen. 27. 10; more usually "fiSJJjjl simply with impf., Gen. 27. 4,. or inf. 200 HEBREW SYNTAX §150-152. cons., 2 S. 10. 3. — Gen. 21. 30; 46. 34, Ex. 9. 14; 19. 9. — Ex.9. i<5, 1 S. 1.6,2 S. 18. 18. On ]D lest, that not, cf. § 127 c. Rem. 1. The form \ ]yd? Ez. 21. 20; so \ -MJ(3 1 Chr. 19. 3. On the other hand "lUJOP 2 S. 14. 20; 17. 14. — Jos. 4. 24 «*. antri; ]j»i> inf. Rem. 2. In Ez. 13. 3 WT) VTOTI is not telic, but probably means, and after that which they have not seen ; possibly vfcn should be «f. = WO *6 (1 S. 20. 26). In Ez. 20. 9, 14, 22 ?nn is inf. niph. — Jer. 27. 18 ixh seems euphonic con- traction for impf., cf. 42. 10; 23. 14 should perhaps be pointed in the same way WC = impf. Ex. 20. 20, 2 S. 14. 14. Rem. 3. The particles }5?d5>, &c. are always telic, and do not express merely result. But sometimes the purpose seems to animate the action rather than the agent, Am. 2. 7, Hos. 8. 4, Mic. 6. 16, Ps. 30. 13 ; 51. 6. Rem. 4. Peculiar, Deu. 33. 11 ]WMp]TD that they rise not up (="W5*D), Ps. 59. 14 toJ'W . . . H^3 consume . . . tJial they be no more, cf. Job 3. 9 psv CONSEQUENTIAL SENTENCE § 150. Lighter ways of expressing consequence are the use of vav impf. and vav per/. Also use of simple vav "J with impf. (juss.) after neg. sent., as Nu. 23. 19 tt^N fcO 1WH 7N God is not a man so that he should lie. So interrog. sent., Hos. 14. 10. More formal particles of consequence are •»? that, "ltiJN that, so that. 2 K. 5. 7 i|?« nSfej ftp? ^N D^il^Njl am I God, that this person sends to me ? And often in questions, Gen. 20. 10, Ex. 3. 11, Nu. 16. 11, Job 6. 11 ; 7. 12, Ps. 8. 5. — Gen. 40. 15 I have done nothing Tia.?. ifito Iftfep? that they should have put. With IttJM, 2 K. 9. 37 flNT Wp^" 1- ^ "IttJN bl'pfc? so that they shall not say, This is Jez. Gen. 22. 14, Deu. 28. 27, 51, Mai. 3. 19, Ps. 95. 11, 1 K. 3. 12, 13.— Ez. DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCE 201 36. 27 mht) 1tt5N ilK Wto^J I will cause //W ^ J>fe*// walk (sent, of consequence construed as object sent.). COMPARATIVE SENTENCE § 151. This form of sent, has usually *1ttJN3 in prot. and \3 in apod. Gen. 41. 13 HTT )3 iaV"*inQ "IttJNS 37- 3°i 4 2 - IO > Ecc. 11. 9 #«£ know. A more pro- nounced adversative is DTINT, DT)N £«£, howbeit. Gen. 28. 19, Ex. 9. 16, Nu. 14. 21, 1 K. 20. 23, Mic. 3. 8, Job 2. 5 ; 5. 8; 11. S ; 13. 3, 4; 14. 18. So D| is a correlative adver- sative, Am. 4. 6, 7 "'.nrij! ^ D31 and I on my part. Gen. 20. 6, Jud. 2. 21, Ps. 52. 7, Job 7. 11, Pr. 1. 26. After a neg. £atf is expressed by DM ^2, Gen. 32. 29 '?N"^to ,, DN "VS . . . Ipy 1 «? not Jacob £«* Israel. 1 S. 21. 5, 2 K. 23. 9, Jer. 16. 14, 15. Or simply by *>3, Gen. 45. 8 N ^ OFiTtJV) OfiN N v *'* w ^ J'"* who sent &tf God. 1 K. 21. 15, 2 Chr. 20. 15. 1 When 13 belongs to a phrase it may be omitted before another 13 with a different sense, or the one ">3 serves both uses, e.g. <3 S]tf how much more, &c. may = <3 "3 P|X how much more, when, 2 S. 4. 11, 1 S. 21. 6; 23. 3, 2 K. 5. 13, Pr. si. 27, INDEX OF PASSAGES REFERRED TO Genesis §§ w ' Genesis §§ Genesis §§ i 5 . • 47 4 5 , 48 a, 109 9 11 . 81, 101 Re 14. • 55 «. 113 6 . 39* 13 • . 51 R2 20 . 101 Rt/ 8 29a, 51, 92, 101 Rb 18 . 106 d 21 . 32 R 2, 99 R 1 9 . 100 b, 122 19 . . 36R4 24 . 22 R 3 10 • 7*, 39*t i°° * 20 . 20 R 2, 83 R 2 31 • 32 R 2 12 . . 63 R 3 23 ■ . 21 e 2 4. 22 R 3, 90, 91 a 13 . 34 R 2, 96 R 5, 24 . 10, 34 5 • 45, 96 Obi., 127 104 a 25 ■ ■ 34 R'4 6 . 44 b, 54*, 105 14 . 57 10 8 . 83 R 2 7 ■ . . 76 15 • 38 R S, 95. 148 9 • 34 R 6, 44a 8 . • 39* 18 79, 81 R 3 19. 3° . 108 R 3 9 ■ . 19 19 . 38 R 1 21 . ■ 1. 27. 34 10 . 5' : b, 97 R 1, 100 * 26 <■• 39 <*. 73 R6 . !°5. n 1 . ■ 29 e. 35 11 . 19 I 3, 22a", 38 R I 109 3 • 11 Re, zzd, 62 12 . 102, 103 5 • 37* 4- . 138 a 14 . . 106 d 5 . 116 R 2 6 . ■ 4 R 1, 35 IS ■ 24a, 72, 96 O&r. IS • • 37* 7 • ■ 149 17 ■ . 90, 106 b, 155 24 . 127* 8 . 82 19 . «'i 44*. 73 R 5 6 2 . 101 Re 9 ■ . 108 22 . • • 78 R S 4 g 39* 9 3- . 9a, 9 R 2 6 . • 29 a 24 . 20, 23 S ■ iiR«r 9 • • 37 RS 4 2 . . 29 a, 105 6 . 81, 101 Ra, 132 R 2 10 . 28 R 6, 29 R 8 3 • ■ Si 10 . 32 R 2, 98 R 1 , 13 • 24 R 3, 28 R 4, 4. S • • 47 101 Re 138* 205 206 HEBREW SYNTAX Genesis §§ Genesis §§ Genesis §§■ 14 17. 90, 91 R 3, 145 19 iS • 83 R 4, 14s 24 14 1 1 R 2, 57, 72 R 1, 19. . 22 R 3, 81 16 . . 91 a, 91 b 148 23 • 101 R i 19. ■ S3* 7 . 93 15 138 a, 141 R 1 IS 1 • 4 R 1, 104 b 20 . 96 Obs. 16 . 24^,69^ 2 . . 70 a, 138 £ 21 . ■ 95 18 . • „• 83 3 • 100 R 1 22 . . . 83 19. \ic, 51 R 1, 145 4 • . 106 27 • . IOI 21 . . 100*, 125 6. 58 R 1, 80, 109 R 2 29 . 91 R 1 22 , 24^ , 36R3, 37R4, 7 ■ . ga 32 • 83 R 4, 117 139 R 1, 145 8 . ■ • 7* 33 ■ . 6, 32 R 3 23 . ya f 20, 60, 69a, 10 . 11 Kit, no 35 • 83 R 4, 152 122, 126 12 . Si R 1, 94. "3 20 2 . 101 Kb, 146 R 1 25 ■ . 136 16. 71 R 1 3 ■ .98^, 138 a 27 • . 83, 106 c. 17 ■ . "3. 141 4 ■ . 39c, no 30 . 91 c, 91 R 1, 100a 18 . . 24a, 41a S • . 123 31 • . 98*, 105 16 I . 105 R 1, 113 6 . . 65 d, 107 34 ■ . 104J 3 • 28 I 5, 29 a, 91 R 2 7 • 1 00 d, 104 b, 127 b 38,40 • 53" 5. 2, 23, 101 Ra" 9 • ■ 3°. 44 ■" 42 . 130 a, 135 R 1 6 . . 103 10 . . 15° 45'- . 45, 127// 7 • 101 Ra" 11 ■ 57 R 1, 127 b 49. • 152 8 . 45 R 1, 100 R 1 13 ■ gd, 31, 116 R 4 56- . 138c 10 . ioi Re 15 • . 103 57- . 62 Ii . 117 R 2 16 . • 37 R 4 58. 122, 126 12 . . 24a 17 • . 113 60. . IO7 '7 S- 81 R 3, 155 21 2 . 9*. 83 R 4 62. 105 R 1 10, 12, i 3 • 88 R s 3 • 22 R 4 63- 12 11, 14, 2 S 72R3, 80 S • o • ,>' 8lR3 64. 65 . 21 d 12 . . 9 R 2, 101 Re 7 . 17 R 3, 41 R 2, in 65 •• ' 6, 104 c 17 • 24 R 3, 126 R 2 8 . . 30, 81 R 3 67. 20 R 4, 145 R 1 18 . • 134 9 • . 70 a 25 I'- . . 83 18 1 . . 69 a, 138 b 10 . . 29 a, 29 £ 7- • 37' 2 . . 101 Rd 12 . . 109 8 . . 70a 3.4 . 60 14- 24*, 41 R 3 16. . 106R2 5- . 151 16 . 87, 101 Rb 21 . . 81 6 . 29 d, 29 R 4 17 • 8 R 3, 10 R 3 26. • 91 R 3 7- 21, 21 a", 73 R 5 24. 107 R 1 28 . . 98 a 8. . 142 2S • '. . 58$ 32- . 100/ 8, 10 . 138J 26 . 8, 125 26 2 . . 60 9 • 117. 117 R 3 . 3° ■ 72 R 4 7 • 24 a*, 146 R 1 12 , 11 c, 41 R 2, 92, 31 ■ .108 9- . 118 121, 138 a 34 ■ . 68 10 . 39 a , 51 R 2, 57 R 1 13 ■ . 123 R i, 138 c 22 2 . • 35 R 2 11 . 98 a, 99 14 . . 11 R i, 34 R 2 4 ■ . S°* 12 . ■ 38 R 5 15. 20 . 118 S • 62, ioi R b 13- 86 R 4, 145 17 • 100 #, 104c, 122 6 . . 21 d IS • . 1 R 3, 75 18 . • S3 "■• 6 7 a 12 . 11 Rb, 63, 6 S R 3 . 16 . 34 R 2 21 . 2, 22 R 4, 62 98 b, 104 b 18 . . 48 c 22 . . 100/ 145 R 3 14 • ■ . 150 20 . . 104 c 24 . 37*. 73 R 5 16 . 4 D», 120 R 5, 147 22 . ■ S7Ri 2S • 93. 123. 151 R 2 20, 21 . 29 a 24 . . 104 £ 26 . • 37* 23 • . 36 R 4 27 . . 138 c 28 . • 37/ 13°" 24. . So*, 106 a 27 2 . , . .40 a 29. . 37 R 5, 90 23 1 . • 37C 3 • . 69* 3° ■ • . 63 10 . '98 R 1 4 • 65 a, 145, 149 32 ■ • 153 13 • • 134 6. 70 a, 78 33- • ' l° S 24 3 • gc, 28 R 4 8 . . 98 a 19 1 . 140 R 1 4 • . 29 a 9 ■ . 76 2 . • SS<* S • gd, 43 j, 86a 10 . • 149 4- • 4S. «7 <* 6 . . 127 c 12 . • S3* 7 • . 63, 127 a 7 • . 53a, 106 13 • ■ '33. 153 9 ■ • 33,86Ri 8 . 32 R 3, 63 R 2 13, 14 • 73 R 5 10 . . . 17 R 4 9 • 4 R 1 IS • 27 11 . 22 R 1, 101 Rb xo . 24 R6, 36a, 138a 19 • 60 R 4, 126 13 ■ 1006, IOOC 11 . 22 R 3, 91a 21 . . 6 R 2, 124 14 • . gSb 12 , "i R 2 24 . 121, 126 INDEX OF PASSAGES REFERRED TO 207 Genesis §§ Genesis §§ Genesis §§ &7 25 . ■ 149 31 27 . 82 37 22 . . 60, 91 R 4, 149 26 . . 60 29 96 R 1 23 75.92 29 . . 98c, 116 R 1 3° . 86a 24 . . . 78, 127 b 3° • 86 a, 141 R 2 32. 10 R 1 26 . . 8 R 2, S3 * 33 • 34. 45. 5"o. 99. 33 . 48a 27 . . . .105 100 e, 100 R 4 34 • 31, 39«.48 c 29, 30 . , . 127 b 34 • . 1, 51 R 1, (yjb 40 . • . 83 33 • • ■ -105 36- 6 R 2, 38 R 5, 126 R 3 42. 131, 131 R 2 35.- • •• • 7°* 41 • . 23 44 .'. 55a 38 5 . ,. 58 c, .72 R 1 42 . 79, 83, 103 52 . 152 9 • 54*, 95, "P. 130* 44 • 68, i 45 32 5. . 48* II , 70a, IO7, I27£, I45 45 43*. 55*. 68,96, 145 6 • JiR7 12 . . , .69 a 28 3 • 5S« 7 . . 100 a 15. ■ • 78 R 5 S 28 R 4 8. . 109 17.. . 107 R 1 n 21 R 2, 690, 101 Re 9 ■ • •• • 35 18.. ... 2 13 • . 9 c, 104/' 12 53 f< 9 8 «. 127 *. 140 19 • • -73 IS ■ 41^, 145 15. 16 . . 36 £, 37* 25 . . gf, 100 a, 141 16 . 40a, 118 16 . 1 R 3, 12 28 . . . 21 d, 108 17 • 7*. 154 17. 29 R 8 29 . . . 100 R 6 18 . . . 76 18 .. 7a 39 1, 12 . . .69^ 20 ioo0, 130^ 23 6,37 a 4. 5 ■ • .143 29 2 101 R 5 ■ . 44a 29 9 • 78 R 2 46. ■ 25 18 . 34 R 2 29 . . 24 c 49 • 81 R 1 19 • . 107 40 . . 29 d 53. 56 .130* 19--22 • 55 23 R 2, 126 R 2 10 . . 65 R 6 69 R i, 100 R a 22 37<*i 37/ I3 6R 1 16 . 40 a, p. 143 «., 131 11 . INDEX OF PASSAGES REFERRED TO 213 1 Samuel §§ 1 Samuel §§ 1 Samuel §§ 2 13 . 132 R 2 12 2 . . 58a 19 1 . . 91 b 13. 14 . 55* 3- . 7a 3 • 8, 132a 13-16 . 54* 4- uRi 4- 116 R 3 is- ■ 4S, 53* 11 . . 70 £ 6. 120 16 50* 54 R 1, 86 R 2, 19 . . • 65 R 3 10 . 32 R 3 118, 130 R 4 22 . 30 11 . 91 R 4 18 . 98 R 1, 100 R 7 23 ■ 32 R 2 13 • 3 1 . 73 R 5 19. . 41 b, in 13 2 . nRrf 17- 126 R 5 19. 20 • 54* 7 • ioi, 145 R 3 22 . 32 R 2 20 . . 116 R 6 11 . . 146 R 2 23 • 86 R 4 23 • . 32 R 2, 32 R 3 IS- . 3i 24. ■ 73 2S- 91 R 4 19. . 44* 20 2, 5 • 43* 26. 86 R 4, 136 14 9 . 86 R 4, 101 Rd 3 • . 119 27. 88 R 1, 126 R 3 12 . 75 8 . . no 28 . 72 R 1 IS • • 34 R 6 9 ■ . 121 3° ■ . 860,981; 21 . • 94 13 • 72 R 4, 120 R 4 33- 71 Ri, us 24 , 48 R 2 16 . 73 R S 3 2- 83 R 2 3° - 130 R 3 ; 131 17 • . 67 b 3. . 127 (/ 33 ■ • 93 19. . . 83 S • • • . 83 34- ioiRiS 29 . 106 R 2 8 . 38 R 5, 146 36- 63 R 1, 63 R 2 40 . 28 R 5 12 . . 87 37. 126 R 2 42 • . 36 R 4 17 ■ 120 R 4 39- 120 R 5 21 3 . 9^, 11 Re, 75 4 10 . 29 R 6 42. • 73 R 5 9 • . 128 R 3 12 * . 138,* 44 • 120 R 4 15 • • 45 R 1 IS- . 24 R 3, 116 45 ■ 101 Re 16 . 4, 121 16 . 99 R 3 15 9- 32 R 2, 32 R 4, 22 13 . 88 R 1 19 • 96 R 2 34 R 5 IS ■ 83 R 2 21 . 128 R 3 17 • 101 Rd 23 2 . ■ S3" S 9- 145 R 1 19- . 48* 10 . 73 R 7 11 . . 65a 20 . . 146 R 2 11 . . 126 R 2 6 3- 100 a 23 • . 50 b, 101 22, 23 60 R 4 7, 10 1R3 25 • . 65 R 2 26 . . 141 9 ■ 130 R 4 32- . 70 £ 24 6 . • 72 R 4 12 . . 86c 33 • . in 7 • 117 R 1 18 . 32 R 2 16 10 . . . 36* 11 . • 73 R 5 7 8. . IOI 12 . 101 Rd 14 . . 44a 9, 12 19 R 1 18. 27, 28 R 5 16 . 65 R 2, 101 10 . 141 R 1 23 • 32 R 2, 54 R 1 18 . . 104 a 16. 54 R 1 17 1. 4 . 144 R 3 21 , . 43* 8 7. 72 E . 1, 101 Re 8. 28 R 5, 45 R 1 25 2 . . 3 6a 12 . 96 R 4 14. 34, 36 b, 106 d 3 • . 240* 22 . • 55 37 « 75, 146 R 2 18 4- . . . 58* 3 I- . . 38 17- . 36 R 3 9. ic - • . 38 3- . 116 22 . - . 45 R 2 17. • • 32 R S 4- igd, 37 rf, 54 R 1 25- - - - 38 21 . . 132a 8. 8 R 4, 144 R 1 29. 29 R 1, 44 R 2 23- 20 R 4, 37 d 11 . 65 c, 65 d, 122 9 i- 35 R 2 26-32 . 60 13- 118, 128 R 2 3- . 40 £ 3i- . . . 64 14. 120 R 5, 131 4- . 29 £ 32. . SS *. e S <*• 96 16. 29 R 8, 88 R 2 5- • ■ • & 36- . 58* 24. . 86 R 3 8. ■ ■ 17 R 5 37- . 70a 26. • "3 10. ■ 139 19 1 . . - 78 R S 27. • 43" 12 . 11 R e, 117 3- . 127 b 4 I. 19 R 1, 107 R 1 IS- 29 R 1 4- 9*. 31. S3* 8, 11, 1 8 21 R 2, 145 18. 1R1.7i.8R3 11 . 107 R 1, 121 9- 30 20 . . 44a 14. . 116 R 1 13- 67 b, 94, 122 25- 28 R 5, 146 R 3 17- . 118 19. . 117 26. 57 R 1, 120 22 . . 7 a, 58 a 29. . 130a 32. • 36 R 5 25- 65 R 1, 109 R 2 41- . 136 R 1 33- . 102 27. . 90 43- 4 R 1, 7 4, 88 35- 91 R 4 28. • - - 56 5 2- 71 R 1 10 2 . . 136 R ! 32- - 77 3- • 135 R 2 2, 3 • ■ 55* 37- 141 R 1 4- 11 Re 4- 107 20 3- . 146 5- 29 R 3 6. . 28 R 6, 34 4- - 32 R 2, 73 R 1, 6. . 136 R 1 10 . 102 141 R 1 10 . 60 R 4, 65 d 13- 73 R 5, 104 c 9- 41 R 2, 124 11 . 21 R 2, 86 c 14 . • 37 c 12 . . 16 12 . 116 R3, 126 R4 IS- 32 R 5, 126, 13- 32 R 2 13- 64, in R 1 132 R 2 14- - • 45 R 1 17- 79, 132 R 2 23- 128 R 4 21 6. . 82 20. 51 R 2, 120 R 3 25. 11 Ri 12 . 113, 132 R 2 21 . . 2zd 11 4. . 28 R 5, 75 13- . 86c 22 . 6 R 2, 36 a 10. 17 22 1 . ■ 36 R 3 23- 29 d, 83 12 . 17 R 4 8. . in 2S- . 152 14- . 117 13- 9 "3 7- 17 . . . 84 8. 18 . 22 ?, 40^ 9- 19 • 34 R 5. 83 10 . 21 . 117 11 . 23 44a, 116 R 1 13- 24 . 62 7 2. 25 101 Rrf 5- 26 81 R 2 6. 3° 241?, 98 R 1 7 ■ 2 57 R 1, 100 R 2, 8. 136 R 1 9- 7. 8 . . .80 13- 8 . 116 R 1 14. 9 41 R 1, 49 b, 15- 73 R 5, 128 R 2 23- 11 51 R 2, 116 R 2 24. 20 3, 24 R 2, 116 R 1 25- 22 . 97 R i, 101 R b 8 1. 1 100 R 1 4- 3 244?, 98 R 1 6. 5 ■ • 17 R 5 9, 10 6 . 69 a 12 . 7 • 73 R 5. 75. 76 13- 8 41 R 1 20 . 9 11 b, 41 R 3 23- 12 . 106? 9 i- IS . . 41 R 3 2 . 16 . 1 R 3, 51 R 2, 5- 86 c, 147 6. 16, 17 • ■ -56 8. 24 . 29 e 11 . 26 . 141 R 3 14. 1 in 10 7 . 2 . . 4. ° 10 . 3 . 106 12 . 4 41 IT, SI R 2. 130* 13- 1 . 14, 24 R 3, 62, 14. 2 101 R* IS- 9 2 ■ 77 20. 4 94, 126 R 4 22 . S . . 55*. 88 24. 6. 73 R 2, 78 R 3, 96 R 1 25- 8. 100 e, 100 R4, 127 d 26. 9- 30, 120 R 3, 128 27. 11 . 28 R 1, 141 R 3 28. 12 . 2g«, 45 R 3 3°- 13. 14 41 b, 41 R.i, 115 Sa- 17 41 R 1, 101 Rrf, il 3'. in R 1 5- 19. 63 R 1, 148 6. 23- . ioo£, 116 R 1 8. 24. 91a, 96 9- 25- 4R1, 17 R4i49* 10. 26. 71 R 2 13- Isaiah §§ . 100/ • 59 . 50*. 138 b . 11 Rd, 29 R 8, 38 R 4, 100/, 101 R d 5, 29 R 8, 54 R 1, 102 80 24 d, 41a, no, 117 • 139. 143 56, 105 R 2 7 134 24 R 2 28 R 4, 116 R 2 81, 144 99 R 1 . 29 f 73 R 4 60 R 2, 78 R 3 71 R 1 - 117 R 3 • .67J SiR 6 Jeremiah §§ Jeremiah §§ 1 S- ■ 45 8 13 . . 86 R 2, 144 11 . 111R 1 15 . . . 88 R 2 12 , 82 16 . 28 R 1, 32 R 6, 49 b 21. 60 R 4 18 , 101 R d, p. 143 n. 2 . 100 R 3, 101 Ri 23 • .65 b, 135 R 3 5- 8R2 91. 65*, 135 R 3 6. • 143 5- - 96 R 3 8. ., 144 14. 5 !9 R 7, 98 c 11 . 138 a, 144 17. 73 R 2 16. • 71 21 . I 36 R 1, 139 17. 100 R 6 23 . 72 R 1, 38, 108 R 1 17, 19 . 90 R 1 10 3. 1 R2 18. 8R3 4' 78 R S 21 . . 32 R 2, 71 R 4, 5- . 84 101 R6 10 . 116 R 4 25- 32 R 5 14- 101 Re 27 . . : .2 R 3, 55 c 20 . 73 R 1 28. 69 R 3 11 7. 87 R i 31. . 21/ 12 1 . . 104 32- . 140 4- . 116 34- 116 R 6 6. 8; R 5, 106a 37- . 138 a 8. 73 R 6 31. 88 R 2 12 . 28 Rs 5- 73 R S, 116 R 6 17- ■ 87 7, 10 . 32 R 1 13 4- 20 R 2 15- • 87 7 ■ • 44* 20 . • 151 10 . 32 * 3. 65 R 6 25. 65 RS 12 . . 866 4 3, 4 • . 60 18. 82,83 5- 83 R 5 19- 29 R 6, 116 R s 7 ■ . 128 20 . 142, 143 10 . . 58* 27. 24 R 4 11 . 28 R 3, 95 14 8, 9 • 143 13- . 41a 15- . 138 c 14. . 116 16. IOO R 2 19, 21 . 65 R 5. 65 R 6 18. . 130 b 22 . 100 R 3 19. 88 R 2 28. 109 R 2 22 . 106 R 2 30 . 97 R 1, 141 R 3 IS 9- 24 R 6 5 i- 60 R 4, 125 10 . 29 R 6 7 ■ 8R4 13- 136 R 1 9. 11 Re iS- 32 R 5, 90 13- 19 R 2 18. 126 R 7 IS- 9 R 2, 143 16 6. 108, 109 18. . 78 R 7 12 . 82,95 22 . 132 R 2 13- 72 R 4 6 8. 100 R 3 14,-15 • I5S 10 . 65 R 5 17 2 . 32 R 2 13- ■ 34 S-8 • 54<* 14. 101 Rd 6. 73 15- • J6 *, 96 R 5 10. 96 R 4 16. .8 R 4, 32 R 2 18. 62, 107 20. 32 R 2 23, 24, 5 7 • 95 29- . 86c 18 4, 8 - 132* 7 6. . 109 IS- 100 R 3 9 ■ 88 R 2 16. 73 R 6 9, 10 • • 55* 18. . 62 13- 87 R 1 19 1. 11 Rs 17. 122, 123 12. 96 R 4 18. 88 R 1 13- 88 R j 19. . 11* 20 7. • 73 R 4 8 3- 41 c, 81 8. . i 4S 5 29 R 5, 67* 9 32 K 4, 132a 7- . 40 c 10. . S3 R 1, 65* 9- . , 7 i 11 . - 67 R 2, 143 220 HEBREW SYNTAX Jeremiah §§ Jeremiah §§ EZEKIEL §§ 20 17, 18 45 R 2, 48 a 38 23 . . 108 13 12. 132 R 2 21 1 . ■ 91a 39 11 • 48 R 2 22 . 29 R 4, 96 R 4 9- • 55' 14. 91 R 4 14 3 . 86a 22 4 . 28 R 5, 116 R 1 41 4. . 96R5 7 . 6 S R6 10. . 86e 6. 86 R 4 22 72 E . 4, 132 R 2 14. 88 R 1 42 6. • 149 15 4 132 R 2 16. • 19 10 . 86 R 2, 149 R 2 16 4 86 R 2 17 • ■ 32 R 5 16, 17 . ■ 57 R 3 7 34R4 18. . 117 19. . 40 b 27 29 R 4 19. 67b, 87 44 19 . . 84 R 1, 96 R 4 34 . 109 24. 120 R 5. 130 R 3 25- 84 R 1, 114 38 67R2 3° • . 76, 83 R 2 26. • 119 17 9 91 R 3 23 14- 55*. 149 R 2 28. n R/ 10 . 91a 17- . 86e 46 5- 1 R 1, 86 R 3 21 72 R 4 18. . . 6 5 d 6. 128 R 2 18 5. 18 '. 130 R 5 28. 71 R 2 9- 28 R 6 6 . 29c 29. 44 R 3. 143 16. .32 R 2, 99 R 1 10 35 R 2 36- 31, 116 R 4 48 2 . . 101 19 41 R 2 39- 56, 86 e 9. 86 R 2 20 101 Ra 24 2. zge, 32 R 2 32- 20 R 4 23 . 86a 25 4- 87 R 1 36- ■ 25. US 29 116 R 6 5- . . 64 38. • . 29 e 32 136 R 1 26. 20 R 4 45 • ■ 24 1 X. 3, 101 Re 19 9 • 149 29. . 121 49 12 . 106 R 2 20 9 149 R 2 3°- • 67 R 3 36. . . 21 e 26 146 34- ■ 96 R 5 50 10. . 69b 38 116 R 6 26 5. 87 R 1 34- 86 R 3 21 19 32 R 2 18. 71 R 4 46. . • "3 20 .'96R 1, 149 R 1 27 3- 32 R 2, 99 R 1 Si 24, 35 • . 69* 25 72 R 3 7- 1 46. . . 127 c 3i 88 R 2 8. 72 R 4, 91 R 4 49. • 94 22 4 116 R 6 16. 69 R 2 52 7- 4 R 2, 50a 18 . 2ge 18. 69 a, 149 R 2 20. 29 R 4 24 100 R 3 28 9. gb, 146 23 16 . 69b 16. 21 R 1 EZEKIEL 28 10 30 6. 98 R i, 125, 140 II. • 38 3°. 46 : 88 R 2 12 . • 32 R 5 8. 36 R 4 32 116 R 6 '4. IS 96 R 2 23- 11 Re 40 9R3 21 . 41 R 2 28. . 29 £ 42 • "3 31 1. 29 R 7 9- ■ 31 43 1 S, 6 . 41a 3 3- 63 R 2 24 2 . lie 7- 67 R 2 21 . 29 R 7 2 S 3 • 117 9- . 116 R 6 4 13- 32 R 2 12 . 67* IS- 116 R i, 1270 14. 100 R 3 26 10 28 R 1 18,25 • 143 5 16. . 63 R 3 14. 116 R 6 C2 4- 86a, in, 140 6 9. . . II c 17 22 R 4 10. . 21 e 11 . 28 R 3 20 • 149 12 . 20 R 4 7 2. 36 R 3 27 15 3R2 14. 32 R 2, 55a 24. 32 R 5 3° . 70 £ 20. ■ 136 8 6. 91 R 1 34- 100 R 6 33.44 88 R 1 14. 69 R 2 36 . 29* 33 20. 29 R 4 92. . 32 F I 2, 99 R 2, 28 7 32 R 5 22 . 28 R 1 100 R 7 16 101 34 3- . 86a, in 2, 3, 11 98 R 1 29 7 • 54" 3S 14- • 79 10 3. 29 R 7 30 2 • 117 36 18. 44R1 9- 32 R 2 16. 24R4 22 . 72 R 4 15- 1 R 2 31 16 ■ 28 R 4 23- 88 R 1 11 7- 86 R 3 32 25. 108 R 2 32. • 38 R 5 12 . 9R1 33 4- 108 R 1 37 9- 9 R3, iic, 51 R 4 13- 67 R 3 18 14 R 2 17- 126 24. . (X)b 33 109 R 2 21 . 88 R 1 12 12 . • 147 34 " • 56 38 4- • 79 13 2 . 28 R 1 12 32 R 2 14. 32 R 2 3- 149 R 2 35 10 72 R 4 16. 99 R 2 7- . 108 36 3 .72 R i, 147 R 2 INDEX OF PASSAGES REFERRED TO 221 EZF.KIEL §§ HOSEA §§ HOSEA §§ 36 S • • • 22 R 3 4 17- . 98 b 13 8 . . . . "12 7- . 400 18. 88 R 4 10 10 R 2 27. . 150 S i- . . 21/ 12 . 104 a 38 11. 69 R 4 5- . 41 b 13 123 R 1 16. • 93 6. . no 14 I 116 R 5 17- n R«, zgd 8. 117 R 3 3 28 R 3 39 14- 24 R 4 9- 14 4 .9R1 27. 32 R 2 13- 29 R 1 5 . 70 b 40 2 . ■ 139 "4 ■ ■ 59 7 65 R 6, 113 5- 37 R 4 IS- S3*. 83 R 4 9 8R3 28, 31 32 R 2 6 I. 5 c R s, 59. 83 R 4 10 6 x 3° R 4 7,8 SiRs 43 44R1 INDEX OF PASSAGES REFERRED TO 22$ Psalms §§ Psalms §§ 1 Proverbs §§ 107 6, 13 51 R 5 134 2 69R 2 I 8 1 » 14 26-29 SiR 6 i3S 17 128 R 3 22, 25 • • 145 29 65 R 6 136 4" 7 . 98 i 3° . 29 e 108 2, 7 109 R 3 19. 20 73 R 7 32 ■ 25 109 2 • 3 2 R 5, 67 R 3 !37 3 1 R«, 75, 101 Re 9 11 108 R 2 3 73 R 4 8 . 97 R 1 12 58 !>, 130 R 4 4 c . .29C 8, 9 25 10 1 . 44 fl 7 . 70 « 138 3 .25, 500, si Rs 4 67 R 3 19 • 143 139 8, 9 132 R 2 2 S 132 R 2 24 101 Re 11 48 d, 132 R 2 26 . 16 28 . 49,5 12 34 R 2 11 2 48 d, 132 R 2 TIO 2 60 R 2 13 51 R 5 16 24 R 3. 151 3 • * 29 e 14 71 R 2 21 22 R 3 in 7 . 29 e 18 . 3 R 1, 132 R 2 12 4 24 R 3 8 32 Rs 19 • 134 7 132 R 2 "4 3 si R s 22 . 67,5 19 6 S R S 8 . 76, 78 R 3 140 9 . 65 R 4 26 6 S R 6 "5 7 3R2 12 24 R 3 28 . 128 R 2 8 99 R 2 141 5 128 R 2, 132 R 2 13 10 109 R 1 116 5 104 10 116 R 1 21 72 R 4 14. 15. 18 69 R 2 142 4 . P- 143 »■ 24 • 77 IS 28 R s 143 7 65 R 2 14 2 98 R 1 118 8, 9 33. i°4 144 2 ■ 144 9 116 R 1 11 88 R 4 3 • SiR 3 19 . 40c 19 6 S R 4 13 ■ "5 35 116 R 2 20 28 Rs 146 2 3R1 15 I2 . 84 "9 S 13s R 2 4 132 R 2 20 . 24 a 11. 80 • 149 5 101 Ra 25 6 S R 6 17 65 R 4 147 1 . 116 R 3 16 4 20 R 4 21 99 R 1 18 . 132^ 5 22 R 3 41. 77 69 R 4 148 !3 22 R 3 19 • ■ 32 R 5 62 . 68 r 49 2 16 29 ■ 54 a 72 116 R 3 6 • 139 17 1 116 R 3 75- 78, 86 . 71 R 2 3 ■ 151 86 29 R 4 Proverbs 5 . 40 ft 92 . 131 1 3 . 8 4 12 , 88 R 2, 88 R s 103 . 115 7 . 40 c 13 132 R 2 136 73 R 2 9 . z\c 20 24 R s 137. 155 . "6 R 3 12 . 70 a 18 3 . 48 a! 120 5. 73. "7 27 . 91 a 9 24 R3 7 . 29 e 2 S 131 R2 10, 17 . . . 540 121 3 19 R 2, 128 R 2 19 98 R 1 13. 22 . 132 R 2 123 2 ■ 151 3 10 73 R 2 22 . 48 d 4 20 R 4, 28 R 5 17 . 29 ■ • 49* 24 128 R3 4. 5 84, 88 R 2, 132 R 2 20, 23 . 410 13 5- ■ 65 i, 135 17- 73 22 . 60 R 2, 128 R 7 • 126 R 1 24. 24 R 3 24. . 29 e 13- 8 26 2 . 93 6 2 . 108 R 2, 134 19. 131 R 2, 144 R 1 7,8, H . 151 3- 17 R 2 27. 65 R 6 12 . 108 R 3, 132 R 2 4- 73 R 4 14 1 . . 98^ 17- • 143 8. 135. 135 R 3 2 . . 49 a 18. 99 R 1 9- • • 83 4. 13 • 135 R 3 26. 132 R 2 9, 10 . 65* 10 . • 51 R 4 27 2 . 65 R3 10- 3R2 it • 151 16. 116 R i 11 . • 150 19 . 116 28 1 . 116 R 1, 139 12, 28 122 22 . P- 143 "■ 20 . 17 R 2 x 3- 126 R 2 15 3 . IOI 21 . . . 84 17- 45 R 2, 109 R 1 7 ■ 45 R 1, 71 R 1 29 1, 8 24 R 3 21 . 51 R 4 10 • 24 R 5 21 . 132 R 2 25- • 84 16 97Ri 3° 3- 16, 128 R 6 27. ■ 73 R 5 21 . 69 R 4 15. 24, 29 106 R 2 7 2 . 44 R 3. 143 33 65 R 6 2 5 ■ 128 R 1 3- 108 R2 16 3- 126 R 1 28 108 R 3 4- 130* 4- • 131 3i i- 29 R 1 9- 40 c, 49 a 8 141 R3 9- 71 R 2 12 . ■ 150 9. 10 73 R 6 29. 32 Ri 13- 14. 101 R a . 81 16. 17 116 R 4 101 Rd Job 17- 43^,51 R4 20, 21 . 65* 1 1 . '9. 39a, 144 R 3 20 . IOI R d, 132 R 2 17 1 17 R 3 3- • 37^ 8 3- . 124 2 . 65 R 6 4- • 36 R 3 4- . 130* 18 7 24 R 2 5- 44 R 1, 58 a, 6. 131 R 2 9. 12 . 65 R 6 69 R 3 8. 73 R S 14. 15 109, 109 R 2 6, 13 21 R 2 9- . 29 e 19 3 6 R 2, 83 7- 45 R 1 12 . 44R3 4 132 R 2 8 29 R 2 19- . 115 7 81 R 4 11 120 9 2 . 7&, 118 18 65 R 5. 13° R 4. 12 no 4- 24 d, 48 £, 73 R 5 132 R 2 14 • "5 5- ■ 139 19 6R3 15 . 116 R 5 n-13 . 44a 23 21 e, 135 R 3 16 • „• 5 15, 16 . 130* 25 70 < , 71 R i, 146 R 3 21 39 R 1, 70a 19. . 117 26 101 R c , 108 R 2 2 1 21 R 2 26. 44 R 3, 101 R d 28 146 R 1 2 • 45 R 1 27. ■ 96 R 3 20 4 • 96R5 3 48 R 1 29. • 43* n . 116 10 35 R 2, 121 32, 33 65c, 65 R 4 14 130 R 4 12 17 R 4 10 1 . . P- 143 "■ 17 28 R 6, 61, 128 R 2 3 3 45 R 2 7- 101 R d 23. 26, 28 . 65 R 6 4 . 29 e 8. ■ 51R4 26 • 113 8 96 Obs. •14- 30*, 131 R 1 21 5 22 R 3 9 . 61 16. • • 83 7 71 10 . 48 a 16, 17 65 R 6 9 101 Re 11 ■ 45 R 2 22 . 5i R 4, 128 R 3 16 41 R 5 13 109, 131 R 2 11 2 . 24 R 3 21 1 16 R 2, 145 R 1 IS ■ „ ' I43 5- ■ I3S R 3 22 • 105 20 22 R 3, 24 132 R 2 28, 31, : 2 . 126 R 1 4 1 11 Re 13 48^, 101 Ra 35- 126 R 4 3 , 22 R 4, 41 17 . II c 39 25- . 117 IS 9R2 24 2, 11 . . .49*1 26. . 65 R 6 5 28 R 1, 70a 40 2 . 88 R 2, 88 R s Lamentations 10 70 a, 71 R 1 8. 123 R 1 11. . , 24^, 117 14 . 65 R 6, 83, 141 R 3 9- 65 R 6 4. . . .109 22 • 139 10. 73 R 3 5, 9 . . 71 R 2 25 6 S R 6 19- 65 R 6, 98 c 8. . , .67* 25 2 . 84, 84 R 1 41 3- . 6 S d 10 .. 1 R 1, 28 R 5,41 R3, 5 ioiRi 42 12 . • 37 <* 83 R 1, 98 R 1 26 2 128 R 1 11, 19 . . 65 R 1 4 78 R 8 Song 14. . . 144 7 8 1 1 . 34 R 4 17 . . 73 R 6 27 2 . 119 3- • 143 18 . . . 1..6 R 2 3 28 R 3 6. 28 R S 21 . , 41 R 5 S 117 R 1 9- 17R6 2 13 . 20 R 4, 65 rf 6 . 1 R 1, 101 R c n, 13. 1 4 . 20 R 2 16 . . 41 R 4 8, 22 . . 65 R 6 2 7. . 40* 20 . . 122 12 67*, 86 R 3 *3- 20 R 2 22 . , , . 58 a 19 71 R 1 14. • 75 3i- ■ -143 28 S 101 Rd 3 2 - ■ 6SR5 2 - • 75 8 24 R 3 3- 121 IS . . . 75, 78 R 5 25 • ■ 51 Rs 7 ■ 29 R 7 20 . . .p. 143 n. 29 2 101 Kd, 135 R 3 10 . 78 R 2' 26 . . . 136 R 1 3 • 73 R 1 4 2. 1R3 27 . . . . 146 10 116 R 2 3- 20 R 2 41 , . , 101 R b 12 100 R 3 9- ■ 35 R 1 44 . 28 R S 24 • 141 R 3 11 . 73 R 2 45 84 R 1 30 1 24 R 5 16. . . 64 48 73 R 2 6 34. 94 5 2. • 6s R 5 5° . • 65 R s 16 . p. 143 n. 3- • 73 56 . . 41 R 5 25 22 R 3 5- 107 R 1 4 14 . . . 83 28 . 141 R 3 8. . 241/ 5 6 69 R 2 31 5. 9 • - 13°* 9- 8 R 2,55 c 10 . 116 R 6 11 1 R 2 6 8, 9 1 R 3, 106 R 2 15 . 98 c 9- • 113 Ecclesiastes 18 73 R 4 7 3- 128 Rz 12. . . 34 R 4 31. 35 • • 135 R 3 8. 6R1 9. ... 8 34 • 141 R 3 10. 32 R 2, 32 R s 13. . . 32 Rs 32 3 . 48.7 13- ioi, 125 16 . . , 107 R 1 4 24 R 5 8 1. 28 R s, 132 R 2 17 . . . 106 R 2 I 3 . 127 c 4- 8R3 2 1, 11, 15 . 107 R 1 22 . 83 R 1 5- • 144 16 . „ 101 R d 33 JI 6s R 6 6. • 34 R 6 19 . . . 126 R 1 21 . 6s R 6 32- . . 96 R S 27 . 32 R 5, 65R6 Ruth 14. . . .95 34 8 96 R 4 1 1 . 136 R 1 IS- • . .94 29 6 5 R 6, 136 4- 38 R 1 4 1, 2 . . 88 R 1 3 1 no 9- • 6 5 d 2 . . . 88 R t, 32 • 144 12 , 34 R 2, 130* 3 ■ = 72 R 4 37 6 S R 6 r 3- . 109 5 4- • • .146 35 3. 14 . . 146 R 1 17- 120 R 4 5. . . 126 R 5 10 . 16 21 . . 70 a, 138 c 15 . , 28 R 3 IS 128 R 3 22 . 22 R 4 6 10 . . . . 146 3 6 4 17 R 2 2 3- 28 R 5 712. . . 24 R 3 7 • 49* 7. 553, 69 a, 145 25 . . 78 R 6 9- . 5°*| 16. . 86 R 3 26 . . 9 R 2, 22 c 14. 15 . 63 R 6| 17 . . 29^ 82. . 136 R 1 37 4. S . 65R61 ai. 28 R 5, 41 c 10 . . . 32 R 5 5 71 R 2 3 8. 14 . 69 a 9 * 96 R 4, 146 228 HEBREW SYNTAX ECCLESIASTES §§ Ezra §§ Nehemiah §§ 9 ii . . . 88 R i 2 37 R 3 13 10. . 116 12 4 . . . 24 R 3 59 . 125 17- • 47 7. . , 65 R 6 62 29 R 4, 101 21 . 22 R 3 65 32 R 3 23- 1 R 1, 41 R 3 Esther 3 7 24 R 6 24- 29R8 1 8, 22 . , 2g R 8 8 83 R 2 2 11 . 29 R 8 9 . 116 R 3 1 Chronicles IS- 100 R 2 12 6 R 1, 29 R 7 2 3. 9 . 81 R 3 3 4- . 146 4 22 . . 91 R 3 3°. 32 . 128 R 3 4 2. • 95 5 8 80 3 1. 4 81 R 3 14. • 43 R 1 12 1R1 1. 5 28 R s 16. 114, 130 R 4 7 8 38 R 2 20. • 36 R 3 5 3,6 . 6 S rf 21 1 4 9- 146 R 2 8 6. • ■ 83 8 15 . 3 6c 17- . 83 R 4 8 . . 88 R 1, 95 16, 24 . . 73 R 7 5 i- 17 R 2, 95 9 i- 88 R 5 21 . 29 ■ .■• -■ - Emphasis on subj. expressed by casus pendens, 106 ; shown by expression of pron. in verbal sent. , 107, 107 R 1 ; ex- . pressed by repetition of word, 29 R 8. Equation, vav of, 151.; ' Ethical Dative, 101 R b. Exceptive Sent./ 154. . Exclamation. See Interjec. Sent. Feminine, of living creatures. 12 ; classes of inanimate things, 13 ; abstracts and collect., nomen unitatis, 14; for neut. of other languages, 14 R 2, 1 R 2, 109 R 2. Final Sent., 148. Fractions, how expressed, 38 R 6. Future, expressed by impf., 43 ; fut. perf. by perf., 41. Gender, i seq. ; mas. pron. for fern., iR 3 - Genitive, 23 seq., see Construct; gen. of subj. and obj., 23 R 1 ; of respect usual with adj. and ptcp., 24 R 5 ; gen. of proper names, 24 R 6 ; clause as gen., 25 ; circumscription of gen., 28 R 5. Government of Verb, 66 seq. See Ace. He local, used in enfeebled sense, 69 R 2. Hypothetical Sent., 131. Imperative, 60 ; not used with neg. , 60; lengthened imper., 60 R 1 ; as strong fut., 60 R 2 ; plur. imper. in poetry, 60 R 3 ; imper. with light vav, 64. Imperfect, 42 seq. ; as fut., 43 j in de- pendent actions, 43 ; as subjunct. after telic particles, 43 ; as frequentative, 44 ; use in attributive clauses, 44 R 3 ; impf. in single actions, 45 ; in interrogation, 45 R 1 ; in poetry, 45 R 2, 51 R 5 ; interchange of perf. and impf., 45 R-3 ; impf. as imper., 45 R 4. Imperf. with strong vav, vav impf.',*%} seq. ; continues perf. in its various uses, 48 ; pointing of vav impf. with light vav, 51 R 6. Imperf. with light vav, 59, Impersonal consn., 109. Indefinite Pron., 8. Indefinite subj., one, they, expressed by 3 sing, and 3 plur. of verb, 108 ; real subj. the ptcp., 108 R .1 ; by ptcp. in pi., rarely sing., 108 ; by 2nd pers. in phrase as thou earnest to, 108 R 3 ; in- def. consn. in later style for pass., -108 R2. Infinitive, abstract noun of verb, 84 ; infin. abs., 84 ; as absolute obj., 67 ; uses of inf. abs., 85 ; with its own verb, 86j 86 R 2 ; adverbial use, 87 ; use instead of fin. verb, 88 ; continued by fin. vb., 88 R 3 ; subj. expressed with inf. abs., 88 R 5 ; infin. abs. in these uses in ace, 88 R 6. Infinitive cons., 89 ; does not admit Art., •19 ; its consn., 90 ; governs as its own 232 HEBREW SYNTAX verb, 91 ; order of inf., subj. and obj., 91 ; omission of pron., subj. and obj., 91 R 1 ; subj. in gen., or nom., 91, 91 R 2 ; obj. when noun or pron. in ace, 91 R 3, 91 R 4 ; adverbial (gerundial) use, 93 ; use as gerundive and peri- phrastic fut., 94; with neg., 95; con- tinued by finite tense, 96, 96 R 2 ; later use for finite form, 96 R 3, 96 R 4 ; act. inf. for pass., 96 R 5. Interjectional Sent., 117 ; elliptical, 117 R3- Interrogative Pron., 7 ; particles, 125 R6- Interrogative Sent., without particles, 121 ; particle at head of clause, 122 ; disjunctive question, 124 ; oblique ques- tion, 125 ; answer, 126 ; accumulation of interrog. particles, 126 R 2 ; co- ordination of clauses, 126 R 4 ; ques- tion used in remonstrance, &c. , 126 R 5. R6. Jussive, used occasionally in 1st pers., 63 R 1 ; in 2nd pers. with neg., 63 R 2 ; use of juss., 63 ; anomalous use, 65 R 6 ; juss. with light vav, 65 ; with neg. often merely subjective fut., 128 R 2. Kaph when repeated in comparisons, 151 R 2 ; cf. p. 143. Ki recitativum, 146 R 2. Material, ace. of, 76. Moods, 60 seq. ; moods with light vav, 64 seq. Multiplicatives, 38 R 5. Negative Sent., with fin. verb, 127 ; with imper., 60; with infin., 95 ; with ptcp., 100 ; negative particles, 127 ; double neg., 128 ; neg. extends to fol- lowing clause, 128 R 6 ; neg. as priva- tive, 128 R 1 ; poetical forms of neg., 128 R 5. Neuter, supplied by fern. , 14 R 2, 109 R 2. Nomen unitatis, 14. Nominal Sent., 103. Nota ace. See Ace. Noun as pred. in Nom. Sent., 29 in Jin., 102. Number. See Plur., 15 seq. Numerals, 35 ; Cardinals, 35 seq. ; Or- dinals, 38 seq. ; Distributives, 38 R 4 ; Multiplicatives, 38 R 5 ; Fractions, 38 R 6 ; rules for prose composition, 38 Ots. Oath, 119 ; of denial and affirmation, 120. Object, ace. of, 72 ; verbs governing, 73 ; pronom. obj, omitted, 73 R 5 ; obj. regarded as means of realizing the ac- tion, 73 R 6 ; prep, to conveys action to obj., 73 R 7 I double obj., 74 seq. Object Sent., 146. Optative Sent., 133 ; wish expressed by impf., imper., ptcp., 133 j by vihof with verb, esp. who will give t 135 ; consn. of this phrase, 135 R 3. Oratio obliqua, 146 R z. Ordinal Numbers, 38 seq. Participle, 97 ; act. ptcp. as noun, and pass, as adj., 97 R 1, 99 ; consn. of ptcp., 98, in poetry, 98 R 1 ; ptcp. with Art. as rel. clause, 99 ; restrictions to this use, 99 R 1 ; place of ptcp. in sent., 100 ; pron. subj. omitted, 100 ; neg. of ptcp., 100, 100 R 3 ; continued by fin. vb., 100, 100 R 4 ; much used in description, 100, 138 ; time of ptcp., 100, 100 R z ; joined with verb to be to express duration, 100 R 2 ; governs obj. by prep, to, 100 R 5 ; in later style used as fin. verb, 100 R 6. Passive, expresses an action the agent of which is not named, 79 ; hence governs ace., 79, 81 R 3 ; connected with agent by prep., 81 ; the nearer of two ace becomes subj., 80, rarely the more remote, 81 R 1 ; impersonal use, 81 R 3, 109 ; act. inf. for pass., 96 R 5. Perfect, 39 seq. ; in stative verbs, 40 ; in verbs of speaking, 40 ; perf. of ex- perience, 40 ; of confidence, 41 ; pro- phetic pert, 41, 41 R 1 ; perf. in questions, 41 R 2 ; in attributive clause, 41 R 3 ; precative perf., 41 R. 5. Perf. with strong vav, 52 seq. ; in con- tinuance of impf., S3 seq. ; as frequen- tative, 54, 54 R 1 ; in continuance of imper., coh. , juss., inf., ptcp., 55; in apodosis of temporal, causal and con- ditional sent., 56, 57 R 1. Perf. with vav copulative in narration, later usage, 58. Pluperfect, expressed by Perf., 39 ; by vav impf., 48, 48 R 2. Plural, of compound expressions, 15 ; in things composed of parts, abstracts, 16 ; of Eminence, 16 ; expressed by collec- tives, 17 ; used to express the idea generally, 17 R 3; referred to as collect, unity by sing, pron., 116 R 1. See Agreement. Potential, expressed by Impf., 42, 43. Precative Perf., 41 R 5. Predicate, without Art. , 19 ; stands after subj. in Nom. Sent., 103 ; before subj. when simple adj., and in dependent sentences, 104 ; precedes subj. in Verbal Sent., 105, unless subj. be em- phatic, 103, as in Circ. CI., 105, and where connexion of narrative is broken, 105, 105 R' 1. Pred. coextensive with subj., 19 R 3, 99 R 3. See Agreement. Pregnant Construction, 101. Prepositions, 101 ; uses, 101 R 1 ; com- pound prepp. in later style, ior Re, Present tense, expressed by impf., 42 ; by perf. in stative verbs, 40 ; of freq. actions by impf., 44 ; of single actions INDEX OF SUBJECTS 233 by ptcp. in prose, 45, by impf. in poetry, 45 R 3. Privative use of prep. , 101 R c ; of nega- tives, 128 R 1. Product, ace. of, 76. Pronouns, 1 seq. ; expression of pers. pron. gives emphasis to suff., 1, and to subj. in verbal sent., 107 ; demons, pron. used in appos. to noun, 6 R i, always when noun has suff. , 32, 32 R 3 ; demons, used to give vividness in questions, 6 R 2, 7, 125 R 6 ; used as Rel., 6 R 3. Reflexive pron., how expressed, n ; pronominal ideas ex- pressed by nouns, 11 R 1 ; pron. as copula in Nom. Sent., 106 end ; anticipative pron., 29 R 7. Prophetic Perf., 41, 41 R 1. Purpose Sent., 148. Reflexive Pron., how expressed, 11. Relative Pron., 9 ; Art as Rel., 22 R 4. Relative Sent., 142 ; Eng. rel. sent, often descriptive sent, in Heb., 142 ; omission of so-called rel. pron. in rel. sent., 143, 144. Repetition of same word in various senses, 29 R 8. Restrictive Sent., 153. Secution of perf. by vav impf., 48 seq.; of impf. by vav perf., 52 seq.; of impf. after then, &c., 51 R 2 ; of fut. perf., proph. perf., and perf. of confidence, 51 R2. Sentence, the, 102 ; nominal, 103; verbal, 105 ; compound, 106 ; order of words in sent., in: kinds of sent. . 117 seq. Singular, used for pi., in such words as hand, head, &c, 17 R 4; used dis- tributely in ref. to a plur., 116 R 1. Style, point of, to vary order of words, 105 R 2, 1 1 1 R 3 ; later style, 9 R 2, 22 R 4, 29 R 1, 7, 8 ; 36, 36 R 2, 37 R 3, 4 ; 58, 65 R 6, 69 R 2, 73 R 7, 81 R 3, 88, 88 R 1, 96 R 3, 4 ; 100 R 2, 100 R 6, 101 Rd, 108 R 2. Subject, place in Nom. Sent., 103 ; in Verb. Sent., 105 ; resumption of, in Compound Sent., 106 ; emphasis on, 107, 107 R 1 ; omission of subj. of ptcp., 100 ; double subj., 109 R 3 ; indefinite subj., 108. Subjunctive expressed by Impf., 42. Subordination of words to verb by prepp., 101 ; of one verb to another, 82, 83 ; in impf., 83 R 1 ; in ptcp., 83 R 2. Suffix to noun, in gen., 2 ; to verb, in ace. of obj., 2 ; occasionally indirect obj., 73 R 4 ; suff. to inf. often ace, 91 R4. Superlative, See Comparison. Temporal Sent., 145. Tenses, see Perf., Impf.; conversive tenses, 46. Times (once, twice, &c), 38 R 5. Vav, see Conjunct. Sent., 136 ; vav explicative, 136 R 1 ; of informal in- ference, 136 R 1 ; of equation, 151 ; of concomitance, 114 note. Verb, government byi See Ace. Verbal Sent., 105. Vocative with Art.. 21 end.